Alameda Contra Costa Transit District IFB #2016-1370
Operation Control Center Relocation General Office Building 1600 Franklin Street Oakland, California
SPECIFICATIONS
April 20, 2016
STV Incorporated 560 – 14th Street Oakland, CA 94612 Tel. (510) 763-1313
This page intentionally left blank
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
ALAMEDA CONTRA COSTA TRANSIT (AC TRANSIT) OPERATION CONTROL CENTER RELOCATION SPECIFICATIONS PERMIT SUBMITTAL TABLE OF CONTENTS Division
Section Title
Pages
DIVISION 00 – INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00 00 00 00 01 07 00 01 15 00 21 13 00 30 00 0031 19 00 41 13 00 50 00 00 60 00 00 72 00 00 73 00 00 73 16 00 73 39 00 73 43 00 73 73
TABLE OF CONTENTS ......................................................................................... 4 SIGNATURE PAGE000000000000000.. ....................................... 2 LIST OF DRAWINGS0000000000000000000000000 .. 4 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PRE-BID CONFERENCE EXISTING CONDITIONS INFORMATION BID FORMS CONTRACT CONTRACT BONDS GENERAL CONDITIONS SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE REQUIREMENTS PREVAILING WAGES FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00
SUMMARY ............................................................................................................. 6
01 30 00 01 31 00 01 40 00 01 50 00 01 60 00 01 63 00 01 70 00 01 73 00 01 77 00 01 78 00
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS CUTTING AND PATCHING CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES WARRANTIES
DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 19
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION .................................................................................... 8
DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE 03 05 15 03 20 00 03 30 00
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE .................................................................... 16 CONCRETE REINFORCING000000000000000000000 . 6 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE000000000000000000000 . 20
DIVISION 05 — METALS 05 60 00 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS ...................................................... 10
AC Transit Oakland, CA
TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 00 00 - page 1 of 4
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 06 41 00
ROUGH CARPENTRY .......................................................................................... 4 ARCHITECTURAL PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED CASEWORK000000.. 10
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 92 19
ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS ......................................................................... 4
DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS 08 12 16 08 14 16 08 43 13 08 71 00 08 80 00
ALUMINUM FRAMES ............................................................................................ 4 FLUSH WOOD DOORS ........................................................................................ 8 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT ................................................................. 8 DOOR HARDWARE ............................................................................................ 12 GLAZING ............................................................................................................... 6
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 26 00 09 31 00 09 50 00 09 65 16 09 68 13 09 90 00
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES .......................................................................... 6 THIN-SET TILING .................................................................................................. 6 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS............................................................................ 10 LINOLEUM00000000000000000000000000000.. .. 8 TILE CARPETING.................................................................................................. 8 PAINTING .............................................................................................................. 8
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 14 00 10 28 00 10 51 13
SIGNAGE ............................................................................................................. 10 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES .................................................................... 6 METAL LOCKERS ................................................................................................. 8
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 12 24 00
WINDOW SHADES .............................................................................................. 4
DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION ................................... 8
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 05 00 22 05 23 22 05 29 22 05 53 22 07 00 22 11 13 22 13 13 22 13 19 22 33 13 22 40 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING .................................................. 10 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING .......................................... 8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ..... 10 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ......................... 6 PLUMBING INSULATION .................................................................................... 14 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING ......................................................... 6 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS............................................................................ 6 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES ........................................................ 10 INSTANTANEOUS ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS ......................... 4 PLUMBING FIXTURES ......................................................................................... 6
DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 05 00 23 05 23 23 05 29 23 05 48 23 05 53 AC Transit Oakland, CA
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC ........................................................... 14 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING ................................................... 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.............. 10 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 6 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC SYSTEM ............................................................. 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 00 00 - page 2 of 4
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
23 05 93 23 07 13 23 07 19 23 08 00 23 09 00 23 21 13 23 31 00 23 33 00 23 82 19
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC ..................................... 10 HVAC DUCT INSULATION ................................................................................... 8 HVAC PIPING INSULATION ................................................................................. 8 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC ................................................................................ 6 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC ........................................... 20 HYDRONIC PIPING ............................................................................................. 14 METAL DUCTS .................................................................................................... 10 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES ................................................................................... 8 FAN COIL UNITS ................................................................................................... 4
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 26 05 19 26 05 24 26 05 26 26 05 29 26 05 33 26 24 16
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ................................................ 4 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES ............ 4 WIRING DEVICES ................................................................................................. 4 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ............................ 6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ............................. 6 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS .................................. 8 PANELBOARDS .................................................................................................... 6
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 17 13 32 17 23 32 31 00 32 80 00 32 90 00
AC Transit Oakland, CA
WHEEL STOPS0000000000000000000000000000 2 PAVEMENT STRIPING AND MARKINGS0000000000000000 .. 4 FENCES AND GATES0000000000000000000000000 .4 IRRIGATION SYSTEM000000000000000000000000 .20 LANDSCAPE PLANTING00000000000000000000000 . 18
TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 00 00 - page 3 of 4
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
This Page Intentionally Blank
AC Transit Oakland, CA
TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 00 00 - page 4 of 4
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
AC Transit Contract # 2016-1370 SECTION 00 01 15
LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1
Drawing sheets for the AC Transit Operation Control Center are as follows:
Sheet. Dwg. Title General 1.
G-000 COVER SHEET
2.
G-001 EXISTING SITE PLAN
3.
G-002 8TH FLOOR EXITING PLAN AND CODE ANALYSIS
4.
G-003 ACCESSIBLE PATH OF TRAVEL PL.AN
5.
G004 ABBREVIATIONS
Architectural 6.
A-001 ARCHITECTURAL NOTES AND SYMBOLS
7.
A-100 FRANKLIN PARKING LOT DEMOLITION PLAN
8.
A-110 8TH FLOOR ARCHITECTURAL DEMOLITION PLAN
9.
A-111 8TH FLOOR ARCHITECTURAL CEILING DEMOLITION PLAN
10.
A-114 9TH FLOOR SERVER ROOM DEMOLITION PLAN
11.
A-120 FRANKLIN PARKING LOT PLAN
12.
A-121 8TH FLOOR ARCHITECTURAL PLAN
13.
A-122 8TH FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
14.
A-301 HALLWAY INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
15.
A-302 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
16.
A-303 CONSOLE ROOM INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
17.
A-304 MULTIPURPOSE ROOM PLAN AND ELEVATIONS
18.
A-305 WOMEN’S AND MEN’S ENLARGED PLAN AND MEN’S INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
AC Transit Oakland, CA
LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS Section 00 01 15 - Page 1 of 4
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
AC Transit Contract # 2016-1370
19.
A-306 WOMEN’S AND LOCKER ROOM INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
20.
A-501 ACCESSIBLE MOUNTING DETAILS
21.
A-502 SIGNAGE DETAILS
22.
A-510 WALL TYPES
23.
A-511 WALL TYPES
24.
A-512 STOREFRONT WINDOW AND INTERIOR DOOR DETAILS
25.
A-513 CEILING DETAILS
26.
A-514 CEILING DETAILS
27.
A-516 TYPICAL PARTITION DETAILS
28.
A-518 FIRE STOP DETAILS
29.
A-520 MONITOR MOUNTING DETAILS
30.
A-521 ADMIN LOBBY COUNTER DETAILS
31.
A-522 LOCKER DETAILS
32.
A-530 SITE DETAI;S
33.
A-601 DOOR SCHEDULE
34.
A-602 STOREFRONT WINDOW SCHEDULE
35.
A-603 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE
Plumbing 36.
P-001 PLUMBING LEGEND, ABBREVIATIONS AND NOTES, SCHEDULES, AND RISER DIAGRAMS
37.
P-101 8TH FLOOR PLUMBING DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN
38.
P-201 8TH FLOOR PLUMBING REMODEL FLOOR PLAN
Mechanical 39.
M-001 MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS
40.
M-002 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES
AC Transit Oakland, CA
LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS Section 00 01 15 - Page 2 of 4
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
AC Transit Contract # 2016-1370
41.
M-003 MECHANICAL TITLE 24 FORMS
42.
M-004 MECHANICAL TITLE 24 FORMS
43.
M-101 8TH FLOOR MECHANICAL DEMOLITION PLAN
44.
M-201 8TH FLOOR MECHANICAL REMODEL PLAN
45.
M-401 MECHANICAL CONTROL SEQUENCES
46.
M-501 MECHANICAL DETAILS
Electrical 47.
E-001 ELECTRICAL GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS
48.
E-002 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM AND PANEL SCHEDULES
49.
E-101 8TH FLOOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN
50.
E-201 8TH FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN
51.
E-301 8TH FLOOR ELECTRICAL PLAN
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS Section 00 01 15 - Page 3 of 4
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
AC Transit Contract # 2016-1370
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
AC Transit Oakland, CA
LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS Section 00 01 15 - Page 4 of 4
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
AC Transit Contract # 2016-1370
SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
B.
1.3
Project information. Work covered by Contract Documents. Construction Schedule Constraint Work under separate contracts. Owner-furnished products. Access to site. Coordination with occupants. Work restrictions. Specification and drawing conventions. Miscellaneous provisions.
Related Requirements: 1.
Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.
2.
Section 013200 “Construction Progress Documentation”
3.
Section 013100 “Project Management and Coordination”
PROJECT INFORMATION A.
Project Identification: AC Transit OCC GO Relocation IFB # 2016-1370. 1.
B.
Owner: (referred to as “District”): AC Transit, 1600 Franklin street, Oakland, CA 94612 1.
C.
Project Location: 1600 Franklin Street, 8th floor, Oakland CA 94612
Owner's Representative: Craig Michels.
Architect: STV Incorporated, 560 14th Street, Oakland CA 94612
AC Transit Oakland, CA
SUMMARY 01 10 00 Page 1 of 6
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.4
AC Transit Contract # 2016-1370
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A.
B.
The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1.
Remodel existing office area to suit the office space needs of the AC Transit Operation Control Center. Work includes the removal of all raised floor, two ramps and all carpet. Removal of free standing cubicle partitions and work stations. Removal of ceiling height and full height metal stud walls. Removal of the suspended acoustic ceiling, and existing abandoned mechanical equipment, fan powered terminal boxes, diffusers, return grilles and ducts in the ceiling area. Removal of existing doors and frames. Extension of existing ceiling height walls up to existing structural floor deck above for acoustic separation with provisions for air plenum. Replace finishes including carpet, wall coverings, suspended acoustic ceiling, lighting and paint. Upgrade electrical and data systems including new monitors, speakers, and outlets, some requiring core drill of existing 9th floor slab above for connection to servers. Provide connection to existing UPS systems Provide new interior storefront glazing, doors and frames to match exterior window finishes. Remodel and enlargement of two existing single occupancy toilet rooms and provision of insta-heat hot water at existing toilet rooms. Provide new metal stud walls, reinforce or extend existing frame walls where required, and sheetrock work to meet acoustic separation requirements.
2.
Provide accessible van and car parking stalls at the Franklin Street lot with required signs. Saw cut existing concrete planter and reform ends to match existing. New concrete paved walkway and asphalt paved loading zones. Restripe the lot, label asphalt spaces. Remove existing trees and install new as shown. Modify existing fence and provide a hinged gate that automatically closes, and stays unlocked during business hours. Provide water pressure reducer and new irrigation to support the new and existing trees.
Type of Contract: 1.
1.5
Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE CONSTRAINTS A.
1.6
This operation Control center is being created in tandum with the roll out of the BRT system and to meet the project roll out dates the OCC must be ready to receive consoles and allow time for testing those systems. Project must be ready to hand over to the owner by October 20, 2016. WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS
A.
General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.
B.
Work under other contracts, including but not limited to those listed in this section, may be underway during the time of performance of this Contract. The Contractor must coordinate its work with other Contracts as required by General Conditions Section 007200 and Project management and Coordination , Section 013100.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
SUMMARY 01 10 00 Page 2 of 6
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.
2.
AC Transit Contract # 2016-1370
General Office Weatherization: Includes building envelope repairs and upgrades, electrical and mechanical work a. The Weatherization contractor will remove and replace all the exterior window shades. The OCC contract is responsible for protecting the shades during OCC construction and ensuring operation at closeout. The BRT project will have IT workers installing equipment on the 9th floor for connection to equipment on the 8th floor. coordinate with them for completion of work items that impact their work, and access to work areas.
C.
Information regarding work under other contracts may be obtained by inspection of documents at the District’s Office, and copies may be obtained at the cost of reproduction and handling upon Bidder’s request and payment. These documents are not part of the Contract Documents.
D.
In the event that the performance of Work on contracts other than those listed herein shall occur and the performance of Work on such other contracts materially increases or decreases the Contractor’s costs, the work and the amount to be paid therefore will be appropriately adjusted as determined by the Project Manager.
1.7
OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A.
1.8
All furniture and consoles shown on the plan are to be provided and installed by the owner. 1. This includes monitors, but not the mounting bracket and support for the monitors. 2. This includes the exterior window shades, which the contractor is responsible for protecting since they will be installed prior to start of work on this contract. 3. This includes salvaged existing doors and frames to be cleaned, touched up and reused on site. ACCESS TO SITE
A.
General: Contractor shall have use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.
B.
Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1.
Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways of parking garage, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. b.
C.
Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.
Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weather-tight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
SUMMARY 01 10 00 Page 3 of 6
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.9
AC Transit Contract # 2016-1370
COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A.
Full District Occupancy: District will occupy site and existing building during entire construction period. Cooperate with District during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate District usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with District's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. 1.
2.
1.10
Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from District and approval of authorities having jurisdiction. Notify district not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect District's operations.
COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS
A. 1.11 A.
WORK RESTRICTIONS Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1.
B.
On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 6 a.m. to 4 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2.
C.
Weekend Hours: 6:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.. Hours for Core Drilling or other noisy activities-Notify Project Manager 48 hours in advance of start of Core drilling to allow time to notify District employees and the public, as well as to allow for coordination with on–going District operations within the building.
Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by District or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. 2.
D.
Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Notify Construction Manager not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Obtain Construction Manager's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.
Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to District occupancy with District. 1. 2.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Notify Construction Manager not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. Obtain Construction Manager's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations. SUMMARY 01 10 00 Page 4 of 6
Operation Control Center Relocation
AC Transit Contract # 2016-1370
E.
Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of entrances, operable windows , or outdoor –air intakes.
F.
Employee Identification: District will provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times.
1.12 A.
SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1.
2.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.
B.
Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.
C.
Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. 2. 3.
1.13
Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
SUMMARY 01 10 00 Page 5 of 6
Operation Control Center Relocation
AC Transit Contract # 2016-1370
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
AC Transit Oakland, CA
SUMMARY 01 10 00 Page 6 of 6
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Related Requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.3
Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on use of the premises, Owneroccupancy requirements, and phasing requirements. Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" for temporary protection of existing trees and plants that are affected by selective demolition. Section 017300 "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures. Section 013516 "Alteration Project Procedures" for general protection and work procedures for alteration projects.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse or storage.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.
D.
Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.
E.
Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - page 1 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
1.4 A. 1.5 A.
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site . 1. 2. 3.
4. 5. 1.6
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.
B.
Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building.
C.
Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property for environmental protection, for dust control and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.
D.
Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. Use of elevator and stairs. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
E.
Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations. Comply with Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation." Submit before Work begins.
F.
Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - page 2 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
G.
1.7 A. 1.8 A.
1.9
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. QUALITY ASSURANCE Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program. FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 1.
Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items: a.
Furnishings and equipment.
C.
Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.
D.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. 2.
Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.
E.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
F.
Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1.
1.10 A.
Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
WARRANTY
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. Existing warranties include the following: AC Transit SELECTIVE DEMOLITION April 2016 Oakland, CA 02 41 19 - page 3 of 8
Operation Control Center Relocation
1.
B.
1.11 A.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Blinds at the exterior windows, installed by others. Protect blinds from damage, encase blinds to seal out dust and debris, to protect finishes and cleanliness of the blinds.
Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout. COORDINATION Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
C.
Comply with California Green Building Code’s mandatory measures for achieving the goal to recycle and/or salvage for reuse a minimum of 50 percent of the nonhazardous construction and demolition Construction waste and/or meet the City of Oakland recycling and disposal permit requirements, whichever is more stringent. 1. Provide a construction Waste Management Plan. 2. Use a construction waste management company that can provide the documentation of percentage of waste materials salvaged for re-use or recycled.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.
B.
Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.
C.
Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building demolition operations.
D.
Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs or video.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - page 4 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
1. 2.
3.2 A.
3.3
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Comply with requirements specified in Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation." Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations.
PREPARATION Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A.
Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.
B.
Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed. a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - page 5 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
3.4 A.
PROTECTION Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
3.5 A.
Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1.
C.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. 2.
3. 4.
5. 6. 7. AC Transit Oakland, CA
Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable firesuppression devices during flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 1 hour after flame-cutting operations. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - page 6 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
8. 9.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.Comply with City of Oakland requirements for Construction Waste Management and Disposal.
B.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
C.
Work in Historic Areas: Selective demolition may be performed only in areas of Project that are not designated as historic. In historic spaces, areas, and rooms, or on historic surfaces, the terms "demolish" or "remove" shall mean historic "removal" or "dismantling" as specified in Section 024296 "Historic Removal and Dismantling."
D.
Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
E.
Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. 2. 3. 4.
F.
3.6
Clean salvaged items. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. Transport items to Owner's storage area as designated by Owner. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A.
Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.
B.
Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts.
C.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - page 7 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
D.
3.7 A.
Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers. DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPAapproved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to the City of Oakland 1. 2. 3. 4.
B. 3.8 A.
3.9
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. CLEANING Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE
A.
Remove: frame walls and finishes
B.
Remove and Salvage: freestanding office work space partitions and cubicals to be given to Urban Ore or some equivalent agency or organization where it can be re-used. Metal raised access flooring.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Doors and hardware where called for >.
D.
Existing to Remain: Exterior walls and column beam structures and fire proofing. Perimeter walls that define the work area.
E.
Dismantle: mechanical equipment where noted, plumbing and wiring where it interleaves with pipes and circuits to remain. END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - page 8 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
SECTION 03 05 15 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1
B.
1.02
Developing and Controlling Concrete Mix Design; controlling storage and quality of concrete ingredients; and batching, and mixing. Furnishing and delivering Portland Cement Concrete which meets the approved mix design. The section also includes the following: a
Portland cement.
b
Aggregates.
c
Drying shrinkage of concrete.
d
Concrete admixtures and cementitious materials.
e
Tests and analysis of materials.
f
Mix designs.
g
Batching, mixing, and transporting.
h
Inspection and Testing.
Related Sections: 1
Section 01 33 00:
Submittal Procedures
2
Section 01 43 00:
Project Quality Assurance
3
Section 01 60 00:
Product Requirements
4
Section 03 11 00:
Concrete Forming
5
Section 03 20 00:
Concrete Reinforcement
6
Section 03 30 00:
Cast-In-Place Concrete
REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 116R -
Cement and Concrete Terminology
2. ACI 211.1 -
Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete
3. ACI 301 -
Structural Concrete
4. ACI 304R -
Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete
5. ACI 304.2R -
Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods
AC Transit Oakland, CA
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 05 15 page 1 of 16
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
6. ACI 305R -
Hot Weather Concreting
7. ACI 318 -
Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
8. ACI 523.1R -
Cast-in-Place Low Density Cellular Concrete
B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM C31 -
Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
2. ASTM C33 -
Concrete Aggregates
3. ASTM C39 -
Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
4. ASTM C40 -
Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete
5. ASTM C87 -
Effect of Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate on Strength of Mortar
6. ASTM C88 -
Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate
7. ASTM C94 -
Ready-Mixed Concrete
8. ASTM C127 -
Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Coarse Aggregates
9. ASTM C128 -
Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Fine Aggregates
10. ASTM C131 -
Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine
11. ASTM C136 -
Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
12. ASTM C138 -
Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete
13. ASTM C143 -
Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
14. ASTM C150 -
Portland Cement
15. ASTM C157 -
Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic Cement Mortar and Concrete
16. ASTM C173 -
Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method
17. ASTM C177 -
Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot-Plate Apparatus
18. ASTM C231 -
Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method
19. ASTM C260 -
Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
20. ASTM C289 -
Potential Alkali-Silika Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical Method)
21. ASTM C470 -
Molds for Forming Concrete Test Cylinders Vertically
22. ASTM C490 -
Apparatus for the Determination of Length Change of Hardened Cement paste, Mortar, and Concrete
23. ASTM C494 -
Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
24. ASTM C535 -
Resistance to Degradation of Large-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine
25. ASTM C618 -
Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete
26. ASTM C979 -
Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete
27. ASTM C1017 -
Chemical Admixtures for Use in producing Flowing Concrete
AC Transit Oakland, CA
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 05 15 page 2 of 16
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
28. ASTM D75 -
Sampling Aggregates
29. ASTM #329 -
Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing
C. National Ready Mix Concrete Association (NRMCA): 1. NRMCA -
Certification of Ready Mix Concrete Production Facilities, Checklist
D. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (SSPWC) E. National Bureau of Standards Handbook (NBS Handbook 44) 1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with Section 01 43 00 - Project Quality Assurance Requirements B. Concrete Supplier - Furnish concrete from a plant which has recently furnished specified concrete for a large project, or furnish evidence of plant's capacity to produce and deliver concrete conforming to specified requirements at required rate and which has laboratory capability to develop acceptable concrete mix designs and to control quality of concrete production, in accordance with a preapproved quality control plan. 1. Use semi-automatic batching systems as described in National Ready-Mix Concrete Association (NRMCA) checklist for Certification of Ready Mix Concrete Production Facilities. 2. Use NRMCA currently certified batch plant. C. Mix Design Criteria: 1. Design concrete mixes to conform to ACI 318 Chapter 5. 2. Design mixes to produce concrete having workability, durability, strength, maximum density, minimum shrinkage and permeability as specified. 3. Develop the proportioning of concrete ingredients in accordance with ACI 211.1 for normal weight concrete. 4. Workability - Use approved admixtures to improve Workability, maximize density, reduce water and cement contents, and minimize shrinkage and permeability of concrete, provided admixtures do not adversely affect other required properties of concrete. 5. Strength a. Design concrete mix for specified strength based on required overdesign factor of 1.24 according to ASTM C94, and assuming a coefficient of variation equal to 15. Design each class of concrete so that not more than 10 percent of strength tests will have values less than specified strength, and average of any three consecutive strength tests will be equal to or greater than specified strength. b. Nominal compressive strength of concrete - Class 4000, unless otherwise indicated or specified for cast-in-place concrete, Class 5000 minimum for precast concrete, and Class 2500 for fill concrete. 6. Adjustments of mix designs - For every change in source and type of ingredient and class of concrete test new trial mixes and submit for review and acceptance. 7. Do not vary proportions of ingredients of approved mix without submitting results of laboratory tests of new proposed mix and obtaining written acceptance of Resident Engineer. 8. Concrete indicated to be air-entrained - Verify required air content, as determined by ASTM C173 or ASTM C231, conforms to value and is within tolerance recommended by ACI 301 and ACI 318, corresponding to maximum size of coarse aggregate. AC Transit Oakland, CA
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 05 15 page 3 of 16
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
9. Do not exceed following slump for concrete without water reducer admixtures, of average of three successive batches of concrete at placement, as determined by ASTM C143. a. Concrete Classes: Class 2500 Class 4000 Class 5000
4 inches 4 inches 4 inches
b. Paving
2 inches
c.
3 inches
Non-reinforced concrete, other than paving
d. Reinforced concrete slabs, Beams, girders, walls and other Structural members and secondPour concrete after addition of high-range water reducer
5 inches
e. Concrete placed by pumping
6 inches
f.
6 inches
Drilled-pier concrete
g. Concrete encasing structural steel
6 inches
10. Maximum Laboratory Drying Shrinkage as determined by ASTM C157 Class 2500 - 0.065% after 28-days Class 4000 - 0.0548% after 28-days Class 5000 - 0.0548% after 28 days D. Concrete Pump Plant - Conform to ACI 304R. Maintain equipment in quantities to preclude stopping concreting because of failed equipment. E. Perform field job control tests as specified and accepted by Resident Engineer. F. Quality Control For Batch Plant 1. Provide continuous batch plant quality control inspection during batching operations by an independent laboratory for structural placements of 150 cubic yards or greater and when required by the Project Quality Manager, for performing tests in accordance with reference standards listed. Provide concrete from batching plant, reviewed and accepted by Resident Engineer and meeting the following requirements: a. Arrangement: 1) Provide separate bins or compartments for each size or classification of aggregate and for each type of bulk portland cement. 2) Provide compartments of ample size and constructed to maintain materials separately under working conditions. Equip batching plant such that flow of each material into batcher is stopped automatically when designated weight has been reached. Weigh aggregates in a separate scale in a separate weight batcher. Water may be measured by weight. 3) Arrange plant to facilitate inspection of operations. Provide suitable access for obtaining representative samples of aggregate from each of the bins or compartments for test purposes. Provide delivery of materials from batching equipment to within accuracies specified in ASTM C94. 4) Batching - In accordance with ACI 304R subject to review and acceptance by Resident Engineer. 5) Do not use aluminum bins, compartments, hoppers or equipment. AC Transit Oakland, CA
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 05 15 page 4 of 16
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
b. Water Batcher and Dispensers for Admixtures: 1) Provide equipment for batching water and air-entraining or other admixtures at batching plant except in cases where mixing is performed at Worksite in paving mixers or in truck mixers. 2) Provide a suitable water measuring device capable of weighing mixing water within specified requirements for each batch. 3) Provide measuring devices for addition of admixtures capable of ready adjustment that have at least three percent accuracy, to permit varying quantity of admixture batched. 4) Calibrate dispensers at intervals required by the NRMCA. Record results of calibration and make available for inspection by Resident Engineer. c.
Aggregates Moisture Control - Independent testing laboratory shall perform tests of moisture content of aggregates as frequently as they deem necessary for adjustment of the amount of water required by design in the concrete mix.
d. Scales - Provide adequate facilities for accurate measurement and control of each material entering each batch of concrete. Conform to applicable requirements of NBS, Handbook 44. e. Recorders 1) Provide accurate graphical or digital printout record of scale readings, including initial readings, after each of the aggregates, water, cement and admixtures have been batched before delivery to mixer, using accurate recorder or recorders. 2) Record Data - Show on each printout, date and time of batching; identification number - identical to concrete ticket and codes for mix design and for Contract Section. 3) House each recorder in a locked, dust-tight cabinet. 4) Clearly indicate different types of mixes used by stamped letters, numerals, colored ink or other suitable means on charts or tapes so that variations in batch weights of each type of mix can be readily observed. a) Show on charts or tapes, date and time of day (stamped or preprinted) at intervals of not more than 15 minutes. b ) Provide recorders of a type that prints required information in duplicate. One copy of recorded batch weights for each load shall accompany each delivery ticket as supplied by producer. Verify that the identification number is identical to concrete delivery ticket. Deliver one copy with its corresponding concrete ticket to Resident Engineer at time and site of concrete placement. 5) Place recorders in a position convenient for observation by plant operator and Resident Engineer. f.
Protect weighing, indicating and control equipment against exposure to dust and weather and insulate against vibration or movement caused by operating equipment in plant.
g. Dry batching 1) When bulk cement and aggregates are hauled from a central batching plant to mixer, place cement for each batch in an individual compartment which, during transit, will prevent cement from intermingling with aggregates and will prevent loss of cement. 2) Provide bins of batch trucks with suitable covers to protect materials from wind and wet weather.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 05 15 page 5 of 16
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
3) Provide batch compartments of sufficient capacity to prevent loss in transit and to prevent spilling and intermingling of batches as compartments are being emptied. 2. Aggregates: a. Coarse Aggregate 1) Use one source of coarse aggregate only. Coarse aggregate grading - Conform with ASTM C33, Table 2, size number 467 (1 1/2 inch to No. 4). Coarse aggregate grading for walls 18 inch thick or less - Conform with ASTM C33, Table 2, size number 67 (3/4 inch to No. 4). Coarse aggregate - Use ASTM D75 for standard practice for sampling aggregates. Coarse aggregate to conform with ASTM C33. 2) Deleterious Substances - Do not allow amount of deleterious substances present in coarse aggregate to exceed following:
PERCENT DELETERIOUS SUBSTANCE
MAXIMUM PERCENT BY WEIGHT
Material passing No. 200 Sieve (ASTM C117) Normal Size range No. 4 to 3/4 inch
0.5
Nominal size range 3/4 inch to 1-1/2 inch:
0.4
Shale (ASTM C123, specific gravity of heavy liquid 1.95):
1.0
Clay lumps (ASTM C142):
0.5
Coal and lignite particles
0.5
Friable particles
0.25
Other deleterious substances
1.0
Total of all deleterious substances:
3.0
3) Abrasion - Do not exceed 52 percent of wear when coarse aggregate is tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or ASTM C535. 4) Soundness - Do not exceed 15 percent of weighted percentage of loss when coarse aggregate is subjected to five cycles of magnesium sulphate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88. b. Fine Aggregate 1) Use one source of fine aggregate only. Fine aggregate to conform to ASTM C33. 2) Do not allow the fineness modulus of fine aggregate from a given source to vary more than 0.2 from base fineness modulus. The base fineness modulus shall be that value that is used by the independent testing laboratory for the trial batch or for mix design, shall not exceed as specified in Section 2.01.C.2 3) Provide fine aggregate gradation represented by a smooth granulometric curve within the limits specified, using U.S. standard sieves, square openings. SIEVE SIZE 3/8 inch No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 30 No. 50 AC Transit Oakland, CA
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 05 15 page 6 of 16
PERCENT PASSING BY WEIGHT 100 95-100 80-100 50-85 25-60 10-30
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
No. 100 No. 200
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
2-10 0-5
4) Soundness - Do not exceed 12 percent by weight of weighted percentage of loss when fine aggregate is subjected to five cycles of magnesium sulphate soundness test in accordance with ASTM C88. 5) Deleterious Substances - Do not allow following substances to be present individually in amounts exceeding following:
PERCENT DELETERIOUS SUBSTANCE
MAXIMUM PERCENT BY WEIGHT
Material passing No. 200 Sieve (ASTM C117)
3.0
Shale (ASTM C123, specific gravity of heavy liquid 1.95):
1.0
Clay lumps (ASTM C142):
1.0
Friable particles
1.0
Coal and lignite particles
0.5
Other deleterious sub stances: (such as shale, alkali, mica, coated grains, soft and flaky particles, and loam) Total of all deleterious substances:
2.0 5.0
6) Organic Impurities - Provide fine aggregate free from harmful injurious amounts of organic impurities as determined by ASTM C40. Should material fail to pass test for organic impurities in sand for concrete, material will be acceptable after passing test described in ASTM C87. If fine aggregate shows by colorimetric test a darker color than sample originally approved for Work, withhold use until tests have been made to determine whether change in color is indicative of harmful injurious amount of deleterious substances. G. Ready-Mixed Concrete - Conform to ASTM C94. 1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal requirements and procedures. B. Mix design for each concrete class and for each change of ingredients and ingredient sources, including admixtures, and at least 10 cylinder compression test of past record of mix. C. Mix design to include test report of compression strength at time of form removal as indicated in Article 3.06B. D. Methods for hot weather mixing capable of producing concrete with a temperature not over 90F nor under 55F at time of placement. Refer to ACI 305R for hot weather concreting. E. NRMCA batch plant certification to Resident Engineer 30 days before prior to delivery of concrete to Worksite. F. Mix design, laboratory test reports, and mill or manufacturer's certificates attesting the conformance of ingredients with these Specifications. Use ingredients in design mix which are representative samples of materials used in Work. Provide one design mix for each class of concrete. Establish mix design through an approved testing laboratory. AC Transit Oakland, CA
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 05 15 page 7 of 16
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
G. Certifications by concrete supplier of design mixes to specified requirements in respect to strength, unit weight, maximum size aggregate, air-entrainment, slump and water-cement ratio. H. If source, brand or characteristic properties of ingredients need to be varied during term of Contract, submit compliance with Article 1.04.B.7 to Resident Engineer for review and acceptance. I.
Copy of recorder printout with corresponding concrete delivery ticket.
J.
Manufacturer's product data.
K. Batch Tickets - Certification or delivery tickets before unloading at Worksite in accordance with ASTM C94 from concrete supplier with each batch delivered to Worksite listing following information in addition to ASTM C94 requirements: 1. Name of supplier 2. Name of batching plant and location 3. Serial number of ticket 4. Date 5. Truck number 6. Specific job designation (Contract number and location) 7. Volume of concrete in cubic yards 8. Specific class and type of concrete, in conformance with specification requirement 9. Time loaded and amount of water added 10. Type and brand of cement 11. Weight of cement 12. Weight of water 13. Maximum size of aggregates 14. Weights of coarse and fine aggregates, respectively 15. Type and amount of admixtures 16. Certification that mix complies with reviewed and accepted laboratory design mix and quality control plan. 17. Mix design designation. 18. Class and weight of mineral admixtures. 19. Batch weight of mix L. Certificate of nonreactive aggregates: fine and coarse aggregate. 1.05
DEFINITIONS
A. “As indicated”: Plan, elevation, sections, details, and general notes shown on approved contract drawings, shop drawings, and working drawings, Approved for Construction by Resident Engineer and as specified herein. B. The word "concrete" followed only by a class designation (that is, Concrete Class 3000-1-inch) indicates normal weight aggregate concrete, such as concrete having a 28- day compressive
AC Transit Oakland, CA
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 05 15 page 8 of 16
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
strength of 3,000 psi, a maximum coarse aggregate size of 1 inch, and a minimum unit weight of 145 pounds per cubic foot (without reinforcement) at 28 days. C. The word “HVFAC ” followed only by a class designation (that is, HVFAC 4000 – 1- inch) includes normal weight aggregate high volume fly ash concrete, such as HVFAC having a 56-day compressive strength of 4,000 psi, a maximum coarse aggregate size of 1 inch, with a minimum unit weight of 145 pounds per cubic foot (without reinforcement). D. The term "fill concrete" indicates a concrete containing sufficient cement to develop a 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi. E. The term "lean concrete" indicates a concrete containing the equivalent of two 94-pound sacks of cement per cubic yard. F. The term “controlled density fill” indicates a flow-able mixture of aggregate and cementitious materials containing sufficient cement to develop a 28-day compressive strength of 50 to 150 psi. G. The term "mass concrete" indicates any volume of concrete with dimensions large enough to require that measures be taken to cope with the generation of heat from hydration of the cement and attendant volume change in order to minimize shrinkage and cracking. H. The term “high volume fly ash concrete” (HVFAC) indicates concrete using a mix that replaces 25 percent or more of weight of Portland cement with specified fly ash. I.
1.06
Except for the foregoing definitions, the words and terms used in these Specifications conform to the definitions given in ACI 116R. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for general requirements for product delivery, storage, and handling procedures. B. Deliver packaged materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers bearing manufacturer's name and brand. C. Load, transport, handle, store and batch concrete materials in a manner to ensure materials are not contaminated, unclean, segregated or affected in any way detrimental to final product. D. Aggregates: 1. Transport and stockpile aggregates separately according to sources and gradations. Handle aggregates in manner to prevent segregation and loss of fines, and contamination with earth and foreign materials. 2. If aggregates show segregation or different grades become mixed, rescreen aggregates before placing in proportioning bins. 3. Do not use aggregates from different sources or of different gradations alternately. Mix aggregates only to obtain different gradations. 4. Do not transfer aggregates directly from trucks or railroad cars to proportioning bins when moisture content will affect accuracy of proportioning of concrete mixture. In such cases, stockpile aggregates until excess moisture drains off. E. Packaged Cement: 1. Deliver packaged cement to mixing site in original sealed packages labeled with weight, name of manufacturer, brand and type specified. AC Transit Oakland, CA
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 05 15 page 9 of 16
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
2. Store packages on raised platforms in a manner to protect from moisture and contamination (in watertight enclosures). 3. Do not use cement which has been reclaimed by cleaning bags. 4. Do not use cement which has been damaged by exposure or overstocking. 5. Do not use packages varying more than three percent from specified weight. 6. Packaged cement - Subject to test at any time. 7. Do not store packaged cement more than six months. 8. Use packaged cement on basis of first received, first used. F. Bulk Cement: 1. Store bulk cement separately from other cement and protect to prevent deterioration from exposure to moisture and intrusion of foreign matter. 2. Provide facilities in ready-mix plant to maintain separation of cement meeting specified requirements from other cement. 3. Provide facilities in cement manufacturer's plant for sampling of cement at weighing hopper or in feed line immediately before entering hopper. 4. Use only the brands of cement approved in the concrete mix design. 5. Store admixtures to prevent contamination, evaporation or damage. Protect liquid admixtures from harmful temperature ranges. 1.07
TRANSPORTATION
A. Verify each transit mix truck used for delivery of concrete to Worksite has been satisfactorily inspected by the Contractor’s inspector.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01
MATERIALS
A. Portland cement: Confirm to ASTM C150, Type II, low alkali for underground construction, Type I or Type II or other construction. Type III portland cement may be used where high early strength concrete is a requirement as approved by Resident Engineer. B. Coarse Aggregates: 1. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33, clean and uniformly graded as indicated in Section 1.04.F.2.a.1 or specified elsewhere. When not specified, provide 1 inch maximum size (ASTM C33, Size No. 57). Deleterious materials in aggregates shall not exceed the limits specified in ASTM C33 or specified per section 1.04.F.2.a.2 2. Aggregate for Exposed Concrete: Aggregate for concrete which will be exposed to the public shall be obtained from one source for each type of aggregate required in order to produce a uniform color. 3. Source of Aggregates: Aggregates shall be obtained from a selected aggregate source, known to produce aggregates complying with the specified requirements, as approved by Resident Engineer. 4. Coarse aggregate shall consist of hard, dense, durable crushed or uncrushed gravel or crushed aggregate conforming to ASTM C33 and the herein specified requirements. AC Transit Oakland, CA
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 05 15 page 10 of 16
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
5. Coarse aggregate shall conform to the following requirements when tested in accordance with the specified ASTM Test Methods: a. Resistance to Abrasion (ASTM C131): The loss for aggregate size range 3/4 inch to 3/16 inch after 100 revolutions and 500 revolutions shall not exceed 10 percent and 40 percent, respectively. The test sample shall consist of 7 parts of grading B and 3 parts of grading C. b. Resistance to Abrasion (ASTM C535): The loss for aggregate size range 1-1/2 inch to 3/4 inch (grading 3) after 200 revolutions and 1000 revolutions shall not exceed 10 percent and 40 percent, respectively. c.
Soundness (ASTM C88): Weighted average loss after 5 cycles shall not exceed 12 percent when tested with sodium sulfate.
d. Specific Gravity (ASTM C127): Bulk specific gravity on the basis of saturated surface-dry aggregate shall be not less than 2.60. e. Potential Reactivity (ASTM C33): Only aggregates considered innocuous in accordance with Appendix XI shall be used in the work. C. Fine Aggregate: 1. Fine aggregate shall consist of hard, dense, durable, stone or rock fragments uniformly graded from 3/8-inch to fines, washed clean, conforming to ASTM C33 and the herein specified requirements. Deleterious substances in aggregate shall not exceed as specified in section 1.04.F.2.b.5 2. Fine aggregate shall conform to the following requirements when tested in accordance with the specified ASTM Test Methods: a. Specific Gravity (ASTM C128): Not less than 2.60 on a saturated surface-dry basis. b. Organic Impurities (ASTM C40): Supernatant liquid must be lighter in color than the reference standard color solution. c.
Soundness (ASTM C88): Loss in 5 cycles of sodium sulfate test shall not exceed 12 percent.
d. Potential Reactivity (ASTM C289): Only fine aggregate considered innocuous shall be used in the work. e. Fineness Modulus (ASTM C33): Fineness modulus shall be in the range of 2.30 to 3.00, however, the variation of the fineness modulus shall not exceed 0.20. D. Drying Shrinkage of Concrete: 1. A trial batch of the proposed (mix design) concrete shall be prepared using the aggregates, cement, and admixture proposed for this work. From the trial batch, three specimens (4 inches by 4 inches by 11 inches) for determining "Drying Shrinkage" shall be prepared, cured, dried, and measured as specified in ASTM C157 and ASTM C490, with the following modifications: a. Cast-in-place concrete shall be moist cured for 10 days. b. Measurements shall be made and reported for 7, 14, 21, and 28 days of drying after 9 days of moist curing and 1 day of steam curing. Measurements for HFVAC shall also be made and reported for 56 days of drying. 2. Shrinkage of specimens for cast-in-place concrete shall not exceed 0.040 percent when measured in accordance with ASTM C157 and ASTM C490 after 21 days of drying. 3. Shrinkage of HVFAC specimens shall not exceed 0.055 percent when measured in accordance with ASTM C157 after 28 days drying including minimum 7 days moist cure. AC Transit Oakland, CA
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 05 15 page 11 of 16
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
E. Concrete Admixtures and Cementitious Materials: The Contractor may include accepted concrete admixtures and cementitious materials in the mix to improve the water-cement ratio or watercementitious ratio or workability of the concrete, providing the strengths specified and other desirable characteristics of the concrete can be achieved and maintained. Admixtures require Resident Engineer acceptance before they may be used, and shall be included in the design mix, introduced in solution form. Admixtures shall be added at the batch plant, except as directed by Resident Engineer. 1. Demonstrate that admixtures have minimum three years history of demonstrable satisfactory performance on major public projects under equivalent conditions. 2. Chemical Admixtures, Water-Reducing: ASTM C494, Type A. 3. Air-entraining admixtures – Conform to ASTM C260 4. Pozzolanic Admixtures: ASTM C618, Class N or F. 5. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class F, with a maximum of 25 percent retained on the No. 325 mesh sieve and a loss on ignition of 1.0 percent maximum. 6. Pigments for integrally colored concrete: ASTM C979, for synthetic or natural iron oxides (red). Concentrated color pigments containing no fillers, adulterants or admixtures that will affect characteristics or performance of concrete mix design. 7. Chemical Admixtures, Plasticizing: ASTM C1017, or ASTM C494 Type F or Type G, highrange water-reducing admixtures. Introduce chemical admixture in solution form, in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 8. Prohibited Admixtures: Admixtures containing chlorides or sulfides are not acceptable. 9. Use admixtures that are compatible with each other. 10. Do not use retarding or accelerating admixtures unless specifically approved by Resident Engineer and at no cost to owner. F. Water: 1. Water for concrete mixes, curing, and cleaning shall be clean and potable. 2. Does not contain impurities, suspended particles, algae or dissolved natural salts in quantities that will cause: a. Corrosion of reinforcing steel. b. Volume changes that will increase shrinkage cracking. c.
Efflorescence.
d. Excessive air-entraining. 3. Free from substance which would interfere with the chemical action by which concrete is formed, detract from concrete strength and durability, cause variations of concrete color, or cause a combination of such defects. Chloride concentrations in total concrete mix to not exceed 250 ppm. Wash aggregates with potable water and do not use recycled wash water for mixing concrete. G. Reinforcement Fibers: Chopped strands of alkali-resistant polypropylene fibers added to the concrete mix for protection against shrinkage cracks where indicated or required. 2.02
COMPONENTS
A. AGGREGATES FOR FILL AND LEAN CONCRETE - Conform to SSPWC, Subsection 200, 1.4 and 1.5.5.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 05 15 page 12 of 16
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
B. AGGREGATES FOR PUMPED CONCRETE - Conform to ACI 304.2R, Chapter 4. C. TEST EQUIPMENT - Provide six cylinders conforming to ASTM C470 for casting test specimens in accordance with ASTM C31, as specified herein, for each 150 cubic yards and fractions thereof, of each class of concrete, and for daily pours less than 150 cubic yards, of structural concrete.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01
MATERIAL PREPARATION - Mixing Concrete
A. Operations: 1. Provide concrete mixers that discharge concrete from mixer that is uniform in composition and consistency throughout mixed batch. 2. Reduce size of batch to be mixed or increase mixing time when charging and mixing operations fail to produce a concrete batch which conforms to above criteria. 3. Add water before, during and following mixer charging operations. Amount of water to be as indicated by mix design; do not add water more than in excess of the weight indicated by mix design. B. Central-mixed Concrete: 1. Arrange mixers in centralized mixing plants so mixing action in mixers can be observed by plant operator from a location convenient to mixing plant operator's station. 2. Do not load mixers more than in excess of rated capacity. Mix concrete ingredients in a batch mixer for not less than time specified for various mixer capacities after ingredients, except full amount of water, are in mixer. Mixing time may be reduced if thorough mixing, can be obtained in less time, as determined by testing. 3. Mixing Time CAPACITY OF MIXER
TIME OF MIXING
2 cu. yd. or less
1 1/2 minutes
3 cu. yd.
2 minutes
4 cu. yd.
2 1/2 minutes
Larger than 4 cu. yd.
Determined by mixer performance tests by Resident Engineer.
4. Equip each mixer with a mechanically operated batch counter, and a timing and signaling device to indicate completion of required mixing period. C. Truck-mixed Concrete - Conform equipment and procedures to ASTM C94. 3.02
EXAMINATION
A. Verify aggregates from different sources are not mixed, except as required to satisfy accepted mix design. B. Verify mix designs and sources of aggregates are not changed without written review and acceptance by Resident Engineer.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 05 15 page 13 of 16
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
C. Verify aggregate mixtures have not become segregated. 3.03
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
A. Prepare aggregates by methods which produce concrete having a temperature of not more than 90°F and not less than 55°F immediately before placing. B. Cool concrete ingredients as required and by methods acceptable to Resident Engineer. 3.04
PROPORTIONING
A. Verify concrete ingredients are proportioned in conformance with established mix design, as accepted by Resident Engineer, for particular strength class and usage. 3.05
INSTALLATION
A. MEASURING, BATCH PLANT, MIXERS AND AGITATORS, MIXING AND DELIVERY - Verify ASTM C94, Sections 7, 8, 9 and 10 are satisfied by concrete supplier. B. ADMIXTURES 1. Verify admixtures are dispensed for each batch from a dispenser having capacity to measure quantity required for one batch. 2. Chemical admixtures - Use water-reducing admixtures in concrete which will be below grade and in contact with rock, earth, ribs and lagging or fill and concrete that will be placed by pumping. 3. Consistency - Maintain slump range at point of delivery for concrete compacted by approved mechanical vibrators within specified limits. Do not use concrete in Work if slump exceeds maximum allowable by one inch or more. a. Use same type and brand cement from same mill for entire project. b. Supply fine or coarse aggregate from one source, non-reactive. c.
Provide a concrete mix of consistent quality. Maintain uniform weight ratio of pigment to cement. Do not change mix design without acceptance by Resident Engineer. Vary ratio of pigment to cement only when mix design significantly affects color.
d. Do not exceed slump as specified in section 1.04.C.9. e. Rinse mixer drum thoroughly before batching colored concrete and after colored concrete has been discharged. f.
Determine pigment amount introduced to batch by weight, not volume. Do not estimate.
g. Add color by weight directly into mixer along with aggregate, cement and water. h. Operate transit mixer at charging or mixing speed (50 to 100 revolutions) for five to 10 minutes while adding color. 3.06
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field job quality control tests in accordance with the test method and at the frequency specified below. TEST DESCRIPTION
STANDARD MINIMUM
FREQUENCY PROCEDURE
Material Qualifications AC Transit Oakland, CA
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 05 15 page 14 of 16
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Manufacturer's Product Data of Certifications of Compliance - Each material/ component used
As Specified in Part 2
Once - Initial acceptance; each shipment used on Worksite
Aggregate
ASTM D75, C33
Once - Initial acceptance and at each change in source of supply
Potential Reactivity
\ASTM C289
Once - Initial acceptance and at each change in source of supply
Cement
ASTM C150
Once - Initial acceptance and at each change in source of supply
Water
Paragraph 2.01.F
Once - Initial acceptance and at each change in source of supply
Admixtures
Paragraph 2.01.E
Once - Initial acceptance and at each change in source of supply
Concrete Mix Design
ASTM C94
Once - Initial acceptance and each revision; each class of concrete used
Job Control Aggregate Gradation
ASTM C136
Monthly, as a minimum or as directed by Resident Engineer
Cement
ASTM C150
Once per month or every 1000 tons
Chemical Admixture
ASTM C494
Once - Initial acceptance and at each change in source of supply
Mineral Admixture
ASTM C618
Once - Initial acceptance and at each change in source of supply
Slump
ASTM C143
First load and each set of cylinders
Compressive Strength
ASTM C31 and C39
Six cylinders per each 150 cu. yd. or portion thereof
Air Content
ASTM C231
First load and each set of cylinders when required by mix design
Temperature
ASTM C177
Paragraph 3.3 First load and each set of cylinders
Compressive Strength
ACI 318
Continuous throughout job moving Average
B. Concrete Testing 1. Contractor to employ and pay for services of a testing laboratory to perform material evaluation and concrete design mix. Concrete testing agency to meet requirements of ASTM E-329. AC Transit Oakland, CA
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 05 15 page 15 of 16
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
2. For each 150 cubic yards of structural concrete, or less, placed in one operation take six 6 inch by 12 inch cylinders to be tested for compression strength per ASTM C39 as follows: 3. Test two one cylinders at seven days and record compressive strength. 4. Test two cylinders at 28 days to determine compressive strength. Record average of two cylinders. Concrete represented by sample - Acceptable if: a. Average of all sets of three consecutive strength tests per shift equals or exceeds design strength. b. No individual strength test (average of two cylinders) falls below design strength by more than 500 psi. c.
Maintain two cylinders as a spares, Discard after acceptance of 28 days test
5. Prepare and test trial mixes. From trial mixes, prepare a combined particle distribution curve for concrete mix. 6. Construction mixes not conforming to combined particle distribution curve, or with unacceptable water/cement ratio, total mix water, or total cementitious material, or yielding concrete of unsatisfactory unit weight, will be rejected and will require adjustments in concrete mix and new test trial, for review and acceptance of adjusted mix. 7. Conduct a proof test for pumpability of design mix. Reproduce job conditions by introducing "U" turns in steel pipe laid on ground. Pumped concrete may be deposited in another mixer. Use accepted concrete mix only. Resident Engineer may elect to conduct independent testing of materials to verify actual properties.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 03 05 15 page 16 of 16
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 SECTION 03 20 00
CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY A.
1.02
1.03
1.
Reinforcing bars for cast-in-place concrete.
2.
Reinforcing mesh for cast-in-place concrete.
3.
Accessories, including but not limited to chairs and tie wires.
4.
Steel bar reinforcing for masonry (furnish and deliver to site).
5.
Miscellaneous concrete work, including but not limited to areaways, cast-in-place valve boxes, pits, splash blocks, equipment bases, and other items as shown or required to complete the work.
RELATED SECTIONS A.
Section 03 11 00, Concrete Forming.
B.
Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
C.
Section 32 13 13, Concrete Paving.
D.
Section 32 16 13, Concrete Curbs and Gutters.
REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
1.04
Section Includes: Labor, materials, and equipment necessary and incidental to placing:
ACI – American Concrete Institute: 1.
ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete.
2.
ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
3.
ACI SP-66, ACI Detailing Manual.
B.
ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials.
C.
AWS – American Welding Society: AWS D1.4, Structural Welding Code—Reinforcing Steel.
D.
Caltrans – California Department of Transportation: Standard Specifications.
SUBMITTALS
AC Transit Oakland, CA
CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 20 00 page 1 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
1.05
A..
Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacing, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel and wire fabric, bending and cutting schedules, supporting and spacing devices, and lengths of any lap splices.
B.
Product data and certifications for mechanical couplers.
C.
Product data for epoxy bonding adhesive.
D.
Certification: requirements.
E.
Plan, procedures, and materials for anchoring reinforcing bars into existing concrete.
F.
Certification: Welding operator's certificate.
G.
Chemical Analysis: For bars to be welded, in accordance with code.
Manufacturer or supplier's certification that products meet specified
QUALITY CONTROL A.
Perform work in accordance with ACI 301, ACI SP-66, ACI 318, and Caltrans Standard Specifications.
B.
Provide Resident Engineer with access to fabrication plant to facilitate inspection of reinforcement. Provide notification of commencement and duration of shop fabrication in sufficient time to allow inspection.
C.
Source Quality Control: Refer to Section 01 45 00, Quality Control, for general requirements and to following paragraphs for specific procedures. Testing laboratory shall perform the following conformance testing, shall select test samples of bars, ties, and stirrups from the material at the site or from place of distribution, each sampling including at least two 18-inch pieces, and shall perform the following tests according to ASTM A615.
D. 1.06
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
1.
Identified Bars: If samples are obtained from bundles as delivered from the mill, identified as to heat number, accompanied by mill analyses and mill test reports, and properly tagged with Identification Certificate so as to be readily identified, perform one tensile and one bend test for each 10 tons or fraction thereof of each size of bars. Submit mill reports when samples are selected.
2.
Unidentified Bars: When positive identification of reinforcing bars cannot be made and when random samples are obtained, perform tests for each 2.5 tons or fraction thereof, one tensile and one bend test from each size of bars.
Certification of Welders: All welding both in shop and in field shall be performed by certified welding operators.
MARKING AND SHIPPING A.
Deliver materials in a timely manner to ensure uninterrupted progress.
B.
Bundle bars, tag with identification, and transport and store so as not to damage any material. Use metal tags indicating size, length and other marking shown on placement drawings. Maintain tags after bundles are broken. Store materials by methods that permit ready access for inspection and identification.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 20 00 page 2 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01
2.02
2.03
MATERIALS A.
Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A706, Grade 60, for structural concrete.
B.
Spiral Reinforcement: ASTM A82.
C.
Mechanical Couplers: Sleeve-threaded per Caltrans Standard Specifications Section 521.08C(2).
D.
Magnesium Phosphate Concrete: Conform to Caltrans Section 83-2.02D(1).
E.
Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185, furnished in sheets only.
F.
Welding Electrodes: AWS D1.4, Table 5.1 and 5.5 low hydrogen electrodes, E9018 for Grade 60 steel, E70XX Series for grade 40 steel.
ACCESSORY MATERIALS A.
Tie Wire: ASTM A82, annealed copper-bearing steel, minimum 0.0625 inch (aka 16 gauge) uncoated diameter, galvanized.
B.
Chairs and Similar Support Items: 1.
Standard manufactured products conforming to CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.
2.
Use dense precast concrete supports with embedded wire ties for reinforcement placed on grade. Elsewhere, use wire bar supports.
3.
Items in contact with formed surfaces shall not have the potential of staining concrete surfaces exposed to view.
FABRICATION A.
Comply with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice for fabrication of reinforcing steel.
B.
Bending and Forming: Fabricate bars of the indicated sizes and bend and form to required shapes and lengths by methods not injurious to materials. Do not heat reinforcement for bending. Bend bars No. 6 size and larger in the shop only. Bars with unscheduled kinks or bends are subject to rejection. Use only tested and approved bar materials.
C.
Welding: Use only ASTM A706 steel where welding is proposed. Perform welding, where shown or approved, by the direct electric arc process in accordance with AWS D1.4 using specified low-hydrogen electrodes. Preheat 6 inches each side of joint. Protect joints from drafts during the cooling process; accelerated cooling is prohibited. Do not tack weld bars. Clean metal surfaces to be welded of all loose scale and foreign material. Clean welds each time electrode is changed and chip burned edges before placing welds. When wire brushed, the completed welds must exhibit uniform section, smooth welded metal, feather edges without undercuts or overlays, freedom from porosity and clinkers, and good fusion and penetration into the base metal. Cut out welds or parts of welds found defective with chisel and replace with proper welding. Prequalification of welds shall be in accordance with Code.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 20 00 page 3 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01
PLACEMENT A.
Coordinate with placement of formwork, formed openings, and other work.
B.
Install mechanical couplers in accordance with Caltrans Sections 52-1.08C(2) and manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Place, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position. Spot welding of chairs or other items to reinforcing steel is not permitted.
D.
Provide additional reinforcing bars at wall and slab openings as detailed. Before placing bars, and again before concrete is placed, clean bars of loose mill scale, oil, or any other coating that might destroy or reduce bond.
E.
Drill, install, and bond reinforcing steel dowels into existing concrete as indicated on the drawings, in accordance with Caltrans Section 51-1.13 and 83-2.02D(1) using the approved magnesium phosphate concrete (not mortar) and in accordance with the approved plan, procedures, and materials.
F.
Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as indicated on drawings.
G.
Securing in Place: Accurately place bars and wire tie in precise position where bars cross. Bend ends of wire ties away from the forms. Wire tie bars to corners of ties and stirrups. Support bars according to CRSI's Placing Reinforcing Bars using approved accessories and chairs. Place precast concrete cubes with embedded wire ties to support reinforcing steel bars in concrete placed on grade and in footings. Use care not to damage vapor barriers where they occur.
H.
Exposed Concrete Surfaces: Provide stainless steel or exterior quality vinyl plastic tipped chairs, bolsters, and accessories where exposed on exterior or interior concrete surfaces not to be painted or permanently covered.
I.
Splices: Do not splice reinforcing bars at the points of maximum stress except where indicated. Lap splices as shown or required to develop the full strength or stress of bars. Stagger splices in horizontal wall bars at least 48 inches longitudinally in alternate bars and opposite faces.
J.
Field Welding of Bars: As specified for fabrication.
K.
Maintaining Bars In Position: Take adequate precautions to assure that reinforcing position and spacing is maintained during placement of concrete.
L.
Reinforcing Mesh: Lap one full mesh plus 2 inches, but not less than 6 inches. At splices, wire tie, and support the same as specified for bars.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 20 00 page 4 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 3.02
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Resident Engineer will perform field inspection under Section 01 45 00, Quality Control. Reinforcement shall be placed in accordance with the approved detailed shop drawings. 1.
Inspection: Obtain inspection and approval of reinforcing before concrete is placed.
2.
Welding Inspection. Whether welding is done in the shop or at the site, perform welding of reinforcing bars under inspection of the testing laboratory welding inspector retained by the Authority.
PART 4 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A.
No separate measurement or payment will be made for the work of this section. END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 20 00 page 5 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
THIS PAGE DELIBERATELY LEFT BLANK
AC Transit Oakland, CA
CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 20 00 page 6 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 SECTION 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY A.
B.
C.
Section Includes: 1.
Furnishing, placing, testing, repair/patching, and initial curing of cast-in-place concrete unless otherwise specified.
2.
Grout and drypack, except as otherwise specified.
3.
Placing of embedded anchor bolts and inserts.
4.
Vapor barrier under slabs on grade.
5.
Miscellaneous concrete work and other items as shown or required to complete the work.
Related Sections: 1
Section 01 33 00:
Submittal Procedures
2
Section 01 43 00:
Project Quality Assurance
3
Section 01 60 00:
Product Requirements
4
Section 03 05 15:
Portland Cement Concrete
5
Section 03 11 00:
Concrete Forming
6
Section 03 15 13:
Waterstops
7
Section 03 20 00:
Concrete Reinforcement
Section Does Not Include: 1.
The provision of this section shall not apply to: a.
Section 32 13 13,
Concrete paving.
b.
Section 32 16 14,
Concrete Curbs and Gutters.
. 1.02
REFERENCES A.
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
AASHTO M171 -
Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 page 1 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 2. B.
C.
1.03
AASHTO M182 -
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf
American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1.
ACI 117 -
Tolerances for Concrete Construction & Materials and Commentary
2.
ACI 301 -
Structural Concrete
3.
ACI 304R -
Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete
4.
ACI 304.2R -
Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods
5.
ACI 305R -
Hot Weather Concreting
6.
ACI 309R -
Consolidation of Concrete
7.
ACI 318 -
Building code Requirements for Structural Concrete
8.
ACI SP-15 -
Standard Specification for Structural Concrete
ASTM International (ASTM): 1.
ASTM C33 -
Concrete Aggregates
2.
ASTM C42 -
Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete
3.
ASTM C94 -
Ready-Mixed Concrete
4.
ASTM C150 -
Portland Cement
5.
ASTM C171 -
Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
6.
ASTM C309 -
Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete
7.
ASTM C881 -
Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete
8.
ASTM D994 -
Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type)
9.
ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber
10.
ASTM D1667 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Closed Cell Foam)
11.
ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)
12.
ASTM D1752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
13.
ASTM D3740 - Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction
D.
South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) regulations
E.
Caltrans: State of California Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Comply with Section 01 43 00 - Project Quality Assurance, for Quality Assurance Requirements.
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 page 2 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
1.04
B.
Qualifications of Concreting Supervisor; Responsible charge experience in placing, consolidating and curing portland cement concrete in structures similar to those of this Contract.
C.
Comply with South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) regulations for Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC).
D.
Construction tolerances allowable for various cast-in-place concrete components shall be per ACI 117.
E.
Obtain material from same source throughout work.
F.
Furnish materials in manufacturer’s packaging with applicable instructions.
SUBMITTALS A.
Refer to Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal requirements and procedures.
B.
For each concrete placement operation:
C.
1.05
1.
Detailed descriptions of intended equipment and methods for conveying, placing, consolidating, preliminary finishing and curing of concrete.
2.
Ready-mix delivery tickets: In accordance with ASTM C94.
4.
Detailed description of proposed methods for protecting fresh concrete from inclement weather and extremes of temperature.
5.
Location of concrete placement with scheduled date, intended rate of placing, mix design designation and updates.
6.
Special concrete placement and compaction procedures.
7.
Proposed method capable of controlling concrete temperature at time of placement between 55°F minimum, 90°F maximum.
Concrete Lift Drawings: Concrete lift drawings for each lift, indicating locations and sizes of pipe sleeves, conduits, inserts, reglets, anchor bolts, openings, recesses, equipment support, unistruts, ceiling supports, monorail supports, embedded damper supports, embedded plates for edgelights, embedded plumbing and fire protection piping, embedded angles for drains, embedded plates and other embedded items. Submit concrete lift drawings for each trade separately at the same time and also on a common background. Notify Resident Engineer of conflict. Propose adjustments required to the placement of reinforcing steel and concrete with respect to the conduits and other embedded items.
DEFINITIONS A.
1.06
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
“As indicated”: Plan, elevation, sections, details, and general notes shown on approved contract drawings, shop drawings, and working drawings Approved for Construction by Resident Engineer and as specified herein.
WORKSITE CONDITIONS A.
Environmental Requirements: 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Hot weather concreting: Maximum temperature as recommended in ACI 305R. CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 page 3 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
2.
B.
1.07
a.
Do not allow temperature of concrete, when deposited, to exceed 90F during hot weather.
b.
When ice is used to maintain concrete temperature, add with or without water; include weight of ice in calculation of water cement ratio.
c.
Protect concrete from direct sunlight during curing period.
d.
Keep concrete moist with cool water sprinkling, wet burlap or cotton mats, or other acceptable methods which do not adversely affect concrete.
Wet Weather: Do not place concrete in locations exposed to weather if rain intensity is expected to wash cement paste off aggregate, unless adequate shelter for concrete has been provided.
Inspection Immediately Before Concreting: 1.
C.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Substrate Surface Condition a.
Verify surface is hard, reasonably level, slightly moist, and free from loose, saturated and frosty material and debris.
b.
Verify previously placed concrete has been prepared for bonding as specified and is free from loose and extraneous matter.
2.
Membrane: Verify hydrocarbon resistant (HCR) membrane has been placed, is intact, and joints and penetrations have been sealed and that all required QC inspections have been completed.
3.
Products to be Embedded: a.
Inspect anchorage devices, remove defective pieces, install new pieces, and correct omissions, improper positioning, and weaknesses in fastenings.
b.
Verify pipes and conduits to be embedded are satisfactorily tested, with external threads capped, internally-threaded and non-threaded ends plugged, and anchorage devices secured in indicated locations.
c.
Verify waterstops have been installed as specified in Section 03 15 13 Waterstops.
4.
Formwork: Inspect for defects in alignment, grade and integrity of bracing, tie-bolts, falsework, camber, and joints; eliminate defects.
5.
Concrete Reinforcement: Inspect for quantity, sizes and positioning. Verify fastenings will prevent displacement.
6.
Do not place concrete until inspection has been completed and defects have been corrected.
Where reinforcement is so congested concrete placement is impeded, implement special concrete placement and compaction procedures, with prior acceptance of Resident Engineer.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for general requirements for product delivery, storage and handling procedures.
B.
Transport and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94, ACI 304R and this Section.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 page 4 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
C.
Arrange and maintain delivery schedules; once placement has begun, do not delay more than 30 minutes between fresh deposits and previously placed deposits.
D.
Handle, store and batch concrete materials to prevent contamination, dampness, segregation and other conditions detrimental to final product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01
2.02
MATERIALS A.
Fill Concrete: Class 2500, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Non-Slip Material: Nonmetallic, dry shake, emery or silica quartz abrasive aggregate.
C.
Water: Any potable additional water required during placement of concrete shall be in accordance with CRD-C400.
D.
Sand: Clean, dry, natural or manufactured sand, free from clay lumps, rocks and debris for under/over vapor barrier.
E.
Reinforcement: As specified in Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcement.
ACCESSORIES A.
B.
Curing Materials: 1.
Burlap - Double thickness conforming to AASHTO M182, Class 3.
2.
Sheet Materials - Conform to ASTM C171.
3.
White Polyethylene Sheeting - Conform to AASHTO M171.
4.
Liquid Membrane Forming Curing Compound - Conform to ASTM C309, Type 1-D or 2 as selected by resident Engineer. Certify Class B curing agent will not affect bond of subsequent finishes. Comply with SCAQMD rules and Federal air quality regulation 40 CFR 52.254. a.
Type 1-D compound, containing fugitive dye readily distinguished upon concrete surface and will become inconspicuous within seven days after application.
b.
Type 2 compound, containing white pigment that when applied to surface exhibits reflectance not less than 60 percent of magnesium oxide. Use where surfaces are subjected to sunlight.
c.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, use Mastercure 100 WB, BASF Construction Chemicals, 100-Clear Series, W. R. Meadows or equal approved.
Hardener: 1.
Furnish hardener conforming to ASTM C309 and consisting of one of the following: a.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Blend of magnesium fluosilicate and zinc flousilicate combined with wetting agent, containing not less than two pounds of flousilicate per gallon.
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 page 5 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation b.
35 percent sodium silicate having a specific gravity corresponding to 42 degrees as tested by the Baume Method.
2.
Hardener - Penetrating compound, leaving no residue, compatible with abrasive aggregate, curing compound, sealer and subsequent floor finishes.
3.
Hardener may be combined with a curing agent and sealer to form a single compound conforming to these requirements.
C.
Mortar for Patching Concrete: One part portland cement of type and manufacture used in damaged concrete to two parts fine aggregate conforming to ASTM C33.
D.
Grout for Bond New Concrete to Set Concrete: Equal parts of portland cement and fine aggregate by weight and not more than six gallons water per sack cement.
E.
Vapor Barrier: Six-mil polyethylene.
F.
Neoprene Membrane for Noise and Vibration Control: Closed cell neoprene expanded rubber conforming to ASTM D1056, Grade RE-45L, and as indicated.
G.
Epoxy-Resin Adhesive: In conformance with ASTM C881. Concresive Epoxy by BASF, Sikadur Epoxy by Sika Corporation, HVA Capsule Anchors by Hilti, Ultrabond by Adhesives Technology Corporation or equal, subject to approval by Resident Engineer.
H.
Construction Joint Materials: 1.
2.03
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: a.
Key-Loc Joints, Form-a-Key Products.
b.
Keyway PVC Tongue and Groove Joint Form, Sealtite by W. R. Meadows
DRYPACK AND GROUT MIXES A.
Drypack: Field mixture of 1 part portland cement to 2 parts fine aggregate mixed to a damp consistency such that a ball molded in the hands will stick together and hold its shape. At Contractor's option, the specified admixture may be added for increased workability at lower water/cement ratio. In lieu of field mixing, Contractor may use factory mixed drypack material as follows: 1.
B.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: a.
Set Grout, BASF Building Systems.
b.
Dry Pack Grout, Euclid Chemical Company.
Portland Cement Grout: 1.
Prepare grout consisting of portland cement, sand, and water.
2.
Use portland cement grout in recesses, holes, and surfaces under structural members, and at other locations shown.
3.
Do not use staining ingredients in grout exposed to view.
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 page 6 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 4.
C
D.
Formulation: Two parts sand and one part cement measured by volume. Mix grout with sufficient water to permit placing and packing, approximately 45 minutes before use.
Non-Shrink Grout: Furnish factory premixed such that only water is added at the jobsite. Mix in a mechanical mixer with the minimum amount of water necessary to produce a workable grout. Non-shrink grout shall conform to ASTM C1107, Grade A, and shall be a commercial formulation suitable for the proposed application. Grout shall be capable to attain a minimum of 7000 psi strength, unless a higher strength is noted on the gdrawings. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: 1.
L & M Crystex
2.
Master Builders "Masterflow 713 Grout"
3.
U. S. Grout "Five Star Grout"
Epoxy Grout: 1.
Epoxy grout for bonding freshly-mixed concrete to existing or previously poured concrete shall be in conformance with ASTM C881, Type II
2.
Two-component liquid epoxy adhesive with inert aggregate filler and appropriate viscosity for intended use.
3.
Factory pre-packaged separately and field mixed.
4.
Mix in proportions according to manufacturer's recommendations.
5.
For floors and horizontal surfaces (Low viscosity):
6.
7.
2.04
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
a.
Adhesive Engineering "Concresive 1463"
b.
Sika "Hi-Mod LV"
For floors and horizontal surfaces (Medium viscosity): a.
Adhesive Engineering "Concresive 1000"
b.
Sika "Hi-Mod LPL"
For vertical and overhead applications (Non-sag consistency): a.
Adhesive Engineering "Concresive 1441"
b.
Sika "Hi Mod Gel"
8.
Aggregate: As recommended by epoxy grout manufacturer.
9.
Water: Clean and free from deleterious substances.
FINISHES A.
Surface Sealer: Surface sealers shall be clean, penetrating, non-glossy, non-darkening and nearly imperceptible after curing with no surface buildup. Coating/sealer - Water repellent - Effective against chlorides. Composition - Alkyl – Alkoxy Silixane with long alkyl groups.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01
PREPARATION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 page 7 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation A.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Install vapor barrier under slabs-on-grade, except where installed in exterior open locations, as follows: 1.
Before placing reinforcement and concrete, verify subgrade and aggregate base are smooth and free from debris.
2.
Place layer of sand uniformly over areas to receive vapor barrier, as recommended by the Geotech report.
3.
Lay vapor barrier on undisturbed sand. Lap side and end joints not less than four inches and seal watertight. Inspect vapor barrier for punctures and tears; patch penetrations in same manner as joints.
4.
Place layer of sand uniformly over vapor barrier, moisten, grade level and roll to smooth even surface. Keep sand cover moist during subsequent Work to reduce displacement, as recommended by the Geotech report.
5.
Dampen 24 hrs. before placing concrete, but do not muddy, re-roll where necessary for smoothness and remove loose material.
B.
Remove all free water from forms before concrete is deposited. Remove hardened concrete, debris and foreign materials from interior surfaces of forms, exposed reinforcing, and from surfaces of mixing and conveying equipment.
C.
Wet wood form sufficiently to tighten up cracks. Wet other materials sufficiently to reduce absorbtion and to help maintain concrete workability.
D.
Provide concrete in accordance with Section 03 05 15 - Portland Cement Concrete.
E.
Working Platforms: Arrange temporary runways for buggies. Support runways on formwork, not on reinforcing.
F.
Immediately before placing concrete, ensure required volume of concrete will be delivered in manner to permit placement at constant rate. Do not use aluminum components for conveying concrete.
G.
Immediately before placing concrete, check forms, falsework and shoring; make adjustments to ensure finished Work will conform to indicated lines and grades. Provide plumb lines and tell-tales to permit ready measurement by Resident Engineer to determine settlement and deviation from Contract Drawing requirements.
H.
Do not place concrete until formwork, hydrocarbon-resistant membrane where indicated, reinforcing steel and embedded items have been checked and appropriate placement certification has been signed by Contractor and accepted by Resident Engineer.
I.
Embedments in Concrete: Position embedded steel items, inserts, pipes, conduits and anchors, and securely support as specified in Sections of architectural, electrical and mechanical Work and as indicated.
J.
Concrete Reinforcement: Except as indicated, install concrete reinforcement as specified in Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcement. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement.
K.
Set screeds before placing concrete. 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Set screeds at walls and maximum 8’-0” centers in between. Set to provide level floor, check with an instrument level, transit, or laser during placing operation to maintain level floor. CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 page 8 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 2.
3.02
Use weighed pads or cradle type screeds over vapor barriers. Do not drive stakes through the vapor barriers.
L.
Verify that the decking joints are sealed and there are no openings or voids that will permit concrete leakage.
M.
Provide shores for tributary construction loads to floor and roof beam as required, or camber the beams as approved by Architect/Engineer.
BONDING A.
3.03
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Bond New Concrete to Existing Concrete. Roughen surface to ¼” amplitude and clean concrete as required to remove laitance, coatings, loose particles and foreign matter; clean reinforcing steel and uniformly expose clean coarse aggregate before applying grout or placing new concrete. Coat the surface with bonding epoxy in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
CONVEYING OR PUMPING OF CONCRETE A.
Conveying: Convey concrete from mixer with equipment acceptable to Resident Engineer to ensure continuous flow of concrete to point of placement without segregation or loss of mortar.
B.
Belt Conveyors: Slope belt conveyors to prevent segregation and loss of mortar. Provide approved arrangement at discharge end of conveyor to prevent segregation. Discharge long conveyor runs of concrete into hopper, without segregation, before depositing in forms.
C.
Chutes and Open Troughs: Provide non-aluminum metal or metal-lined chutes and open troughs where steep slopes are required. Equip chutes and troughs with baffles to minimize segregation of aggregates. Keep chutes and open troughs clean of hardened concrete; thoroughly flush with water after each use. Discharge cleaning water outside the line of structure. Chute and open trough slope - Do not exceed one foot vertical in two feet horizontal and not less than one foot vertical to three feet horizontal. Discharge concrete from chutes 20 feet or more in length into hopper before final distribution.
D.
Adjustable Length Pipes (Elephant Trunks): 1.
Flexible pipes of metal, rubber or plastic will be permitted provided they are of four inch minimum diameter and used in manner to prevent segregation of concrete.
2.
Locate pipe and flexible pipe so concrete is delivered in continuous flow to points not more than five feet horizontally and five feet vertically from final location. In vicinity of construction joints, reduce horizontal distance to three feet maximum.
3.
Clean flexible pipes or elephant trunks after each use.
4.
Do not use aluminum.
E.
Buggies: Construct runways on which buggies will operate; ensure buggies will not come in contact with or be supported by reinforcing steel. Do not use buggies on concrete which has not achieved full design strength. Do not use aluminum buggies.
F.
Pumping: 1
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Provide suitable pumping and pneumatic conveying equipment sized to adequately handle volumes of concrete conveyed. Provide equipment acceptable to Resident CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 page 9 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Engineer. Control pneumatic equipment to prevent segregation in discharged concrete. Operate pump or pneumatic equipment to produce continuous stream of concrete without air pockets. Position discharge end of line as near final position of concrete as possible; do not exceed five feet. Position discharge lines horizontal, inclined upwards or vertical from machine. After each operation and at conclusion of placement, thoroughly clean equipment; waste debris and flushing water outside of forms. Place concrete in horizontal layers not more than 18” high within 90 minutes after water is first added to batch. Place all concrete by methods that prevent segregation of materials. 2
3
4
3.04
Equipment: a.
Install, operate and maintain equipment in accordance with reviewed and accepted Working Drawings and with ACI 304R.
b.
Have spare equipment available to minimize delay should equipment breakdown occur.
c.
Do not use aluminum for pumping concrete.
Preparation: a.
Before charging pipe line, operate pump and verify moving parts will operate satisfactorily.
b.
Pump portland cement grout through line immediately ahead of concrete. Unless pumped grout will be used for bedding at construction joints, transport pumped grout off Worksite.
Clean-Up: a.
At end of pumping operation, purge line from placement area to pumping area with water. Dump waste concrete in container and remove from Worksite.
b.
Immediately after purging line thoroughly clean lines and pumping system equipment.
JOINTS A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Construction Joints - As indicated. 1.
Locate joints as indicated, or when not indicated at reveals and rustications. Do not impair strength of structure nor adversely affect appearance when exposed to view.
2.
Provide longitudinal keys or inclined dowels at least 1 1/2 inches deep at joints in walls and between walls and slabs or footings unless otherwise indicated. Make other construction joints without keys, except where keys are indicated. Where keys are indicated, form keyways to dimensions indicated.
3.
When indicated or permitted, obtain bond surface using acceptable chemical retarder to delay but not prevent setting of surface mortar. Remove retarded mortar within 24 hours after placement; produce clean exposed coarse aggregate bonding surface.
4.
After pour has been completed to construction joint, and before placement of fresh concrete, clean reinforcing steel and surfaces of construction joints free of surface laitance, curing compound, and other materials foreign to concrete. Clean hardened concrete surfaces by abrasive blast methods to expose coarse aggregate, after curing period or immediately before placing concrete at joint. Surfaces of concrete inplace not more than eight hours may be cleaned with air and water jets if surface laitance is removed and clean coarse aggregate is exposed. Clean surfaces of construction joints of dirt, sawdust and other loose materials. Moisten surfaces, on which concrete is to be placed, with water immediately before placing concrete. CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 page 10 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
B. 3.05
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
5.
When necessary to make construction joint because of emergency, furnish and place additional reinforcing steel across joint as required.
6.
On-Grade Slab Construction and Contraction Joints: Use types as indicated at column lines intermediate locations.
7.
Expansion Joints: Conform to Drawing details and approved submittal. Provide expansion joint filler finished flush with slab surface except for those joints shown to be sealed with sealant. Conform to Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants, where sealant sealed joints are shown or specified, including multicomponent urethane sealant, backing, and bond breaker.
8.
Control Joints: Provide for concrete slabs as indicated. Conventional saws shall be used as soon as possible without dislodging aggregate to 1/4 slab thickness. Complete sawing of joints within 12 hours after finishing is completed. If early sawing causes undercutting or washing of the concrete, delay the sawing operation and repair the damaged areas. The saw cut shall not vary more than 1/2 inch from the true joint alignment. Discontinue sawing if a crack develops ahead of a saw cut. Immediately after each joint is sawed, thoroughly clean the saw cut and adjacent concrete surface. Respray surfaces treated with curing compound which are damaged during the sawing operations as soon as the water disappears. Protect joints in a manner to prevent the curing compound from entering the joints.
9.
On-Grade Slab Construction and Contraction Joints: Use standard types equal to Key-Loc construction joint at column lines and Keyway contraction joint at intermediate spacings. Machine saw cut 1/8 inch by 3/4 inch deep intermediate joints where indicated or approved. Conform to approved submittal.
Neoprene Membrane for Noise and Vibration Control - Install as indicated.
PLACING CONCRETE A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Depositing: 1.
Deposit concrete continuously and as rapidly as practicable after mixing.
2.
Do not use vibrators to shift mass of fresh concrete.
3.
Do not deposit concrete at rate which would endanger formwork or at rate faster than placing crew can properly consolidate placed concrete. Do not deposit concrete on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams (cold joints) or planes of weakness within Section. Cover each concrete lift with fresh concrete within 30 minutes.
4.
Deposit concrete in continuous flow to points not more than five feet horizontally and five feet vertically from final location.
5.
Remove temporary spreaders in forms when concrete has reached an elevation making spreaders unnecessary. Spreaders may remain embedded in concrete only if made of concrete or nonstaining metal, and with prior acceptance of Resident Engineer.
6.
Place concrete for columns and walls through adjustable flexible pipes or elephant trunks. Stop placement of concrete in walls and columns 1-1/2 inch below bottom of beams or supported slabs. Stop placement at sills and heads of wall openings in the same manner. Allow concrete in vertical elements to be in place at least 2 hours and until vertical settlement has ceased before placing concrete for floor framing.
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 page 11 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
3.06
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
B.
Placement: Not permitted when, in opinion of Resident Engineer, sun, heat, wind, or limitations of facilities furnished by Contractor prevent proper finishing and curing of concrete.
C.
Deposit concrete as near as practicable to final position, and in continuous flow. Do not allow mortar to separate from aggregate.
D.
Deposit concrete against leading face of lift being placed.
E.
Deposit concrete continuously in level layers of thickness which can be properly consolidated; cover previously-placed layers before concrete has begun to harden. Start placing at low point and proceed up grade unless otherwise permitted by Resident Engineer.
F.
When truck or agitator is used for transporting concrete to delivery point, complete discharge within 1 1/2 hours, or before 300 revolutions of drum or blades, whichever comes first, after introduction of mixing water to cement and aggregates except as permitted by ASTM C94. Under conditions contributing to quick stiffening of concrete, and when concrete temperature is 90°F or above, less than 1 1/2 hours may be required.
G.
Concrete Deposited Under Water: Do not deposit concrete under water except in manner acceptable to Resident Engineer; use acceptable tremie method.
H.
Do not permit fresh concrete to fall more than five feet without use of adjustable length pipes.
I.
Do not retemper partially hardened concrete with additional water.
CONSOLIDATING CONCRETE A.
Consolidate concrete during placement until voids have been filled and free mortar appears on surface.
B.
Compaction:
AC Transit Oakland, CA
1.
As concrete is being placed, compact concrete thoroughly and uniformly by means of mechanical vibration in order to secure a dense mass, close bond with reinforcement, and a smooth surface. Work concrete well around reinforcement, embedded items and into corners of forms.
2.
Use internal vibration unless Resident Engineer specifically requests use of external vibrators for consolidating when concrete is inaccessible for adequate internal consolidation. When external vibration is required, construct forms sufficiently rigid to resist displacement and damage from vibrations.
3.
Provide vibrators capable of generating vibration at frequencies not less than 9,000 impulses per minute. Check vibrators; ensure good condition before starting concrete placement. Provide sufficient number of vibrators to properly consolidate each batch of concrete immediately after placement in forms. Determine size of vibrators by space available for use in forms between reinforcing bars. Provide not less than one spare vibrator, for each size, in good Working condition at site of pour for emergency use.
4.
Use external vibrators of size, type and operation acceptable to Resident Engineer.
5.
Use experienced Workmen to operate vibrators in accordance with ACI 309R. Provide location, manner and duration of application to ensure maximum CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 page 12 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
consolidation of concrete without causing segregation of mortar and coarse aggregate. Vibrate deposited concrete in manner to prevent damage to forms, damage and displacement of reinforcement and embedded materials, and segregation in concrete. Prevent formation of laitance and accumulation of excessive water on surface as concrete is deposited. Remove excessive water accumulation by pumping, bailing or other methods satisfactory to Resident Engineer before additional concrete is placed. Do not penetrate previously placed layers more than two inches in order to consolidate layers and prevent overvibration of previously vibrated layer. Where, in opinion of Resident Engineer, internal vibration is impractical or might cause damage to electrical conduits, spade or rod as required; internal vibration will not be permitted. 6.
3.07
3.08
When spading, thoroughly compact coarse aggregate away from form and into plastic mass. Perform spading with approved equipment and rod concrete around embedded materials, and into corners and spaces to ensure even, dense surface, free from aggregate pockets and honeycomb.
C.
Vibrate concrete only as necessary to obtain maximum consolidation without segregating mortar and coarse aggregate, and without causing water and cement paste to flush to surface.
D.
Space points of vibrator insertion at 1 1/2 times radius of action recommended by ACI 309R, Table 5.1.4 for particular application.
E.
Revibrate approximately 15 minutes after initial vibration to remove air and limit settlement cracking, by raising vibrator at a rate of one foot in three seconds.
F.
Do not officially transport concrete in forms with vibrators nor allow vibrators to contact forms or reinforcing. Push vibrator vertically into the proceeding layers that are still plastic and slowly withdraw, producing maximum obtainable density in concrete without creating voids or segregation. In no case disturb concrete that has partially set.
FINISHES A.
Formed surfaces not exposed to view shall receive ordinary surface finish in accordance with Caltrans Standard Specification Section 51-1.18A, Ordinary Surface Finish.
B.
Formed surfaces exposed to view shall receive Class 1 surface finish in accordance with Caltrans Standard Specification Section 51-1.18B, Class 1 Surface Finish.
C.
Fresh concrete at unformed surfaces, other than construction joints, shall be tamped, struck off level, and given a wood float finish that provides a surface free of undulations greater than 1/4 inch in 10 feet. Surfaces subject to pedestrian or vehicle traffic shall receive a broom finish.
CURING A.
Protect freshly deposited concrete from excessively hot temperatures as specified; maintain without drying for period of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening of concrete. Provide material for curing and protection of concrete at Worksite ready for use before starting actual placement of concrete. 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Provide, and use when necessary, sufficient tarpaulins or other acceptable material to cover completely, or enclose forms and Working areas during placing and finishing operations. CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 page 13 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
B.
2.
Except as otherwise specified, maintain newly placed concrete continuously moist for seven days (three days for high-early strength) at air temperature above 50 F.
3.
Cure concrete by normal curing methods as specified, unless otherwise permitted by Resident Engineer.
4.
Provide clean and potable water for curing concrete.
5.
Maintain steel forms and wood forms, exposed to sun and in contact with concrete, moist during curing period. If forms are removed during curing period, employ one of following curing materials or methods immediately and continue for remainder of curing period.
Moist Curing and Protection: 1.
2.
C.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Moist cure concrete by one of methods specified below: a.
Ponding on horizontal surfaces, providing surface is submerged for required curing period.
b.
Continuous sprinkling with nozzle or nozzles which, during first 24 hours, atomizes flow of water, providing mist and not spray. Do not apply moisture under pressure directly upon concrete and do not allow water to flow or wash surface and cause erosion.
c.
Covering entire surface of concrete with burlap or absorptive mat or fabric laid directly on concrete and kept wet at all times.
d.
Sprinkling, as specified above, for at least 18 hours and then immediately covering concrete surface with waterproof paper or plastic sheeting free from holes and tears; maintain in position so entire surface of concrete being cured is fully covered.
When using burlap or cotton mats for curing concrete, prevent damage and marring of concrete surfaces.
Membrane-Forming Curing: Apply compounds uniformly over surface at thickness recommended by manufacturer. 1.
Do not apply compounds to surfaces where bond is required for additional concrete, and where bonded surface coating such as paint, nonconductive flooring or tile is to be applied, unless certified compatible with subsequent finish and acceptable to Resident Engineer.
2.
Warm curing compound that has become chilled to such a degree that it is too viscous for satisfactory application in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Repair portions of compound film, damaged before expiration of curing period, immediately with additional compound.
3.
Apply required surface finish before application of curing compounds. Apply curing compound as recommended by manufacturer for desired effect. Apply immediately after stripping forms and acceptance of concrete finish. If surface is dry, wet concrete with water and apply curing compound just as surface film of water disappears. Apply second coat, if required, after first application has set. During curing operations wet unsprayed surfaces with water. Protect coating against damage at least 10 days after application. If surface coating is subjected to disturbance, Resident Engineer may require water curing be applied at once. If use of curing compound results in streaked or blotchy appearance, stop method and perform water curing as specified until cause of defective appearance is corrected.
4.
Uniformly apply compound over surface at application rate recommended by compound manufacturer. CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 page 14 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
3.09
3.10
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
a.
Surfaces exposed to sunlight - Pigmented type.
b.
Surfaces protected from sunlight - Clear type.
5.
Apply non-wax resin type curing compounds to surface where bond is required for additional concrete or where a bonded surface coating such as paint, tile, waterproofing or roofing will be applied.
6.
Do not apply curing compound to construction joints, to permanently exposed concrete floors, and walls that will be chemically sealed.
PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK A.
During curing period, protect concrete against damage from mechanical disturbances, water flow, loading, shock and vibration.
B.
Protect concrete from physical damage or visual defects until Work is accepted by Resident Engineer.
C.
Seal the surface as specified in Section 03 35 05, Unformed Concrete Finishes.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Provide free access to Resident Engineer to the work site(s) to facilitate quality control measures, testing and inspections. Cooperate with all inspection personnel.
B.
Level of Slabs: Continuously monitor concrete placing to maintain level platforms and slabs by use of an instrument level, transit, or laser.
C.
Continuous Inspection: Construct structural concrete exceeding 2500 psi compressive strength under continuous inspection of inspector. Obtain inspection and approval of forms and reinforcing by building department as required and by the inspector and Resident Engineer before placing structural concrete.
D.
Testing of Concrete: Testing laboratory shall perform the following tests. Samples for testing shall be obtained in accordance with ASTM C172, and shall be taken from as close to point of placement as possible.
E.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
1.
Compressive Strength Tests: Cast one set of three or more cylinders from each day's placing and each 100 cubic yards, or fraction thereof, or not less than once for each 2000 square feet of surface area for slabs and walls, of each strength of structural concrete. Date cylinders, assign record number, and tag showing the location from which sample was taken. Also record slump test result of sample. Do not make more than two series of tests from any one location or batch of concrete.
2.
Test Cylinders: Samples will be made in accordance with ASTM C172. Cast cylinders according to ASTM C31; 24 hours later, store cylinders under moist curing conditions at about 70 deg F. Test according to ASTM C39 at 7 and 28 day ages. The remaining cylinder shall be kept in reserve in case tests are unsatisfactory.
Core Tests: If tests show the compressive strength of any concrete falls below the required minimum, additional testing of concrete which unsatisfactory tests represent may be required. Make core tests according to ASTM C42. Fill core holes with drypack concrete of strength required for concrete. Contractor shall bear cost of tests for below-strength concrete even if such tests indicate concrete has attained required minimum compressive strength, and all costs for required corrections.
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 page 15 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 3.11
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
REPAIR A.
Document nonconforming conditions on a Nonconformance Report. Obtain approved Engineering disposition prior to repair. Resident Engineer will determine extent and action required to repair or replace defective concrete revealed by surface defects and otherwise. Fill holes and cracks extending through concrete; use plunger-type gun or other suitable device acceptable to Resident Engineer from least exposed face; hold flush stop at exposed face.
B.
Repair of Formed Surfaces:
C.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
1.
Patch defective areas with cement mortar of mix proportions and materials identical to surrounding concrete. Before starting to patch, produce finish on sample patch indistinguishable from appearance of finish of concrete patched immediately after removing forms. Patch in manner and method reviewed and accepted in writing by Resident Engineer.
2.
Patch surfaces indicated to receive abrasive blast finish or other type of exposed aggregate finish with patching mortar containing cement and coarse aggregate of type used in surrounding concrete, and in identical proportions to surrounding concrete. Do not patch before abrasive blasting, except when approved by Resident Engineer.
3.
Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets and voids having diameter more than 1/2 inch to solid concrete, but not shallower than one inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to exposed concrete surface. Before placing cement mortar, thoroughly clean, dampen, and brush neat cement grout on area to be patched.
Repair of Unformed Surfaces: 1.
Test surfaces for smoothness and verify conformance of surface plane to tolerances specified. Eliminate low and high areas.
2.
Test sloped surfaces for trueness of slope and smoothness; use template of required slope. Eliminate high and low areas.
3.
Repair finished surfaces containing defects which adversely affect durability of concrete.
4.
Grind high areas of surfaces after concrete has cured sufficiently to make repairs without damaging adjacent areas.
5.
Cut out low areas in surfaces during or immediately after completing surface finishing; fill with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
6.
Cut out defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not larger than one inch in diameter and fill with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete; leave clean, square cuts. Expose reinforcing steel at least 3/4 inch all around. Dampen concrete surfaces which will contact patching concrete and brush with neat cement grout or concrete bonding agent. Place patching concrete before grout initially sets. Mix patching concrete of same materials and in same proportions as adjacent concrete. Place, compact and finish patch to blend with adjacent concrete. Cure patch same as adjacent concrete.
7.
Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not larger than one inch in diameter by dry-pack method. Groove tops of cracks, cut out holes to sound concrete, and remove dust, dirt and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and brush with neat cement grout. Mix dry-pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2 1/2 parts fine aggregate passing No. 16 sieve; use only amount of water necessary to facilitate handling and patching. Place dry-pack before grout initially sets. Compact CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 page 16 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
dry-pack in-place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched areas continuously moist not less than 72 hours. D.
Defective Concrete 1.
2.
E.
3.12
Sampling and Testing a.
Sampling and testing of cast-in-place concrete deemed defective, as directed by Metro Quality Manager.
b.
Test concrete in accordance with ASTM C42.
c.
If testing reveals defective concrete, pay testing laboratory for collecting samples, furnishing equipment, performing tests and certifying tests results.
d.
If test results do not reveal defective concrete, cost of testing concrete will be reimbursed by Metro.
Defective Concrete Criteria a.
Defective and unacceptable if average of three core specimens shows less than 85 percent of specified compressive strength, and single core is less than 75 percent of specified compressive strength.
b.
Defective and unacceptable if structurally unsound, contains cracks or openings affecting water tightness or gas tightness, improperly finished, or not within specified tolerances.
c.
At discretion of Resident Engineer remove and replace unacceptable concrete.
Corrective Work for Defective Concrete 1.
If Resident Engineer gives permission to correct minor defects, roughen defective concrete to form key and soak remaining concrete surfaces with water before patching with concrete or mortar of color to match surrounding concrete. White cement may be added to patching material to produce same color as original concrete.
2.
Clean cavities produced on surfaces by form ties and other holes, honeycomb spots, broken corners, edges and other defects. Saturate cavities with water and point with mortar paste consisting of cement and fine aggregate; mix in generally same proportions as original concrete; match appearance of original concrete.
3.
Prepare patching mortar not more than 30 minutes before use. Cure mortar patches properly. Where required, leave joint filler exposed full length with clean and true edges.
4.
Leave articulated joints in completed Work carefully tooled and free of mortar and concrete.
5.
Protect concrete structure from rust staining by structural steel members and from other substances during Work. If staining occurs, remove stains and restore concrete to original color.
6.
Damaged Work: Before final acceptance of Work, repair damaged surfaces, corners of concrete, and concrete finish. Bring damaged places where surface repairs are permitted to smooth, dense, watertight condition to satisfaction of Resident Engineer.
HOT WEATHER PROVISIONS A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Conform to ACI 305R and the following requirements. CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 page 17 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
3.13
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
B.
Take extra care to reduce the temperature of the concrete being placed and to prevent rapid drying of newly placed concrete. When the outdoor ambient temperature is more than 90 deg F, shade the fresh concrete as soon as possible after placing, and start curing as soon as the surface of the fresh concrete is sufficiently hard to permit it without damage.
C.
Concrete placement temperatures shall be controlled by the Contractor and shall not be limited to: 1.
Shading and cooling the aggregate.
2.
Avoiding use of hot cement.
3.
Cooling mixing water by additions of ice.
4.
Insulating water supply lines and tanks.
5.
Insulating mixer drums or cooling them with sprays or wet burlap.
GROUTING AND DRYPACKING A.
Install as indicated or required. Where grouting and drypacking is part of the work of other sections, it shall conform to the following requirements, as applicable.
B.
Drypacking: Mix materials thoroughly with minimum amount of water. Install drypack by forcing and rodding to fill voids and provide complete bearing under plates. Finish exposed surfaces smooth and cure with damp burlap or liquid curing compound.
C.
Non-Shrink Grouting:
D.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
1.
Mixing: Mix the approved non-shrink grout material with sufficient water per manufacturers recommendations.
2.
Application: Surfaces to receive the non-shrink grout shall be clean, and shall be moistened thoroughly immediately before placing the mortar. Before grouting, surfaces to be in contact shall be roughened and cleaned thoroughly to 6 mm amplitude, all loose particles shall be removed and the surface flushed thoroughly with neat cement grout immediately before the grouting mortar is placed. Place fluid grout from one side only and puddle, chain, or pump for complete filling of voids; do not remove the dams or forms until grout attains initial set. Finish exposed surfaces smooth, and cure as recommended by grout manufacturer.
3.
Thickness Under Baseplates: 1.5 inches, unless otherwise shown.
4.
Protect against rapid loss of moisture with wet rags or polyethylene sheets.
Epoxy Grouting: 1.
Holes shall be drilled for anchor bolts, reinforcing bars, and the like.
2.
Hole diameter: ¼ inch larger than largest bolt dimension; ½ inch larger than reinforcing bar diameter, unless otherwise specified by epoxy grout manufacture.
3.
Minimum depth of drilled hole: ten bolt or reinforcing bar diameters.
4.
Holes shall be blown free of dust and latence with compressed air. Compressed air shall be free of oils, moisture or other foreign substances. Prepare holes per manufacture’s recommendations.
5.
Anchor bolts, reinforcing bars and other embedded items: clean, dry and free of grease or other substances which may interfere with epoxy bonding.
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 page 18 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
3.14
Set and position bolts, bars, and place epoxy grout and finish per manufacturer's instructions. Completely fill all voids, spaces and cavities.
7.
Any epoxy which overflows out of the grouted holes shall be removed and the concrete surface shall be sandblasted, as required by Resident Engineer.
8.
Cure in accordance with manufacture’s recommendations.
9.
Do not disturb embedded items until fully cured.
Refer to Section 32 13 13, Concrete Paving and Section 32 16 14, Concrete Curbs and Gutters for requirements for this work.
OFF-SITE CONCRETE WORK A.
3.16
6.
SITE CONCRETE WORK A.
3.15
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Provide new concrete items where indicated, and replace existing items damaged by Contractor's operations. Secure and pay for required permits, inspections, engineering, and surveying.
WATER INFLOW IN FINISHED CUT-AND-COVER STRUCTURE A.
Water leakage into completed cut-and-cover structures (underground vault) is not permitted.
B.
If leakage is observed in structure, take following remedial measures: 1.
Prepare leak remediation plan for review and acceptance by Resident Engineer 10 days before beginning remedial Work.
2.
Undertake remedial measures reviewed and accepted by Resident Engineer.
3.
Maintain or re-establish integrity of hydrocarbon-resistant (HCR) membrane.
4.
After sealing of water leakage, repair surfaces, materials and equipment affected by the water leakage to a like-new condition.
5.
Repairs require Resident Engineer's acceptance.
PART 4 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4.01
MEASUREMENT
A.
No separate measurement or payment will be made for the work of this section.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 page 19 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
AC Transit Oakland, CA
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 page 20 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 SECTION 05 60 00
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
B.
Section includes: 1.
Rough hardware.
2.
Monitor support beams and brackets
5.
Shelf angles.
6.
Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment, and other applications.
7.
Miscellaneous metal trim.
8.
Pipe bollards.
9.
Chain and latch.
10.
Accessories required for a complete installation.
Related Sections: 1.
Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete.
2.
Section 09 91 00, Painting.
1.2
NOT USED
1.3
NOT USED
1.4
SUBMITTALS A.
Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 1.
Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other work.
B.
Samples: For each type and finish of extruded nosing and tread.
C.
Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.
D.
Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS 05 60 00 page 1 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Regulatory Requirements: 1.
Accessibility Requirements: a. b.
2.
1.6
California Building Code. ADA Standards for Accessible Design, 28 CFR Part 36, Appendix A.
California Building Code as adopted by local authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Fabricator Qualifications: Firm having minimum 10 years' documented experience in successfully producing similar metal fabrications, and with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the work.
C.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1.
AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code—Steel.
2.
AWS D1.6, Structural Welding Code—Stainless Steel.
3.
Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the work. 1.
1.7
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
METALS A.
Metal Surfaces: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
B.
Ferrous Metals:
AC Transit Oakland,CA
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS 05 60 00 page 2 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36.
2.
Steel Tubing: Cold formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A500.
3.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads.
4.
Rolled Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A786, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A36 or ASTM A283, Grade C or D.
5.
Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A240 or ASTM A666, Type 316L.
6.
Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276, Type 316L.
7.
Slotted Channel Framing: Cold formed metal channels with flange edges returned toward web and with 9/16 inch wide slotted holes in webs at 2 inches o.c. a. b.
Width of Channels: 1-5/8 inches. Metal and Thickness: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A653, structural quality, Grade 33, with G90 coating; 0.079 inch nominal thickness. Metal and Thickness: Uncoated steel complying with ASTM A1011, 0.0677 inch minimum thickness. Finish: Hot dip galvanized after fabrication.
c. d.
C.
D.
8.
Cast in Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion resistant materials capable of sustaining, without failure, the load imposed within a safety factor of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM E488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
9.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
Aluminum: 1.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T6.
2.
Aluminum Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B632, alloy 6061-T6.
3.
Aluminum Rivets: ASTM B316, alloy 6053-T4 or 6061-T6.
4.
Aluminum Plate: Diamond plate panels, minimum 3/16 inch thick.
5.
Fasteners: Use fasteners made of same basic metal as fastened metal except use galvanized fasteners complying with ASTM A153 for exterior aluminum units. Do not use corrosive metals or metals incompatible with metals joined.
Paint: 1.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
High Performance Coatings: Refer to Section 09 96 00 High Performance Coatings, for painting of steel ladders and safety cages, and steel items exposed to the exterior.
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS 05 60 00 page 3 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
E.
2.
Paint: Refer to Section 09 91 00 Painting, for other steel items indicated to be painted.
3.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: Refer to Section 09 96 00 High Performance Coatings for additional information.
4.
Isolation Coating: Single component, inert-type non-corrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities, complying with ASTM. C836; VOC compliant.
Fasteners: Provide Type 316 stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and for use with stainless steel interior elements, and zinc plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1.
Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head bolts, ASTM A307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
2.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36.
3.
Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.
4.
Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
5.
Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ASME B18.6.1.
6.
Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME B18.22.1.
7.
Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ASME B18.21.1.
8.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, load equal to six times load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times load imposed when installed in concrete determined by testing per ASTM E488, conducted by qualified independent testing agency. a.
F.
Material: Carbon steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
Grout: 1.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous cementitious grout complying with ASTM C1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: a. b. c.
G.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Masterflow 928, BASF Building Systems. Hi-Flow Grout, Euclid Chemical Company. Conspec 100 Non-Shrink Non-Metallic Grout, Conspec by Dayton Superior.
Concrete Fill:
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS 05 60 00 page 4 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.
2.2
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements of Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete, for normal weight, air entrained, ready mix concrete with minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3000 psi unless noted otherwise on drawings or in specifications.
FABRICATION A.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B.
Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
C.
Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch. Form bent metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
D.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3.
Remove welding flux immediately.
4.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
E.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
F.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
G.
Fabricate joints to weather to exclude water or provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H.
Allow for thermal movement resulting from maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures of 120 degrees F, ambient; 180 degrees F, material surfaces by preventing buckling, opening up of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
I.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges.
J.
Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
K.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. For exposed fasteners, use Phillips flat head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS 05 60 00 page 5 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
N.
O.
Shelf Angles: Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4 inch bolts, spaced maximum 6 inches from ends and 24 inches on center. 1.
For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete. Align expansion joints in angles with indicated control and expansion joints in cavity wall exterior width.
2.
Galvanize shelf angles to be installed in exterior walls.
3.
Furnish wedge type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast in place concrete.
Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Provide steel framing and supports not part of structural steel framework as necessary to complete work. 1.
Fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. a. b.
c. 2. P.
2.3
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors 1-1/4 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 8 inches long at 24 inches on center. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed.
Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports.
Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. 1.
Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. Provide anchors, welded to trim, for embedding in concrete or masonry construction, spaced not more than 6 inches from each end, 6 inches from corners, and 24 inches on center.
2.
Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim at exterior and interior locations.
FINISHES A.
Comply with NAAMM's Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
B.
Steel and Iron Finishes: 1.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
Galvanizing: Hot dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below:
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS 05 60 00 page 6 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation a. b.
2.4
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
ASTM A123, for galvanizing steel and iron products. ASTM A153, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
2.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Refer to Section 09 96 00, High Performance Coatings, for painting of roof ladders. Do not galvanize items indicated to receive high performance coatings.
3.
Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel, for shop painting.
4.
Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
FABRICATION TOLERANCES A.
Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements.
B.
Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch.
C.
Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch.
D.
Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches.
E.
Maximum Deviation from Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
PREPARATION A.
Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Site.
B.
Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations; protect sleeves from water and concrete entry.
INSTALLATION A.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal fabrications to in place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.
B.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
C.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS 05 60 00 page 7 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
D.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
E.
Field Welding:
F.
1.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3.
Remove welding flux immediately.
4.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
Setting Bearing and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1.
Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. a.
Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
b.
G.
Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on shop drawings, if any. 1.
Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns. a.
H.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated at girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified above for setting and grouting bearing and leveling plates.
Pipe Bollards: 1.
Anchor bollards in concrete in formed or core drilled holes not less than 8 inches deep and 3/4 inch greater than outside diameter of bollard. After bollards have been inserted into holes, fill annular space surrounding bollard solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch toward bollard.
2.
Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface. MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS 05 60 00 page 8 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
3.
Set bollard in true vertical position. a. b.
I.
3.3
3.4
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
On Grade: Per the drawings. Elevated Slab: unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, provide 4 inch diameter heavy weight steel pipe for welding to 6 inch by 6 inch by 1/4 inch thick steel plate with four 3 inch studs 1/2 inch from each corner with 12 inch No. 4 rebar welded each way.
Removable Stanchions: 1.
Embed stainless steel sleeves as shown on drawings.
2.
Install stanchions and attach chains. Adjust chain length by removing links if necessary to make chain nearly taut when fastened in place.
ERECTION TOLERANCES A.
Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, noncumulative.
B.
Maximum Offset from True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
C.
Maximum Out of Position: 1/4 inch.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.
Touchup Painting: Comply with requirements of Section 09 91 00, Painting, or Section 09 96 00 High Performance Coatings, for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland,CA
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS 05 60 00 page 9 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
AC Transit Oakland,CA
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS 05 60 00 page 10 of 10
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
B.
1.2
1.3
1.
Wood blocking, plywood sheathing, and nailers
2.
Framing connectors and hardware
3.
Plywood backing panels
Related Sections: 1.
Section
2.
Section
SUBMITTALS A.
Comply with provisions of Section 013300 “Submittal Procedures.”
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets for each fastener type and material safety data sheets (MSDSs) for all pressure treated materials, including field-applied treatment for cut ends.
C.
Certification: Provide American Wood Protection Association (AWPA) grade-stamped pressure-treated wood and plywood as specified, or submit certification by fire-retardant pressure-treating plant that pressure-treated wood and plywood comply with the specified reference standards.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.4
Section Includes:
Comply with California Code of Regulations Title 24, Part 1 (California Building Standards, Administrative Code) and Part 2 (California Building Code).
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.
Keep materials dry at all times. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces while in storage and in transit.
B.
Stack lumber and plywood flat at all times, and provide air circulation within stacks.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1
LUMBER, GENERAL A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Dressed Lumber: S4S, 19 percent maximum moisture content for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, marked with grade stamp of inspection agency.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 page 1 of 4
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation B.
2.2
Structural plywood shall be Structural 1 per AP “Panel Design Specifications” CD-X, grade stamped by APA. All plies shall be Douglas Fir and thickness as noted on the drawings
TREATED MATERIALS A.
B.
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground, labeled by an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to 19 and 15 percent moisture content, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following: 1.
Wood members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2.
Concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials by Pressure Process: 1.
Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. a. b.
c.
C. 2.3
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 15 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated
2.
Use treated lumber and plywood with bending strength, stiffness, and fastenerholding capacities that are not reduced below values published by manufacturer of chemical formulation under elevated temperature and humidity conditions.
3.
Identify fire-retardant treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.
Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated.
LUMBER A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Concealed Boards: 19 percent maximum moisture content; one of the following: 1.
Eastern Softwoods: No. 3 Common per NELMA rules.
2.
Northern Species: No. 3 Common or Standard per NLGA rules.
3.
Mixed Southern Pine: No. 2 per SPIB rules.
4.
Western Woods: Standard per WCLIB rules or No. 3 Common per WWPA rules.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 page 2 of 4
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 2.4
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A.
2.5
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fireretardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.
MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS A.
Weather-Resistive Barriers: Where local building code requires one or more layers of a weather-resistive barrier paper, provide a vapor permeable waterproof kraft paper complying with FS UU-B-790a “Building Paper, Vegetable Fiber (Kraft, Waterproofed, Water)” Type I, Grade D; or where approved, No. 15 unperforated roofing felt in accordance with ASTM D 2264.”Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.”
B.
Fasteners: Size and type indicated. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather or high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A153 or of Type 304 stainless steel. 1.
Expansion Anchorage Devices: Anchor bolt and sleeve assemblies
2.
Standard Bolts and Nuts; ASTM A307, Grade A, with ASTM A563 regular hexagon nuts
3.
Lag Bolts: ANSI/ASME B18.2.1 “Square and Hex Bolts and Screws (Inch Series)” square head type
4.
Lag Screws: Flat head type
5.
Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 “Machine Screws and Machine Screw Nuts”, zinc-plated steel
6.
Wood Screws: ANSI/ASME B18.6.1 “Wood Screws (Inch Series)” flat head carbon steel
7.
Plain Washers: ANSI/ASME B18.22.1, round, general assembly grade carbon steel
8.
Lock Washers: ANSI B18.21.1, helical spring type carbon steel
9.
Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER 272 “National Evaluation Report – Power-Driven Staples and Nails for Use in all Types of Building Construction”
C.
Metal Framing Anchors: Hot-dip galvanized steel of structural capacity, type, and size indicated.
D.
Field-Applied Treatment: Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative treated lumber.
E.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
1.
Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
2.
Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
Sill sealer gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam ¼” thick, selected from manufacturer’s standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 page 3 of 4
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
F.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable rubberized asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spun bonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than .025 inch.
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, blocking, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction.
B.
Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
C.
1.
NES NER-272 for power-driven staples, P-nails, and allied fasteners.
2.
Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer.
Wood Grounds, Nailers, Blocking, and Cants: 1.
Provide where required for screeding or attachment of other work.
2.
Form to shapes cut as necessary for true line and level for work to be attached.
3.
Coordinate location with other work involved.
4.
Attach to substrates to support applied loading.
5.
Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material involved.
D.
Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire retardant-treated backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.
E.
Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and concrete.
F.
Install weather resistive barrier as prescribed by local codes. Install under exterior Cement Plaster in a double layer using a lapped single sheet formation for achieving each layer. Start with a double layer at the bottom 8 inches, each sheet working up the wall to overlap the sheet below by 8 inches.
G.
Install flexible flashing at all openings in weather barrier covered walls as shown.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 page 4 of 4
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
SECTION 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
SUMMARY A.
Section includes plastic-laminate-faced cabinets of stock design and plastic laminate countertops.
B.
Related Requirements: 1.
Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring casework.
2.
Section 09 26 00 "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for reinforcements in metalframed partitions for anchoring casework.
3.
Section 09 68 13 "Tile Carpeting"
DEFINITIONS A.
Definitions in the AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" apply to the work of this Section.
B.
MDF: Medium-density fiberboard.
COORDINATION A.
1.5
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that casework can be supported and installed as indicated.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Sustainable Design Submittals:
C.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
1.
Indicate recycled content of wood and plastic laminate products
2.
Wood to comply with limitations on VOC and formaldehyde in the CBC green building standard
3.
Adhesives to comply with VOC limitations in the CBC Green Building Standard
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show fabrication details, including types and locations of hardware. Show ARCHITECTURAL PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED CASEWORK 06 41 00 page 1 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
installation details, including field joints and filler panels. Indicate manufacturer's catalog numbers for casework.
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
D.
Samples for Initial Selection: For Plastic Laminate cabinet finishes.
E.
Samples for Verification: 8-by-10-inch Samples for each type of finish
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
Qualification Data: For Fabricator and Installer.
B.
Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: WI Certified Compliance Program certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Comply with the WI Architectural Millwork standards in the grades hereinafter specified.
B.
If the manufacturer of the woodwork is a WI licensee, each unit of woodwork shall bear the WI Certified Compliance grade stamp indicating the grade specified.
C.
The foregoing shall not be construed to limit the power and authority of the owner’s representative to reject any wood work which does not, in the Owner’s Representative’s opinion, meet with any one or more of the specifications of this contract.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Deliver casework only after painting, utility roughing-in, and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate casework have been completed in installation areas. If casework must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.
B.
Keep finished surfaces covered with polyethylene film or other protective covering during handling and installation.
FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install casework until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. Maintain temperature and relative humidity during the remainder of the construction period in range recommended for Project location by the AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."
B.
Established Dimensions: Where casework and countertop are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where woodwork is to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
C.
Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support casework by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
ARCHITECTURAL PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED CASEWORK 06 41 00 page 2 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.10
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
WARRANTY A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of casework that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c.
2.
Delamination of components or other failures of glue bond. Warping of components. Failure of operating hardware.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
2.2
CASEWORK, GENERAL A.
B.
2.3
Source Limitations: Obtain plastic-laminate-faced cabinets from single manufacturer.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of casework indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1.
Grade: Custom
2.
Provide labels and certificates from WI certification program indicating that casework, complies with requirements of grades specified.
Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes, configurations, and finish materials of manufactured plastic-laminate-faced cabinets.
CASEWORK A.
Design: 1.
B.
As shown.
Exposed Materials: High-Pressure Decorative plastic Laminate conforming to NEMA standard LD 3. 1.
Plastic Laminate: Grade VGS at vertical faces of cabinet and edgebands. Thickness: .028 inches a. b.
2.
C.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Matte finish at countertop and cabinet.
Plastic laminate: Grade HGS at horizontal surfaces .050. and MGP .042 inch minimum for post formed countertops.
Semiexposed Materials:
ARCHITECTURAL PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED CASEWORK 06 41 00 page 3 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.
Thermoset Decorative Panels: Provide thermoset decorative panels for semiexposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. a.
2.
D.
2.4
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Provide plastic laminate of same grade as exposed surfaces for interior faces of doors and drawer fronts and other locations where opposite side of component is exposed.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide specified edgebanding on all semiexposed edges.
Concealed Materials: 1.
Solid Wood: Any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects affecting strength or utility.
2.
Plywood: Hardwood plywood.
3.
Plastic Laminate: Grade BKL.
4.
Particleboard.
5.
MDF.
ENGINEERED STONE COUNTERTOPS A.
Manufacturer: Du Pont “Zodiaq Terra Collection” or Approved equal
B.
Material: Homogeneous quartz surfaces material meeting specified physical and performance properties.
C.
Thickness: Except where otherwise detailed on the Drawings: 1.
¾ inch for vertical applications
2.
1 1/8 inch for horizontal applications.
D.
Seam Width: Less than 1/8 inch unless otherwise specified
E.
Edge treatment: 1.
F.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Typical: 1/8” bullnose with vertical return to length shown
Performance Characteristics:
ARCHITECTURAL PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED CASEWORK 06 41 00 page 4 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation Property
Typical Result
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 Test Procedure
Flexural Strength >5,300 psi ASTM D 790 Flexural Modulus 5.3–5.7E6 psi ASTM D 790 Flexural Elongation >0.1% ASTM D 790 Compression Strength (Dry) ~27,000 psi ASTM C 170 Compression Strength (Wet) ~24,000 psi ASTM C 170 Hardness 7 Mohs’ Hardness Scale Thermal Expansion 1.45 x 10-5 in./in./°C ASTM D 696 Gloss (60° Gardner) 45–50 ANSI Z 124 Colorfastness Passes ANSI Z 124.6.5.1 Wear and Cleanability Passes ANSI Z 124.6.5.3 Stain Resistance Passes ANSI Z 124.6 (stain 5.2, chemical 5.5, cigarette 5.4 resistances) Fungal and Bacterial Resistance No growth ASTM G 21 & G 22 Point Impact Passes ANSI Z 124.6.4.2 Ball Impact 164 inches NEMA LD 3.3.8* Slip Resistance Above 0.80 for textured models ASTM C 1028 Static Coefficient of Friction 0.89/0.61 (wet/dry) ASTM C 1028 (as received) Static Coefficient of Friction 0.87/0.65 (wet/dry) ASTM C 1028 (with renovator) Abrasion Resistance 139 ASTM C 501 Specific Gravity 2.44 ASTM D 792 Density ~2400 kg/m3 Water Absorption 0.12% ASTM C 373 Long- and Short-Term <0.04% ASTM D 570 Moisture Expansion <0.01% on average ASTM C 370 Flammability For all colors tested ASTM E 84, UL 723 (Class I and Class A) and NFPA 255 Flame Spread Index FSI <10 for 3 cm and <15 for 2 cm Smoke Developed Index SDI <50 for 3 cm and <100 for 2 cm Nominal Thickness 2 cm and 3 cm Nominal Weight 10 lb./ft.2 (2 cm) 15 lb./ft.2 (3 cm)
2.5
MATERIALS A.
Composite wood products to comply with formaldehyde limits set in the CBC green building standard.
B.
Maximum Moisture Content for Lumber: 7 percent for hardwood and 12 percent for softwood.
C.
Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, particleboard core except where veneer core is indicated.
D.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
E.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Comply with VOC and formaldehyde levels in CBC Green Building Standards
ARCHITECTURAL PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED CASEWORK 06 41 00 page 5 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation F.
G.
MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130 1.
Comply with VOC and formaldehyde levels in CBC Green Building Standards
2.
Where MDF occurs at sinks or touches the floor, use exterior grade glues.
Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3. 1.
2.6
2.7
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
As manufactured by Wilsonart LLC, Lamin-Art Inc, Formica Corporation
H.
Edge-banding for Plastic Laminate: Plastic laminate matching adjacent surfaces. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for Test Methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.
I.
Edge-banding for Thermoset Decorative Panels: PVC or polyester edge-banding matching thermoset decorative panels.
J.
Adhesives to comply with VOC limitations in the CBC Green Building Standard
COLORS AND FINISHES A.
Thermoset Decorative Panel Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from thermoset decorative panel manufacturer's full range of solid colors
B.
Plastic-Laminate Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from plasticlaminate manufacturer's full range.
C.
PVC Edge banding Color: As selected from casework manufacturer's full range.
FABRICATION A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Plastic-Laminate-Faced Cabinet Construction: As required by referenced quality standard, but not less than the following: 1.
Bottoms and Ends of Cabinets, and Tops of Wall Cabinets and Tall Cabinets: 3/4-inch particleboard.
2.
Shelves: 3/4-inch- thick plywood or 1-inch- thick particleboard.
3.
Backs of Cabinets: 1/2-inch- thick particleboard or MDF where exposed, dadoed into sides, bottoms, and tops where not exposed.
4.
Drawer Fronts: 3/4-inch particleboard.
5.
Drawer Sides and Backs: 1/2-inch solid-wood, particleboard or MDF, with glued dovetail or multiple-dowel joints.
6.
Drawer Bottoms: 1/4-inch hardwood plywood glued and dadoed into front, back, and sides of drawers. Use 1/2-inch material for drawers more than 24 inches wide.
7.
Doors 48 Inches High or Less: 3/4 inch thick, with particleboard or MDF cores.
ARCHITECTURAL PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED CASEWORK 06 41 00 page 6 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation B.
Filler Strips: Provide as needed to close spaces between cabinets and walls, ceilings, and indicated equipment. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as cabinets.
C.
Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets. 1.
Provide raised drip edge at countertops with sink installations.
D.
Complete countertop fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming and fitting.
E.
Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use template or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1.
2.8
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Seal openings in countertop with a coat of varnish.
CASEWORK HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A.
Hardware, General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard satinfinish, commercial-quality, heavy-duty hardware. 1.
Use threaded metal or plastic inserts with machine screws for fastening to particleboard except where hardware is through-bolted from back side.
B.
Frameless Concealed Hinges European Type: BHMA A156.9, Type B01602, 100 degrees of opening, self-closing. Provide two hinges for doors less than 48 inches high, and provide three hinges for doors more than 48 inches high.
C.
Pulls: Solid stainless-steel wire pulls, fastened from back with two screws. Provide two pulls for drawers more than 24 inches wide.
D.
Door Catches: Powder-coated, nylon-roller spring catch. Provide two catches on doors more than 48 inches high.
E.
Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, Type B05091. 1.
F.
Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated, steel ball-bearing slides.
Adjustable Shelf Supports: Mortise-type, powder-coated steel standards and shelf rests complying with BHMA A156.9, Types B04071 and B04091.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, location of framing and reinforcements, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
ARCHITECTURAL PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED CASEWORK 06 41 00 page 7 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 3.2
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
CASEWORK INSTALLATION A.
Grade: Install cabinets and countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B.
Install casework level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Where casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical.
C.
Base Cabinets: Set cabinets straight, level, and plumb. Adjust sub-tops within 1/16 inch of a single plane. Align similar adjoining doors and drawers to a tolerance of 1/16 inch. Bolt adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform.
D.
Wall Cabinets: Hang cabinets straight, level, and plumb. Adjust fronts and bottoms within 1/16 inch of a single plane. Fasten to hanging strips, masonry, framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in walls and partitions. Align similar adjoining doors to a tolerance of 1/16 inch.
E.
Fasten cabinets to adjacent cabinets and to masonry, framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in walls and partitions to comply with the AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."
F.
Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises unless otherwise indicated. Adjust and align hardware so moving parts operate freely and contact points meet accurately. Allow for final adjustment after installation.
G.
Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
H.
Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop.
I.
1.
Provide cutouts for appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work and similar items.
2.
Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish.
Field jointing: Where possible make in the same manner as shop jointing, using dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edges surfaces is not required. Locate field joints where shown on Shop drawings. 1.
Secure field joints in plastic –Laminate countertops with concealed clamping devices located within 6 inches of front and back edges and intervals not exceeding 24inches. Tighten according to manufacturer’s written instructions to exert a constant, heavy –clamping pressure at joints.
J.
Install countertop supports as detailed and per WI section 16
K.
Install countertops level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8inch in 96 inches.
L.
Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
ARCHITECTURAL PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED CASEWORK 06 41 00 page 8 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation M.
3.3
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1.
Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96 inch sag, bow or other variation from a straight line.
2.
Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches OC and to walls with adhesive.
3.
Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer.
CLEANING A.
Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed on completion of installation.
B.
Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
ARCHITECTURAL PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED CASEWORK 06 41 00 page 9 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
AC Transit Oakland, CA
ARCHITECTURAL PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED CASEWORK 06 41 00 page 10 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 SECTION 07 92 19
ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section includes acoustical joint sealants.
B.
Related Requirements: 1.
1.3
Section.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each acoustical joint sealant.
B.
Sustainable Design Submittals: 1.
Sealants, Sealant Primers and caulks shall comply with local or regional air pollution control or air quality management district rules where applicable, or SCAQMD rule 1168 VOC limits.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of acoustical joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
D.
Acoustical-Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.4
Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. Joint-sealant formulation. Joint-sealant color.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
Product Test Reports: For each kind of acoustical joint sealant, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
B.
Sample Warranties: Manufacturer’s standard.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 19 page 1 of 4
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Provide acoustical joint-sealant products that effectively reduce airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction, as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. 2.
2.2
VOC limit for sealant is 250 g/L VOC limit for sealant primer is 250g/L on non porous substrates, and 775 g/L on porous substrates
ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex acoustical sealant complying with ASTM C 834. 1. 2.
B.
Acoustical putty for encasing all junction boxes, and sealing penetrations of HVAC ducts, water hook ups, conduits and other recessed elements in walls. 1.
C.
Serious Energy Inc: Quiet putty, Sound proofing Company Inc: Putty Pads or equal
Acoustical Sealant for Sanitary Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex acoustical sealant complying with ASTM C 834,ASTM C920, Type S Grade NS Class 25; Silcone single component mildew resistant +/- 25 percent movement capacity 1. 2.
2.3
Tremco, Tremstop Smoke and Sound Sealant, Pecora AC-20FTR or equal Colors of Exposed Acoustical Joint Sealants: Sealant to be paintable.
Dow Corning Corporation 786 Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant, GE Silicone Sanitary 1700 Sealant or equal Colors of Exposed Acoustical Joint Sealants: Sealant to be color selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.
Primer: Material recommended by acoustical-joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 19 page 2 of 4
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine joints indicated to receive acoustical joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing acoustical joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by acoustical-joint-sealant manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A.
Comply with acoustical joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements apply.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical joint sealant. Install acoustical joint sealants at both faces of partitions, at perimeters, and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919, ASTM C 1193, and manufacturer's written recommendations for closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions to underside of floor structure above acoustical ceilings.
C.
Acoustical Ceiling Areas: Apply acoustical joint sealant at perimeter edge moldings of acoustical ceiling areas in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.
3.4
CLEANING A.
Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of acoustical joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 19 page 3 of 4
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 3.5
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
PROTECTION A.
Protect acoustical joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated acoustical joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 19 page 4 of 4
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
SECTION 08 12 16 ALUMINUM FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
1.3
Interior aluminum frames for doors installed in gypsum board partitions.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product. 1.
B.
C.
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
Sustainable Design Submittals: 1.
Indicate percentage of recycled content, 10%
2.
Indicate Regional Materials 20% manufactured regionally (manufactured within 500 miles)
Shop Drawings: For aluminum frames: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Include elevations, sections, and installation details for each wall-opening condition. Include details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. Include locations of reinforcements and preparations for hardware. Include details of anchorages, joints, field splices, connections, and accessories. Include details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
D.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, in manufacturer's standard sizes . 1. Corner Fabrication and Finish: 12-by-12-inch long, full-size frame corner, including full-size sections of extrusions with factory-applied color finish.
E.
Product Schedule: For aluminum frames. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule and glazing.
F.
Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of interior aluminum frame.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
ALUMINUM FRAMES 08 12 16 page 1 of 4
April 2015
Operation Control Center Relocation
1.4
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
1.5
Maintenance Data: For aluminum frames to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Source limitations: Obtain interior aluminum frames from single source from single manufacturer.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide products manufactured by a single firm specializing in the production of aluminum framing for at least five years.
C.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. 2.
3.
1.6
Build mockup of each type of aluminum frame in typical wall area as shown on Drawings. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
REFERENCES A.
American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) 1. 2.
B.
ASTM, International (ASTM): 1.
C.
AAMA 609/610 Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for Architecturally Finished Aluminum AAMA 611 Voluntary Specifications for Anodized Architectural Aluminum
ASTM B221Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum –Alloy extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers Association (NAAMA): 1.
NAAMA Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Basis of Design Product: Western Integrated Materials, Inc, Long Beach CA, Other acceptable manufacturers include Advanced Architectural Frames, Wilson Partitions
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum frames from single source from single manufacturer.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
ALUMINUM FRAMES 08 12 16 page 2 of 4
April 2015
Operation Control Center Relocation
2.2
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
COMPONENTS A.
Aluminum Framing: ASTM B 221 with alloy and temper required to suit structural and finish requirements, and not less than 0.062 inch thick.
B.
Door Frames: Extruded aluminum, reinforced for hinges, strikes, and closers. 1. 402 series for wider throat locations.
C.
Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch thick; removable, snap-in casing trim and door stops, without exposed fasteners. 1.
D.
2.3
Trim Style: rectilinear
Frame and Trim Finish: Dark bronze-gray to match existing frames on site.
ACCESSORIES A.
Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic, stainless-steel or other noncorrosive metal fasteners compatible with frames, stops, panels, reinforcement plates, hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened.
B.
Door Silencers: Manufacturer's standard continuous mohair, wool pile, or vinyl seals in gray color.
C.
Acoustic Seals: Gray
D.
Hardware; refer to section 08 71 00
2.4
FABRICATION A.
Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips for accurately fitted hairline joints at butted and mitered connections.
B.
Factory prepare aluminum frames to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcements, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." 1.
C.
2.5
Locate hardware cutouts and reinforcements as required by fire-rated label for assembly.
Fabricate components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners.
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
ALUMINUM FRAMES 08 12 16 page 3 of 4
April 2015
Operation Control Center Relocation
2.6
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
ALUMINUM FINISHES A.
Dark bronze Anodic Finish: Class 1 , coating thickness of .7 mils per ASTM B244. Anodic seal Integrity in accordance with ASTM B680.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Verify that wall thickness does not exceed standard tolerances allowed by throat size of indicated aluminum frame.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION A.
Install aluminum frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Install frame components in the longest possible lengths, components 96 inches or shorter shall be one piece. 1. Use concealed installation clips to produce tightly fitted and aligned splices and connections. 2. Secure clips to extruded main-frame components and not to snap-in or trim members. 3. Do not leave screws or other fasteners exposed to view when installation is complete.
C.
Doors: Install doors aligned with frames and fitted with required hardware.
D.
Door Hardware: Install according to Section 087100 "Door Hardware" and aluminum-frame manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3
ADJUSTING A.
Inspect installation, correct misalignments, and tighten loose connections.
B.
Clean exposed frame surfaces promptly after installation, using cleaning methods recommended in writing by frame manufacturer and according to AAMA 609 & 610.
C.
Touch Up: Repair marred frame surfaces to blend inconspicuously with adjacent unrepaired surface so touchup is not visible from a distance of 48 inches as viewed by Architect. Remove and replace frames with damaged finish that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
ALUMINUM FRAMES 08 12 16 page 4 of 4
April 2015
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Flush wood doors.
B.
Factory finishing.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry: Installation of wood doors.
B.
Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Frames for flush wood doors.
C.
Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
D.
Section 08 81 00 - Glass Glazing: Site glazing of wood doors.
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI A208.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard.
B.
California Referenced Standard 12-7-4 - Fire Door Assembly Tests.
C.
HPVA HP-1 – Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
D.
California Green building Standards Section 5.504 Pollutant Control 1.
Table 5.504.4.1 Adhesive VOC Limit.
2.
Table 5.504.4.2 Sealant VOC limit.
3.
Table 5.504.4.3 VOC content for Architectural coatings
4.
Table 5.504.4.5 Formaldehyde Limits
E.
NWWDA I.S.1 - Industry Standard For Wood Flush Doors.
F.
UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
G.
WDMA – Window and Door Manufacturers Association.
H.
WI - Woodwork Institute "Manual of Millwork."
1.4 A.
SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Indicate door locations referenced to scheduled marks on Drawings.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 page 1 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
1.
Include door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, fire rating, handing, special beveling, special blocking for hardware, cutouts for glazing, construction details not covered on product data, hardware group and finish for each door.
2.
Affix WI Certified Compliance Label to first sheet of shop drawings.
B.
Product Data: Indicate door and core materials and constructions; veneer species and characteristics; factory machining characteristics.
C.
Samples:
D.
1.5
1.
Veneers: Submit samples, minimum 12 x 12 inches in size; of specified veneer showing range of variation in grain pattern and color to be expected with specified finish applied.
2.
Door Construction: Submit samples, minimum 8 x 12 inches in size, of top corner section of each type of door illustrating of construction, core, bonding, veneer thickness, edge and top construction.
Manufacturer's Certificates: 1.
Submit WI Certified Compliance Certificate prior to delivery of doors to site certifying compliance with specified grade requirements.
2.
Submit WI Certified Compliance Certificate for installation after completion of work of this section.
3.
Certify that fire rated doors meet positive pressure and smoke control requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of WI Section 12 Doors - Flush, Custom Grade except where otherwise specified.
B.
Provide WI compliance certifications for grade and installation.
C.
All woodwork lumber components certified by an agency accredited by the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC), as being supplied from ‘Certified Well-Managed Forest,” as defined by the FSC and in compliance with "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
D.
Document the source of the specific lumber used in the woodwork furnished and that the lumber originated from in accordance with SCS “Recovered Fiber Content Certification”.
E.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.
1.6
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing flush wood doors with minimum 5 years documented experience.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in installing flush wood doors with minimum 3 years documented experience.
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
AC Transit Oakland, CA
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 page 2 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation A.
1.8
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Fire Rated Doors: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class indicated on Drawings when tested in accordance with California Referenced Standard 12-7-4. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.
Package, deliver, and store doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
B.
Identify type and size of each door before delivery to permit installation at correct location.
C.
Provide temporary protective covers for doors during delivery, installation and until final acceptance.
D.
Protect doors to prevent warping and bowing during shipment and storage.
E.
Deliver doors to job site only after proper facilities are available for handling, sorting and protecting doors, after receiving areas are broom cleaned, after building is enclosed and after wet work is complete.
F.
Handle doors with clean hands or gloves. Do not drag doors across one another.
1.9
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.
Provide proper heat and humidity in area of storage and installation to maintain equilibrium moisture content in wood until work is complete.
B.
Maintain relative humidity between 50 and 65 percent at 70 degrees F.
1.10 A. 1.11
FIELD MEASUREMENTS Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation.
B.
Coordinate fabrication of fire rated doors with fabrication of steel frames and with door hardware to ensure assembly meets fire class indicated when tested in accordance California Referenced Standard 12-7-4.
1.12 A.
WARRANTY Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide for replacing, including cost of rehanging and refinishing, at no cost to District, interior wood doors exhibiting defects in materials or workmanship including delamination, warp and telegraphing exceeding specified tolerances within life of installation.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Eggers Industries. 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Non-Rated Doors: Master Flush - Particleboard.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 page 3 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 2. B.
2.2 A.
2.3 A.
B.
FSC chain-of-custody certified door construction.
Manufacturers Offering Equal Products: 1.
Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
2.
Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.
DOOR TYPES Flush Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick; WI Custom Grade; solid core; 5 ply construction; full flush and flush with vision panel configurations; fire rating as indicated. DOOR CONSTRUCTION Cores: 1.
Non-Rated and 20 Minute Rated Doors: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2; mat-formed particleboard.
2.
45, 60 and 90 Minute Rated Doors: Asbestos-free incombustible mineral approved by labeling authority.
Stiles: 1.
Non-Rated Doors: 2-ply with outer ply same species as face veneers and free from joints; mill option inner ply; 1-3/8 inch thick.
2.
20 Minute Rated Doors:
3.
C.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
a.
Single Doors: 2-ply with outer ply same species as face veneers and free from joints; mill option inner ply; 1-3/8 inch thick.
b.
Pairs of Doors: 2 ply fire-treated with treated maple outer ply free from joints; mill option inner ply; 1-3/8 inch thick.
45, 60 and 90 Minute Rated Doors: 2 ply with 1/4 inch thick outer ply same species as face veneers and free from joints; reinforcing inner ply with minimum average split resistance of 985 lbs when tested in accordance with ADMA TM-5.
Rails: 1.
Non-Rated and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Mill option hardwood; 1-1/8 inch thick.
2.
45, 60 and 90 Minute Rated Doors: Minimum 1/2 inch 1-ply top rail; minimum 1-1/2 inch 2-ply bottom rail; mill option material.
D.
Cross Bands: Hardwood or engineered fiber; minimum 1/16 inch thick; minimum 60 lbs/cu ft density.
E.
Facing: Hardwood veneer; minimum 1/50 inch thick after sanding; maximum 12 percent moisture content. 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Facing Quality: HPVA A Grade for transparent finish.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 page 4 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
2.
Veneer: All woodwork lumber components certified by an agency accredited by the Forest Stewardship Council, as being supplied from ‘Certified Well-Managed Forest,” as defined by the Forest Stewardship Council.
3.
Door Veneers: White Maple. Match grain of existing doors a. b.
Veneer Cut: Plain sliced Matching Between Individual Veneer Pieces: Slip match. 1)
Assembly of Spliced Veneer on Door Face: Book match.
2)
Matching Between Doors: Pair matched.
F.
Adhesives: WI Type I or II. Adhesives containing urea formaldehyde not allowed.
G.
Binding Agents: All composite wood products shall be made with binders containing no urea formaldehyde resin.
2.4 A.
2.5
ACCESSORIES Glass Stops: 1.
Non-Rated Doors: Solid stock close grain hardwood mold-ings; species to match face veneers; non-lipped profile; back beveled for glazing; mitered corners; 90 degree angle on glass; 5/8 inch high x 23/32 inch wide; Eggers #100 Stock Lite Bead Profile.
2.
20 Minute Rated Doors: Hardwood molding as specified for non-rated doors with recessed 2-part metal glazing stops; Eggers 20 Minute Wood Lite Bead with #100 Stock Lite Bead Profile.
3.
45, 60 and 90 Minute Rated Doors: Veneer wrapped noncombustible material with recessed 2-part metal glazing stops; veneer species to match face veneer; non-lipped profile; mitered corners; 90 degree angle on glass; 5/8 inch high x 5/8 inch wide; Eggers 45, 60 & 90 Minute Veneer Wrapped Wood Bead.
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate non-rated doors in accordance with WI quality standards requirements.
B.
Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with WI standards for label indicated on Drawings and to UL or Warnock-Hersey requirements.
C.
D.
1.
Attach fire rating label to door edge.
2.
Advise Architect, prior to commencing fabrication, of doors indicated to be fire rated which cannot qualify for appropriate labeling.
Provide internal blocking to ensure surface mounted hardware can be installed without use of through bolts. 1.
Provide blocking for closers and exit devices in particleboard core doors.
2.
Provide noncombustible internal blocking for closers, exit devices, locks, door bottoms and flush bolts in mineral core doors.
Construct stiles for meeting stiles of pairs of rated doors so that metal edges and astragals are
AC Transit Oakland, CA
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 page 5 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
not required. E.
Bond stiles and rails to cores with adhesive under pressure.
F.
Bevel strike edge of single acting doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches.
G.
Factory machine doors for hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware.
H.
Factory fit doors for frame dimensions identified on shop drawings.
2.6 A.
B.
FINISH Factory Finish for Hardwood Veneer Faced Doors: Factory finish in accordance with WI Section 5, System 5 - Catalyzed Polyurethane modified as follows: 1.
First Coat: Wash coat.
2.
Second Coat: Stain as required to match Architect’s sample.
3.
Second Coat: Sanding sealer.
4.
Third Coat: Sanding sealer.
5.
Fourth Coat: Sanding sealer followed by sanding with 220 grit paper.
6.
Fifth Coat: Top coat of catalyzed water-based ultra violet cured polyurethane.
7.
Sixth Coat: Top coat of catalyzed water-based ultra violet cured polyurethane.
Stain and seal edges of doors to match color of faces.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
B.
Verify that frame openings that are plumb or are not out-of-tolerance for size or alignment.
C.
Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install doors in accordance with WI Section 12, final reviewed shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
B.
Prepare doors to receive surface hardware in accordance with NWWDA requirements.
C.
Pilot drill screw holes. Use threaded through bolts for surface hardware is not provided.
D.
Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Sections 08 11 13 and of hardware specified in Section 08 71 00.
3.3
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
AC Transit Oakland, CA
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 page 6 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
A.
Clearances: 1.
2. B.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Non-Rated and 20 Minute Rated Doors: a.
Jambs and Heads: 1/8 inch.
b.
Meeting Stiles of Pairs of Doors: 1/16 inch per leaf.
c.
Bottom of Door to: 1)
Top of Raised Non-Combustible Sill: 3/8 inch maximum.
2)
Top of Rigid Floor Tile: 5/8 inch maximum.
3)
Nominal Top of Other Floor Covering Surface: 1/2 inch maximum.
4)
Top of Structural Substrate Where No Sill Exists: 3/4 inch maximum.
45, 60 and 90 Minute Rated Doors: As required by labeling authority.
Warp: 1.
Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Twist): 1/4 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
2.
Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/4 inch measured with straight edge, top to bottom.
3.
Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/4 inch measured with straight edge, edge to edge.
C.
Telegraphing: Not to exceed 1/100 inch in 3 inch span.
D.
Delamination: None permitted.
3.4
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust door installation for correct function and smooth and balanced door movement.
B.
Restore factory finish damaged during installation.
3.5 A.
1.
Restore in manner that results in door showing no evidence of restoration.
2.
Replace doors on which finish restoration cannot be made to match factory finish.
PROTECTION Protect doors from damage to surface or profile until final acceptance.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 page 7 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
AC Transit Oakland, CA
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 page 8 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
SECTION 08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT
PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: Interior glazed aluminum storefront including doorways, flashings and extrusions associated with systems. Frames to accommodate insulated glazing for acoustic separation.
B.
Related Sections: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Section 079000 – Joint Sealers Section 081400 – Wood Doors Section 087100 – Door hardware Section 088000 – Glazing Section 092600 – Gypsum Board Assemblies
1.2 REFERENCES A.
American Architectural Manufacturers Association: 1. 2. 3.
B.
AAMA 611 AAMA 701 AAMA 2605
Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum Voluntary Specification for Pile Weatherstrip/Weatherseal Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels
ASTM, International (ASTM): 1. 2.
ASTM A36 ASTM A283
3.
ASTM A501
4. 5.
ASTM B209 ASTM B211
6.
ASTM B221
7.
ASTM C509
8. 9.
ASTM C542 ASTM C864
10.
ASTM D2287
11.
ASTM E283
12.
ASTM E330
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Specification for Structural Steel Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Bar, Rod, and Wire Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material Specification for Lock-Strip Gaskets Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers Specification for Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer Molding and Extrusion Compounds Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT 08 43 13 page 1 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 13.
C.
Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by the Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
American Welding Society (AWS): 1.
D.
ASTM E331
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
AWS D1.1 – Structural Welding Code
California Code of Regulations (CCR): 1.
CCR Title 24
Part 2, California Building Code (CBC)
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Provide storefront system which includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Is self-supporting and spans between building structural supports and members, Includes adjustments and clearances for construction tolerances and building deflections, Is capable of accepting all live loads, dead loads, wind loads, and seismic loads imposed upon it. Safely transfers all such loads into building structure.
B.
Air Infiltration Criteria: When tested in accordance with ASTM E283, Section 4.3, maximum allowable air infiltration through any part of systems shall be 0.06 cfm per gross square foot of exterior area at 6.24 psf differential pressure.
C.
Structural Performance: Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with the CBC to a design pressure of 30 psf and a suction of 30 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E330, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
The deflection of framing members shall not exceed L/200 or 1/2 inch, whichever is less. Refer to the CBC.
1.4 SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's published specifications, recommendations, and installation and cleaning instructions for intended use.
B.
Shop Drawings: At a minimum, include the following: 1.
Show details of all finished Work for storefront systems and entrances as indicated on Drawings including following items: a. Attachments, anchors, reinforcements, assemblies, and closing connections between members and with adjacent construction. b. Locations of all joints, joinery techniques, and materials, fastening, and sealing methods. c. Provisions for horizontal and vertical thermal and structural movement. d. Glazing materials and glazing systems. e. Sealant materials and sealant systems. f. Detail of conduits and preparations for power, signal and control systems
2.
Identify all materials, including metal alloys, glass types, fasteners, and all shop and field sealants by product name and locate on shop drawings. Include instructions and explanatory details for sequence of installation and installation of all materials including glazing and re-glazing procedures.
3.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT 08 43 13 page 2 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 4. 5. 6.
C.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Show relative layout of all adjacent walls, beams, columns and slabs; all correctly dimensioned. Dimension portion of glass edge relative to metal daylight. Provide isometric or other drawings which explain or define certain interconnections when requested by Architect.
Samples: 1.
Provide samples of each material and finish. a. Identify production processes and materials on each sample. b. Submit 2 samples 12 inches in length, illustrating finish for all materials in sets which show extreme dark and light color range for each finish and reflective and tinted glass. c. Color range and texture of production material must conform to reviewed range samples.
2.
Sealant: Submit 3, 12-inch long samples of each color required for each type of sealant exposed to view for workmanship; install sample between two strips of material representative of typical joint widths.
D.
Design Data: Indicate framing member structural and physical characteristics, dimensional limitations, and structural calculations stamped by a licensed engineer. Calculations shall show adequacy of connections and framing.
E.
Maintenance and cleaning recommendations.
F.
Submit written warranty/guaranty as specified below.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in State of California.
B.
Fabricator/erector shall have minimum of 5 years experience in fabrication and erection of systems specified on projects of similar size and scope and shall be authorized, approved, or licensed as required by manufacturer of systems.
C.
Manufacturer shall have not less than 5 years experience in fabrication of storefront systems of type shown and specified. Submit proof of experience with bid.
D.
Single Source Requirement: All aluminum products shall be provided by same manufacturer.
E.
Welders: Welds shall be made only by welders and welding operators who have been qualified and certified within one year preceding date of these Contract Documents by tests prescribed in AWS D 1.1 to perform type of Work required.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.
Identify type and location of each door prior to site delivery in manner to not damage finish.
B.
Pack, ship, unload, store, and protect materials to prevent abuse, damage, and defacement such as stains, discolorations, scratches, abrasions, or soiling from any source.
C.
Deliver materials only after proper storage facilities are available.
D.
Store indoors in clean, dry location free from dust and corrosive fumes.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT 08 43 13 page 3 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
E.
Deliver and store packaged products in original containers or bundles with seals unbroken and labels intact until time for use.
F.
Where necessary, stack material off ground on level forms, fully protected from weather and condensation.
1.7 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY A.
Special Project Warranty: 1. 2. 3.
Extend period for correction of work for 4 additional years (total of 5 years). Include removal and replacement of superimposed work of other trades. Submit Warranty manufacturer’s statement agreeing to above terms and conditions and signed jointly and severally by Contractor and installer.
B.
Provide above written guaranty against failure of materials or workmanship resulting in excessive leakage or air infiltration, excessive deflections, loss of adhesion or structural integrity, deterioration of finish or construction in excess of normal weathering, and defects in other components of work.
C.
Provide special product warranty as follows: Warranty powder coated aluminum finish coatings against abnormal deterioration, discoloration, and failure for a period of 5 years on extrusions and 5 years on break metal after acceptance of the work.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 A.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Basis of Design: Old Castle Glass - Vistawall 1.
B.
Alternate manufacturers that offer comparable systems: 1. 2.
2.02 A.
Interior storefront FG 3000
Kawneer Company, Inc. Arcadia, Inc..
MATERIALS Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy for aluminum extrusions shall satisfy requirements for alloy 6063-T5 or T6 alloy and temper. 1. 2. 3.
Provide a minimum nominal wall thickness of 1/8 inch for structural members and 1/16 inch for nonstructural members. Provide straight members which have square corners and smooth flat surfaces, or uniform cross section and within aluminum association tolerances for extrusions. Break Metal: Flashing and expansion joint covers - 0.32 inch aluminum; coil coated with Kynar 500 paint.
B.
Carbon Steel: Shapes, plate, bars, and bar shapes; ASTM A36; tubing, ASTM A501; light plate, ASTM A283; Grade C; each as shown and required for concealed supports and attachments.
C.
Welding Materials: Conform to AWS Code and AWS Filler Metal Specifications, select materials which are suitable for use with metals to be joined.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT 08 43 13 page 4 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation D.
Fasteners: 1.
2. E.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Provide concealed mechanical fasteners of types required or indicated, each of sufficient strength to support connected members and loads, and to develop full strength of parts fastened or connected. Provide inserts as required for installation as other Work progresses.
Screws, Bolts, Nuts, Washers, and Related Items: Non-magnetic stainless steel, regardless of use or location, except that any exposed fasteners which are permitted shall match aluminum finish. 1. 2.
Self-locking fasteners and nuts shall have nylon inserts or patches. Provide liquid lock washer by Loctite Corp or approved equivalent.
F.
Slip Pads: Provide eel slip, nylatron, or high impact polystyrene pads between moving parts at expansion connections.
G.
Provide minimum thickness of 1/6 inch for nylatron and polystyrene, and 1/8 inch for eel slip.
H.
Do not use plastic pads in close proximity to field welds.
2.03
GLASS AND GLAZING
A.
Glass: Comply with requirements of Section 088000. 1” insulated glass to meet acoustic requirements.
B.
Glazing System: Four-sided, conventional, exposed, frame system, with combination of sponge neoprene and dense neoprene gaskets. All gaskets shall be injection molded at frame corners.
C.
Sealants: Provide sealant material for each application and use as listed; color as selected by Architect. 1. 2.
2.04
Material of each type shall be product of only one manufacturer equal to Dow Corning 790 or 795 silicone; refer to Section 079200. Sealant Backup at Nonstructural Joints: Polyethylene, silicone, or Denver foam as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Weatherseals and Flashings: Provide concealed weatherseals and flashings in joints where shown on Drawings and where required to produce air-tight Work for acoustic purposes.
B.
Expansion Anchorage to Concrete deck: as shown.
C.
Setting Blocks: Provide as recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Side Blocks: Locate side blocks within upper half of each jamb with each light.
E.
Primer and Paint: 1. 2.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Steel Primer: Standard Brand, Alkyd base rust-inhibitive paint suitable for carbon steel. Provide painting of carbon steel in accordance with Section 05 50 00.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT 08 43 13 page 5 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 2.05 A.
FABRICATION Fabricate Work in conformance with approved shop drawings. 1. 2. 3.
B.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Match work to produce continuity of line and profile, with all joints accurately fitted and secured. Provide isolation of aluminum. Use liquid lock washer on permanently installed threaded fasteners.
Formed Aluminum Members: Fabricate to produce true lines, angles, contours, and surfaces with a constant width of each face. 1. 2. 3.
Form bent members with minimum radius, well defined corners. Form flashing corners and transitions from one piece lapped sealed and riveted together with flat-lock type seams. Hem exposed edges of flashings on under side 1/2 inch.
C.
Exterior Expansion Joints: One inch wide open expansion joints at maximum 8'-0" on center covered with minimum 4 inches wide cover; no joint closer than 2'-0" to corners.
D.
Interior Expansion Joints: Minimum allowable width due to expansion at 10'-0" maximum on center with minimum 4 inches wide back-up plate; no joints closer to corner than 2'-0" .
E.
Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as necessary for performance requirements; separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint or other separator that will prevent corrosion.
F.
Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible.
2.06 A.
FINISHES Architectural Anodized finish: Class 1 , coating thickness of .7 mils per ASTM B244. Anodic seal Integrity in accordance with ASTM B680 1.
Color: Dark bronze Anodic Finish:
2.Extent of Finish: 1. Apply factory coating to surfaces exposed at completed assemblies. 2. Apply finish to surfaces cut during fabrication so no natural aluminum is visible in completed assemblies, including joint edges. 3. Apply touch-up materials recommended by coating manufacturer for field application to cut ends and minor damage to factory applied finish. 4. Concealed Steel Items: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A386 to 90 oz/sq ft., primed with iron oxide paint. 5. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section is to be performed.
B.
Examine wall location and verify following: 1. 2.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Correctness of dimensions, backing, or support conditions. Absence of defects that would adversely affect frame or door installation. ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT 08 43 13 page 6 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
C.
Examine surfaces to receive frames and storefront and verify: 1. 2. 3. 4.
D. 3.02
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Condition of receiving openings and correct coordination with adjacent framing where occurs. Provisions for electrical service. Absence of defects that will adversely affect installation. Location of reinforcement in the existing slab prior to setting anchors. Avoid cutting (E) reinforcement.
Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. ERECTION
A.
Set or erect Work in conformance with shop drawings. Coordinate erection work with building construction.
B.
Protect this and other Work completed or in progress from damage and marring.
C.
Remove units or components which are damaged or otherwise unsuitable for installation and replace with new matching materials.
D.
Erect all members plumb and level; in alignment and regularly spaced; in a true plane on each surface; and with joints and intersections tightly fitted and weathertight within specified tolerances. After components are properly positioned, all structural connections shall be rigidly fixed.
E.
Install weatherseals and flashing to produce weather tight joints.
F.
Joints provided for thermal movement and structural movement shall be free to move noiselessly and without loss of weather seal.
G.
Tolerances: All parts of storefront when complete shall be within following tolerances: 1. 2.
3.
4.
Deviation from plumb, level, or dimensioned angle shall not exceed 1/8 inch per 12 feet of length of members of 1/4 inch in total run in all lines. Deviation from theoretical position in plan or elevation, including deviation from plumb, level, or dimensioned angle shall not exceed 3/8 inch total at any location. Change in deviation shall not exceed 1/8 inch for 12 feet run in all directions. Maximum joint width or offset from true alignment between two consecutive members placed end to end where movement does not have to be accommodated shall not exceed 1/32 inch. Maximum offset between glass framing members at corners of glazing pocket shall not exceed 1/32 inch.
H.
Provide accurate bench marks for use in wall erection. Promptly correct errors in inconsistencies.
I.
Install glass, which is heat strengthened, to achieve roller distortion in horizontal direction.
J.
Isolation of Aluminum: 1. 2.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Clean aluminum as required for proper adherence of coating. Apply heavy coat of bituminous paint, or other isolation coating material to aluminum to completely isolate aluminum from concrete, steel, or other metals in concealed areas.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT 08 43 13 page 7 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
K.
Sealant Installation: Comply with requirements of Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
L.
Field Painting of Carbon Steel: After erection, wire brush and paint bare areas, connections, and any abrasions to shop paint. Paint out erection marks. Apply paint finish coat to items as indicated.
3.03
COMPLETED WORK
A.
Certify to District that installed Work conforms to construction criteria as specified, Contractor's engineering calculations and shop drawings.
B.
All materials shall be clean, undamaged, and unmarred at time of acceptance of Work. Replace broken, damaged, and marred materials.
3.04
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Provide written instructions for cleaning materials and cleaning methods for glass, aluminum, paint, stone, and stainless steel.
B.
Provide written verification that cleaning agents are compatible with glass, aluminum, paint, stone, stainless steel, glazing materials, and sealants.
C.
At time of Substantial Completion, clean storefront window systems completely and polish glass.
D.
Demonstrate proper cleaning methods and materials to District’s maintenance personnel.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT 08 43 13 page 8 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions of Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed. B. This Section includes the following, but is not necessarily limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Door Hardware, including electric hardware. Power supplies for electric hardware. Thresholds, gasketing and weather-stripping. Door silencers or mutes.
C. Related Sections: The following sections are noted as containing requirements that relate to this Section, but may not be limited to this listing. 1. Division 8: Section - Wood Doors. 2. Division 8: Section - Aluminum Storefront 3. Division 28: Section - Fire/Life-Safety Systems & Security Access Systems. 1.3
REFERENCES (USE DATE OF STANDARD IN EFFECT AS OF BID DATE.) A. 2013 California Building Code, CCR, Title 24. B. BHMA – Builders’ Hardware Manufacturers Association C. CCR – California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, California State Accessibility Standards. D. DHI – Door and Hardware Institute E. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association. 1. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives 2. NFPA 105 - Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies F. UL - Underwriters Laboratories. 1. UL 10C - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 2. UL 305 - Panic Hardware G. WHI - Warnock Hersey Incorporated
AC Transit Oakland, CA
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 page 1 of 12
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
H. SDI - Steel Door Institute 1.4
SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS A. General: Submit in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification sections. B. Submit product data (catalog cuts) including manufacturers' technical product information for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. C. Submit six (6) copies of schedule organized vertically into “Hardware Sets” with index of doors and headings, indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include following information: 1. Include a Cover Sheet with; a. Job Name, location, telephone number. b. Architects name, location and telephone number. c. Contractors name, location, telephone number and job number. d. Suppliers name, location, telephone number and job number. e. Hardware consultant's name, location and telephone number. 2. Job Index information included; a. Numerical door number index including; door number, hardware heading number and page number. b. Complete keying information (referred to DHI hand-book "Keying Systems and Nomenclature"). Provision should be made in the schedule to provide keying information when available; if it is not available at the time the preliminary schedule is submitted. c. Manufacturers' names and abbreviations for all materials. d. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes used in the schedule. e. Mounting locations for hardware. f. Clarification statements or questions. g. Catalog cuts and manufacturer’s technical data and instructions. 3. Vertical schedule format sample: Heading Number 1 (Hardware group or set number – HW -1) (a) 1 Single Door #1 - Exterior from Corridor 101
(b) 90°
(c) RH
(m) 626 626
(n) IVE SCH
(d) 3' 0"x7' 0" x 1-3/4" x (e) 20 Minute (f) WD x HM (g) 1 2
(h) 6AA
(i) ea 1 ea
(j) Hinges - (k) 5BB1HW 4.5 x 4.5 NRP (l) ½ TMS Lockset - ND50PD x RHO x RH x 10-025 x JTMS
(a) - Single or pair with opening number and location. (b) - Degree of opening (c) - Hand of door(s) (d) - Door and frame dimensions and door thickness. (e) - Label requirements if any. (f) - Door by frame material. (g) - (Optional) Hardware item line #. (h) - Keyset Symbol. (i) - Quantity. (j) - Product description. (k) - Product Number. (l) - Fastenings and other pertinent information. (m) - Hardware finish codes per ANSI A156.18. (n) Manufacture abbreviation.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 page 2 of 12
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
D. Make substitution requests in accordance with Division 1. Substitution requests must be made prior to bid date. Include product data and indicate benefit to the project. Furnish samples of any proposed substitution. E. Wiring Diagrams: Provide product data and wiring and riser diagrams for all electrical products listed in the Hardware Schedule portion of this section. F. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. G. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. H. Furnish as-built/as-installed schedule with close-out documents, including keying schedule and transcript, wiring/riser diagrams, manufacturers’ installation and adjustment and maintenance information. I.
1.5
Fire Door Assembly Testing: Submit a written record of each fire door assembly to the Owner to be made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for future building inspections. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, exit devices, etc.) from a single manufacturer. B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation. 1. Responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware. 2. Meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing. 3. Stock parts for products supplied and are capable of repairing and replacing hardware items found defective within warranty periods. C. Hardware Installer: Company specializing in the installation of commercial door hardware with five years documented experience. D. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and tested by UL or Warnock Hersey for given type/size opening and degree of label. Provide proper latching hardware, door closers, approved-bearing hinges and seals whether listed in the Hardware Schedule or not. 1. Where emergency exit devices are required on fire-rated doors, (with supplementary marking on doors' UL labels indicating "Fire Door to be Equipped with Fire Exit Hardware") provide UL label on exit devices indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". E. Exit Doors: Operable from inside with single motion without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 page 3 of 12
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.6
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Coordinate delivery of packaged hardware items to the appropriate locations (shop or field) for installation. B. Hardware items shall be individually packaged in manufacturers’ original containers, complete with proper fasteners. Clearly mark packages on outside to indicate contents and locations in hardware schedule and in work. C. Provide locked storage area for hardware, protect from moisture, sunlight, paint, chemicals, etc. D. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct.
1.7
WARRANTY A. Provide warranties of respective manufacturers’ regular terms of sale from day of final acceptance as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
1.8
Locksets: Three (3) years. Electronic Locks: One (1) year. Closers: Thirty (30) years except electronic closers shall be two (2) years. Exit devices: Three (3) years. All other hardware: Two (2) years.
MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.
1.9
PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene a pre-installation conference at least one week prior to beginning work of this section. B. Attendance: Architect, Construction Manager, Contractor, Security Contractor, Hardware Supplier, Installer, and Project Inspector. C. Agenda: Review hardware schedule, products, installation procedures and coordination required with related work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS Item
Manufacturer
Acceptable Substitutes
A. Hinges
Ives
Hager, Stanley, McKinney
B. Locks, Latches & Cylinders
Schlage
Or Approved Equal
C. Exit Devices
Von Duprin
Or Approved Equal
AC Transit Oakland, CA
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 page 4 of 12
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
2.2
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
D. Closers
LCN
Or Approved Equal
E. Push, Pulls & Protection Plates
Ives
Trimco, BBW, DCI
F. Flush Bolts
Ives
Trimco, BBW, DCI
G. Dust Proof Strikes
Ives
Trimco, BBW, DCI
H. Coordinators
Ives
Trimco, BBW, DCI
I.
Stops
Ives
Trimco, BBW, DCI
J.
Overhead Stops
Glynn-Johnson
Or Approved Equal
K. Thresholds
National Guard
Pemko, Zero
L. Seals & Bottoms
National Guard
Pemko, Zero
MATERIALS A. Hinges: Exterior out-swinging door butts shall be non-ferrous material and shall have stainless steel hinge pins. All doors to have non-rising pins. 1. Hinges shall be sized in accordance with the following: a. Height: 1) Doors up to 42" wide: 4-1/2" inches. 2) Doors 43" to 48" wide: 5 inches. b. Width: Sufficient to clear frame and trim when door swings 180 degrees. c. Number of Hinges: Furnish 3 hinges per leaf to 7'-5" in height. Add one for each additional 2 feet in height. 2. Furnish non-removable pins (NRP) at all exterior out-swing doors and interior key lock doors with reverse bevels. B. Extra Heavy duty Commercial Mortise Locks: Schlage “L” Series as scheduled with “06” Style Lever and “A” Style Rose. 1. Locksets to comply with ANSI A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 and Security Grade 1 with all standard trims. Locksets shall also comply with UL10C Positive Pressure requirements 2. Lock case shall be manufactured with heavy 12 gauge steel with fully wrapped design. Lock cases with exposed edges are not acceptable. Lock case shall be multi-functional allowing transformation to a different function without opening lock case. 3. Latchbolt shall have ¾” throw and be non-handed, field reversible without opening the lock case. Solid latchbolts and / or plastic anti-friction devices are not acceptable. 4. The deadbolt, when used, shall be 1” throw stainless steel with a ¾” internal engagement when fully extended. 5. All trim shall be through-bolted with the spring cages supporting the trim attached to the lock cases to prevent torquing. 6. Levers to have independent rotation in both directions. Exterior lever assembly to be one-piece design attached by threaded bushing. Interior lever assembly shall be attached by screwless shank 7. Thru-bolt lever assemblies through the door for positive interlock. Locks using a through the door spindle for attachment are not acceptable. Spindles shall be independent, designed to “break-away” at a maximum of 75psi torque.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 page 5 of 12
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
8. Hand of lock chassis to be changeable by simply moving one screw from one side to the case to the other and pulling and reversing the latchbolt. 9. Cylinders to be secured by a cast stainless steel, dual retainer. Locks utilizing screws and / or stamped retainers are not acceptable. C. Exit devices: Von Duprin as scheduled. 1. Provide certificate by independent testing laboratory that device has completed over 1,000,000 cycles and can still meet ANSI/BHMA A156.3 - 2001 standards. 2. All internal parts shall be of cold-rolled steel with zinc dichromate coating. 3. Mechanism case shall have an average thickness of .140". 4. Compression spring engineering. 5. Non-handed basic device design with center case interchangeable with all functions. 6. All devices shall have quiet return fluid dampeners. 7. All latchbolts shall be deadlocking with ¾” throw and have a self-lubricating coating to reduce friction and wear. 8. Device shall bear UL label for fire and or panic as may be required. 9. All surface strikes shall be roller type and utilize a plate underneath to prevent movement. 10. Lever Trim: “Breakaway” design, forged brass or bronze escutcheon with a minimum of .130” thickness, match lockset lever design. 11. All Exit Devices to be sex-bolted to the doors. 12. Panic Hardware shall comply with CBC Section 1008.1.9 and shall be mounted between 30" and 44" above the finished floor surface. a. Provide exit devices UL certified to meet maximum 5 pound requirements according to the California Building Code section 11B-309.4, and UL listed for Panic Exterior Fire Exit Hardware. D. Closers: LCN as scheduled. Place closers inside building, stairs, room, etc. 1. Door closer cylinders shall be of high strength cast iron construction with double heat treated pinion shaft to provide low wear operating capabilities of internal parts throughout the life of the installation. All door closers shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 test requirements by a BHMA certified testing laboratory. 2. Closers shall be installed to permit doors to swing 180 degrees. 3. All closers shall utilize a stable fluid withstanding temperature range of 120 degrees F. to -30 degrees F. without requiring seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door. 4. Provide the manufactures drop plates, brackets and spacers as required at narrow head rails and special frame conditions. NO wood plates or spacers will be allowed. 5. Maximum effort to operate closers shall not exceed 5 lbs., such pull or push effort being applied at right angles to hinged doors. Compensating devices or automatic door operators may be utilized to meet the above standards. When fire doors are required, the maximum effort to operate the closer may be increased but shall not exceed 15 lbs. when specifically approved by fire marshal. All closers shall be adjusted to operate with the minimum amount of opening force and still close and latch the door. These forces do not apply to the force required to retract latch bolts or disengage other devices that hold the door in a closed position. Door shall take at least 3 seconds to move from an open position of 70 degrees to a point of 3 inches from the latch jamb. 6. Provide sex-bolted or through bolt mounting for all door closers. E. Flush Bolts & Dust Proof Strikes: Automatic Flush Bolts shall be of the low operating force design. Utilize the top bolt only model for interior doors where applicable and as permitted by testing procedures. 1. Manual flush bolts only permitted on storage or mechanical openings as scheduled. 2. Provide dust proof strikes at openings using bottom bolts. AC Transit Oakland, CA
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 page 6 of 12
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
F. Door Stops: 1. Unless otherwise noted in Hardware Sets, provide floor type with appropriate fasteners. Where wall type cannot be used, provide floor type. If neither can be used, provide overhead type. 2. Do not install floor stops more than four (4) inches from the face of the wall or partition (CBC Section 11B-307). 3. Overhead stops shall be made of stainless steel and non-plastic mechanisms and finished metal end caps. Field-changeable hold-open, friction and stop-only functions. G. Protection Plates: Fabricate either kick, armor, or mop plates with four beveled edges. Provide kick plates 10" high and 2" LDW. Sizes of armor and mop plates shall be listed in the Hardware Schedule. Furnish with machine or wood screws of bronze or stainless to match other hardware. H. Thresholds: As Scheduled and per details. 1. Thresholds shall not exceed 1/2" in height, with a beveled surface of 1:2 maximum slope. 2. Set thresholds in a full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 “Thermal and Moisture Protection”. 3. Use ¼” fasteners, red-head flat-head sleeve anchors (SS/FHSL). 4. Thresholds shall comply with CBC Section 11B-204.1. I.
Seals: Provide silicone gasket at all rated and exterior doors. 1. Fire-rated Doors, Resilient Seals: UL10C Classified complies with NFPA 80 & NFPA 252. Coordinate with selected door manufacturers' and selected frame manufacturers' requirements. 2. Fire-rated Doors, Intumescent Seals: Furnished by selected door manufacturer. Furnish fire-labeled opening assembly complete and in full compliance with UL10C Classified complies with NFPA 80 & NFPA 252. Where required, intumescent seals vary in requirement by door type and door manufacture -- careful coordination required. 3. Smoke & Draft Control Doors, Provide UL10C Classified complies with NFPA 80 & NFPA 252 for use on “S” labeled Positive Pressure door assemblies.
J.
Door Shoes & Door Top Caps: Provide door shoes at all exterior wood doors and top caps at all exterior out-swing doors.
K. Silencers: Furnish silencers for interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 2 for pairs of doors. Omit where sound or light seals occurs, or for fire-resistive-rated door assemblies. 2.3
KEYING A. Furnish a masterkey system as directed by the owner or architect B. A detailed keying schedule is to be prepared by the owner and/or architect in consultation with a representative of the lock manufacturer. Each keyed cylinder on every keyed lock is to be listed separately showing the door #, key group (in BHMA terminology), cylinder type, finish and location on the door. C. Establish a new masterkey system for this project as directed by the keying schedule. D. Furnish all cylinders in the Schlage conventional style except the exit device and removable mullion cylinders which will be supplied in Schlage Full Size Interchangable Core (FSIC). Pack change keys independently (PKI).
AC Transit Oakland, CA
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 page 7 of 12
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
E. Furnish construction keying for doors requiring locking during construction. F. Furnish mechanical keys as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Furnish 2 cut change keys for each different change key code. Furnish 1 uncut key blank for each change key code. Furnish 6 cut masterkeys for each different masterkey set. Furnish 3 uncut key blanks for each masterkey set. Furnish 2 cut control keys cut to the top masterkey for permanent I/C cylinders. Furnish 1 cut control key cut to each SKD combination.
G. Furnish Schlage Padlocks and the cylinders to tie them into the masterkey system for gates, storage boxes, utility valve security, roof hatches and roll-up doors keyed as directed in the keying schedule. 2.4
FINISHES A. Generally to be satin nickel US15 (619 on bronze and 646 on steel) unless otherwise noted. B. Door closers shall be powder-coated to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted. C. Aluminum items to be finished anodized aluminum except thresholds which can be furnished as standard mill finish.
2.5
FASTENERS A. Screws for strikes, face plates and similar items shall be flat head, countersunk type, provide machine screws for metal and standard wood screws for wood. B. Screws for butt hinges shall be flathead, countersunk, full-thread type. C. Fastening of closer bases or closer shoes to doors shall be by means of sex bolts and spray painted to match closer finish. D. Provide expansion anchors for attaching hardware items to concrete or masonry. E. All exposed fasteners shall have a phillips head. F. Finish of exposed screws to match surface finish of hardware or other adjacent work. G. All Exit Devices and Lock Protectors shall be fastened to the door by the means of sex bolts or through bolts.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSPECTION A. Verify that doors and frames are square and plumb and ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. C. Fire-Rated Door Assembly Inspection: Upon completion of the installation, all fire door assemblies shall be inspected to confirm proper operation of the closing device and latching device and that only the manufacturer’s furnished fasteners are used for installation and that
AC Transit Oakland, CA
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 page 8 of 12
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
it meets all criteria of a fire door assembly per NFPA 80 (Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives) 2007 Edition. A written record shall be maintained and transmitted to the Owner to be made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). The inspection of the swinging fire doors shall be performed by a certified FDAI (Fire Door Assembly Inspector) with knowledge and understanding of the operating components of the type of door being subjected to the inspection. The record shall list each fire door assembly throughout the project and include each door number, an itemized list of hardware set components at each door opening, and each door location in the facility. 3.2
INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of DHI. B. Use the templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. C. Mounting heights for hardware shall be as recommended by the Door and Hardware Institute. Operating hardware will to be located between 30" and 44" AFF. D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. F. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber sealant. G. If hand of door is changed during construction, make necessary changes in hardware at no additional cost. H. Hardware Installer shall coordinate with security contractor to route cable to connect electrified locks, panic hardware and fire exit hardware to power transfers or electric hinges at the time these items are installed so as to avoid disassembly and reinstallation of hardware. I.
Hardware Installer shall also be present with the security contractor when the power is turned on for the testing of the electronic hardware applications. Installer shall make adjustments to solenoids, latches, vertical rods and closers to insure proper and secure operation.
J.
All wiring for electro-mechanical hardware mounted on the door shall be connected through the power transfer and terminated in the interface junction box specified for in the Electrical Section.
K. Conductors shall be minimum 18 gage stranded, multicolored. A minimum 12 in. loop of conductors shall be coiled in the interface junction box. Each conductor shall be permanently marked with its function. L. If a power supply is specified in the hardware sets, all conductors shall be terminated in the power supply. Make all connections required for proper operation between the power supply and the electro-mechanical hardware. Provide the proper size conductors as specified in the manufacturer’s technical documentation. 3.3
ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 page 9 of 12
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
B. Clean adjacent surface soiled by hardware installation. C. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy, return to that work area and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. D. Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware. E. Continued Maintenance Service: Approximately six months after the completion of the project, the Contractor accompanied by the Architectural Hardware Consultant, shall return to the project and re-adjust every item of hardware to restore proper functions of doors and hardware. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. Replace hardware items which have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials or installation of hardware units. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware. 3.4
HARDWARE LOCATIONS A. Conform to CCR, Title 24, Part 2; and ADAAG; and the drawings for access-compliant positioning requirements for the disabled.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Hardware supplier is responsible for providing the services of an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) or a proprietary product technician to inspect installation and certify that hardware and its installation have been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions and as specified herein.
3.6
SCHEDULE A. The items listed in the following schedule shall conform to the requirements of the foregoing specifications. B. The Door Schedule on the Drawings indicates which hardware set is used with each door. Manufacturers Abbreviations (Mfr.) IVE
=
Ives
LCN NGP SCH
= = =
LCN National Guard Products Schlage Lock Company
Hinges, Bolts, Coordinators, Dust Proof Strikes, Kick Plates, Door Stops & Silencers Door Closers Thresholds, Gasketing & Weather-stripping Locks, Latches & Cylinders
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 01 QTY 3 EA 1 EA AC Transit Oakland, CA
DESCRIPTION HW HINGE STOREROOM LOCK
CATALOG NUMBER 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP LV9080P 17A
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 page 10 of 12
FINISH 619 619
MFR IVE SCH
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
1
EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211 FSE 630 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E 619 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 FC 689 SEALS 5050CL CLR 1 SET CARD READER, DOOR CONTACT & WIRING FURNISHED BY ACCESS CONTROL SUPPLIER
VON IVE LCN NGP
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 02 QTY 3 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA
DESCRIPTION HINGE STOREROOM LOCK ELECTRIC STRIKE WALL STOP
CATALOG NUMBER 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 L9080P 17A 6211AL FSE WS401CCV USE FLOOR STOP @ DOOR 5
FINISH 646 619 630 619
MFR IVE SCH VON IVE
CARD READER, DOOR CONTACT & WIRING FURNISHED BY ACCESS CONTROL SUPPLIER GASKETING FURNISHED WITH ALUMINUM FRAME ASSEMBLY
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 03 QTY 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA
DESCRIPTION HINGE CLASSROOM LOCK WALL STOP
CATALOG NUMBER 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 L9070P 17A WS401CCV
FINISH 646 619 619
MFR IVE SCH IVE
FINISH 646 619 689 619 619
MFR IVE SCH LCN IVE IVE
FINISH 646 619 619 626
MFR IVE SCH IVE IVE
GASKETING FURNISHED WITH ALUMINUM FRAME ASSEMBLY
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 04 QTY 3 1 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA EA
DESCRIPTION HINGE PRIVACY LOCK SURFACE CLOSER KICK PLATE WALL STOP
CATALOG NUMBER 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 L9040 17A L583-363 L283-722 1461 FC 8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E WS401CCV
GASKETING FURNISHED WITH ALUMINUM FRAME ASSEMBLY
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 05 QTY 3 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA
DESCRIPTION HINGE STOREROOM LOCK KICK PLATE FLOOR STOP
CATALOG NUMBER 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 L9080P 17A 8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E FS410
GASKETING FURNISHED WITH ALUMINUM FRAME ASSEMBLY
AC Transit Oakland, CA
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 page 11 of 12
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 page 12 of 12
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING
PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
B.
1.2
Section Includes: 1.
Glass , and glazing for sections referencing this Section for products and installation.
2.
Insulated glass and glazing as indicated on the Drawings.
Related Sections: 1.
Section 081400 – Wood Doors
2.
Section 084313 – Aluminum-Framed Storefront
REFERENCES A.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1.
B.
C.
ASTM, International (ASTM): 1.
ASTM C920
Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
2.
ASTM C1036
Specification for Flat Glass
3.
ASTM C1172
Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass
4.
ASTM E84
Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
5.
ASTM E330 Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
California Code of Regulations (CCR): 1.
D.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
CCR Title 24, Part 2
California Building Code (CBC)
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR): 1.
E.
ANSI Z97.1 Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used in Buildings
16 CFR 1201 Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC); Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials
Glass Association of North America (GANA): 1.
GANA Glazing Manual.
2.
GANA Sealant Manual.
GLAZING 08 80 00 page 1 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.3
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of glass as calculated in accordance with CBC to a design pressure of 20 PSF as measured in accordance with ASTM E 330.
B.
Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glazing with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less.
C.
Glass glazing shall meet requirements of CBC Section 2406(b) and indicate safety glazing class.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data on Glass Types Specified: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements, and where published, MSDSs.
B.
Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors.
C.
Samples: Submit duplicate samples of the following:
D. 1.5
1.
Glass: 8 x 8 inch minimum size, illustrating color, clarity, and finish.
2.
Insulated Glass Units: Manufacturer’s standard unit sample illustrating both lites and all coatings in proper location and color.
3.
Glazing Sealants: 6 inch long bead in each color proposed.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special precautions required.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and GANA Sealant Manual installation methods.
B.
Regulatory Requirements: 1.
Comply with requirements of CBC Chapter 24. a. b.
2.
C.
1.6
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Identification: Label glass in accordance with CBC Sections 2402a and 2406. Glazing Subject to Human Impact: Comply with CBC Section 2406.
Glazing in Fire Rated Doors and Fames: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class indicated on schedule on Drawings when tested in accordance with California Reference Standard 12-7-4;and pass positive-pressure test standards.
Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulated glass units permanently marked with appropriate label of IGCC.
WARRANTY
AC Transit Oakland, CA
GLAZING 08 80 00 page 2 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation A.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Provide five year limited warranty against abrasion, coating failure, loss of vacuum seal, and breakage due to improper installation.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1
2.2
2.3
MANUFACTURERS A.
Basis of Design - Glass: PPG Industries and Nippon Glass.
B.
Comparable products of Libby-Owens-Ford, Viracon, or approved equal meeting visual and performance criteria set by basis of design will be considered under provisions for substitution requests.
GLAZING PANELS A.
Glass Type 1 (Float glass, clear): ASTM C1036, Type 1, clear flat, double strength glass, glazing quality q3, 1/4 inch thick.
B.
Glass Type 2 (Laminated glass, gray): ASTM C1172, Kind LA, with glass conforming to ASTM C1036, Type 1, Class 1, Quality q3, edges ground smooth, with two layers of 1/8 inch thick glass, laminated with a 0.030 inch thick clear poly-vinyl butyl (PVB) interlayer conforming to ANSI Z97.1. tinted gray.
C.
Glass Type 3 (Tempered glass, clear): ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Type I, Class 1 (clear), Form 3; Quality-q6, and tempered; ¼ inch thick.
D.
Glass Type 4 (Laminated glass, clear): ASTM C1172, Kind LA, with glass conforming to ASTM C1036, Type 1, Class 1, Quality q3, edges ground smooth, with two layers of 1/8 inch thick glass, laminated with a 0.030 inch thick clear poly-vinyl butyl (PVB) interlayer conforming to ANSI Z97.1. clear.
INSULATED GLASS UNITS
A.
Interior Insulated Acoustic Glazing Unit Type A: Two 1/4 inch glass units with 1/2 inch air space; clear. Over all thickness 1 1/8inch 1.
PPG Industries
2.
Outdoor Lite: laminated glass -clear
3.
Indoor Lite: tempered clear - glass Performance Values: a. b.
B.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Visible Light Transmission: STC rating
90 percent 39
Interior Insulated Acoustic Glazing Unit Type B: Two 1/4 inch glass units with 1/2 inch air space; clear. Over all thickness 1 1/8inch 1.
PPG Industries
2.
Outdoor Lite: laminated glass -gray
3.
Indoor Lite: tempered clear - glass Performance Values:
GLAZING 08 80 00 page 3 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation a. b.
2.4
2.5
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Visible Light Transmission: STC rating
90 percent 39
GLAZING COMPOUNDS A.
Sealant: ASTM C920, silicone type, as recommended by glazing manufacturer.
B.
Glazing compounds and accessories shall be compatible with sealants and paints used in conjunction with window trim.
GLAZING ACCESSORIES A.
Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound, 10-15 Shore A durometer hardness, coiled on release paper, black color; Percora “D-55”, or approved equal.
B.
Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80-90 Shore A durometer hardness, length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch long x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.
C.
Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50-60 Shore A durometer hardness, 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face.
D.
Glazing Splines: Polyvinyl chloride, extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; black color.
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION A.
Coordination: Coordinate the work with other directly affected Sections involving manufacturer or fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware.
B.
Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance as recommended by glazing manufacturer. Verify that rabbet depth and expansion allowances are in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
C.
Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to receive sealant.
D.
Verify that doors and framing are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
SITE CONDITIONS A.
Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.
B.
Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds.
C.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop Drawings.
D.
Coordinate the Work with glazing frames, wall openings, and perimeter air and vapor seal in adjacent Work.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
GLAZING 08 80 00 page 4 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
PREPARATION A.
Comply with GANA “Glazing Manual” and manufacturer’s printed instructions.
B.
Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe clean.
C.
Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
D.
Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
EXTERIOR DRY METHOD (PREFORMED GLAZING CHANNEL) A.
Cut glazing channel to proper length and install on glass pane. Seal corners by butting channel and sealing joint with sealant.
B.
Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.
C.
Rest glazing on setting blocks, and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full contact.
D.
Install removable stops, without displacement of glazing channel. Exert pressure for full continuous contact.
INTERIOR/EXTERIOR - WET/DRY METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT) A.
Cut glazing tape to length and install against permanent stops projecting 1/16 inch above sight line.
B.
Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.
C.
Rest glazing on setting blocks, and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full contact.
D.
Install removable stops, with spacer shims inserted between glazing and applied stops at 24 inch intervals, 1/4 inch below sight line.
E.
Fill gaps between pane and applied stop with sealant to depth equal to bite on glazing, to uniform and level line.
F.
Trim protruding tape edge.
PROTECTION OF FINISHED SURFACES A.
3.7
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
After installation, mark pane with an "X" by using removable plastic tape or paste.
CLEANING A.
Remove glazing materials and labels from finish surface.
B.
Clean glass.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
GLAZING 08 80 00 page 5 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
AC Transit Oakland, CA
GLAZING 08 80 00 page 6 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
SECTION 09 26 00 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: Provide gypsum board systems including gypsum board, abuse resistant board, suspension system for gypsum board systems, joint treatment, acoustical insulation accessories, and general accessories for complete installation.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
Section 079219: Acoustic Sealants
2.
Section 093100: Thinset Tiling: Cementitious backer unit substrates.
REFERENCES A.
ASTM C754: Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water-Resistant Backing Board.
B.
ASTM C840: Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.
Performance Requirements: Perform gypsum board systems work in accordance with recommendations of ASTM C754 and ASTM C840 unless otherwise specified. 1.
Loads: Comply with California Building Code requirements for design of metal framing for gypsum board systems. a.
2.
1.4
Deflection: Maximum L/240 typical, L/360 where plaster or tile is indicated.
Seismic Requirements: Comply with code requirements for seismic bracing.
B.
Systems Responsibility: Provide products manufactured by or recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board to maintain single-source responsibility for system.
C.
Openings: Obtain dimensions and locations from other trades and provide openings and enclosures for accessories, specialties, equipment, and ductwork. All penetrations to be sealed for acoustical separation of spaces.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for framing, insulation, gypsum board, and acoustical accessories.
B.
Manufacturer’s Certification: Furnish manufacturer's certification indicating products comply with Contract Documents and applicable codes.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 26 00 page 1 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.6
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
LEED Experience: Subcontractors and suppliers to have not less than two years experience in identifiable LEED certified projects or shall have verified LEED training.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Do not begin installation of interior gypsum board until space is enclosed, space is not exposed to other sources of water, and space is free of standing water.
B.
Maintain areas to receive gypsum board at minimum 50 degree F for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after application until drying of joint compound is complete; comply with ASTM C840.
C.
Immediately remove from site gypsum board for interior use exposed to water, including gypsum board with water stains, with signs of mold, and gypsum board with mildew.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
2.2
MANUFACTURERS A.
United States Gypsum Co., USG Corp.
B.
Georgia-Pacific Corp.
C.
National Gypsum Co.
D.
Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.
MATERIALS A.
Framing Materials: Comply with ASTM C754, including cold formed metal framing and light gage metal framing; where not otherwise indicated, provide gages as recommended by manufacturer for spans and loads indicated and as required by applicable codes. 1.
Studs: ASTM C645, screw-type Cee-shaped. a.
2.
Runners: Match studs.
3.
Furring Members: ASTM C645, screw-type, hat-shaped. a.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Shaft Walls: Cee-T or Cee-H shaped studs.
Sound Rated Assemblies: Provide resilient channels where indicated and where required to provide required sound transmission classifications.
4.
Channels: ASTM C754.
5.
Hangers: ASTM A641, Class 1 wire not less than sizes in Table No. 5 of ASTM C754 and as required by applicable codes; hanger rods, flat hangers, and angle-type hangers as required.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 26 00 page 2 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
B.
C.
6.
Suspension System: ASTM C635, suspension system composed of main beams and cross furring members interlocking to form supporting network; recommended by gypsum board system manufacturer.
7.
Fasteners and Anchorages: As recommended by gypsum board system manufacturer.
Gypsum Board: Comply with ASTM C840; maximum permissible lengths; ends square cut, tapered edges on boards to be finished. 1.
Typical: ASTM C1396, Type X, 5/8 inch, fire rated gypsum board, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
First Layer at Double Layer Applications: ASTM C1396 or ASTM C442, Type X, 5/8 inch, fire rated gypsum backing board.
3.
Tile Substrates: Cementitious backer units specified in Section 09300 - Tile.
Gypsum Board Accessories: Comply with ASTM C840. 1.
Provide protective coated steel corner beads and edge trim; type designed to be concealed in finished construction by tape and joint compound.
2.
Corner Beads: Manufacturer's standard metal beads.
3.
Edge Trim: “J”, "L", "LK", or "LC" casing beads.
4.
Reinforcing Tape, Joint Compound, Adhesive, Water, Fasteners: Types recommended by system manufacturer and conforming to ASTM C475. a.
5.
Back control joints with 4 mil thick polyethylene air seal.
Acoustical Accessories: 1.
Acoustical Insulation: Preformed mineral fiber, ASTM C665, Type I; friction fit type without integral vapor barrier; as required to meet STC ratings indicated, or of thickness indicated.
2.
Acoustical Sealant: ASTM C919, type recommended for use in conjunction with gypsum board. a.
3.
Type: Paintable, non-shrinking and non-cracking where exposed, nondrying, nonskinning, nonstaining, and nonbleeding where concealed.
Electrical Box Pads: Provide at outlet, switch and telephone boxes in walls with acoustical insulation. a.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Typical Joint Compound: Chemical hardening type for bedding and filling, ready-mixed or powder vinyl type for topping.
Control Joints: Back to back casing beads. a.
D.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Manufacturers for Non-Fire Rated Partitions: 1) Harry A. Lowry & Associates (800.772.2521)/Lowry's Electrical Box Pads. 2) Tremco Sheet Caulking (650.572.1656). GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 26 00 page 3 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
b.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
3) Fire rated partition material manufacturers. 4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630. Manufacturers for Fire Rated Partitions: 1) Hevi-Duty Nelson (800.331.7325)/Fire Rated FSP Firestop Putty Pads. 2) Specified Technologies, Inc. (800.992.1180)/Fire Putty Pads. 3) Hilti, Corp./Hilti Box Pads. 4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.
E.
Recycled Content: Where available provide materials with post-consumer and preconsumer recycled content.
F.
Regionally Manufactured, Extracted, Harvested, or Recovered Materials: Where possible obtain materials obtained within 500 miles of Project.
G.
Comply with CBC Green building Standards for Volatile Organic Compounds (TVOC) and Toxic Substances: Provide materials within set limits for volatile organic compound emissions and toxic substances such as urea-formaldehyde.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
B.
Metal Framing Erection: Erect metal framing in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's recommendations. 1.
Install members true to lines and levels to provide surface flatness with maximum variation of 1/8" in 10'-0" in any direction.
2.
Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs; install runners on each side of opening at frame head height between jamb studs and adjacent studs.
3.
Install metal framing backing where required for support of fixtures, cabinets, accessories and hardware.
4.
Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical work which is to be placed in or behind partition framing; allow items to be installed after framing is complete.
Ceiling Framing Installation: Erect in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's recommendations. 1.
Coordinate location of hangers with other work; provide trapeze supports and steel bracing as required to support ceiling.
2.
Install ceiling furring independent of walls, columns, and above-ceiling work.
3.
Space main carrying channels at maximum 48" on center, not more than 6" from perimeter walls. a.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Lap splices minimum 12" and secure together 2" from each end of splice.
4.
Place furring channels perpendicular to carrying channels at maximum 24" on center and not more than 2" from perimeter walls.
5.
Lap splices minimum 8" and secure together 2" from each end of splice. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 26 00 page 4 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
C.
6.
Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing; extend bracing minimum 24" past each end of openings.
7.
Laterally brace entire suspension system.
Gypsum Board Installation: Install in accordance with ASTM C840 and manufacturer's recommendations. 1.
Use screws when fastening gypsum board to furring and to framing.
2.
Erect gypsum board with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. a.
3.
Provide where system abuts structural elements. Provide at dissimilar materials. Lengths exceeding 30'-0" in partitions. Ceiling areas exceeding 50'-0" or 2500 square feet. Wings of "L", "U" and "T" shaped ceilings.
4.
Place corner beads at external corners; use longest practical lengths.
5.
Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.
6.
Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, corners and openings to produce surface ready to receive finishes; feather coats onto adjoining surfaces.
7.
Finishing: Comply with Gypsum Association (GA) “Levels of Gypsum Board Finish”. a.
b.
8.
GA Level 4 (Typical): Provide three coat finishing and sanding is required for surfaces indicated to be painted; provide flush, smooth joints and surfaces ready for applied paint finishes. Finish fiberock panels to one coat finish with light sanding and primer per manufacturer’s recommendations.
Remove and replace defective work.
Acoustical Accessories Installation: 1.
Place acoustical insulation tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.
2.
Place acoustical sealant within partitions in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; install acoustical sealant at gypsum board perimeter at: a. b. c.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Ensure joints of second layer do not occur over joints of first layer in double layer applications.
Place control joints to be consistent with lines of building spaces and as directed by Architect. a. b. c. d. e.
D.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Metal Framing: One or two beads. Base layer and face layer. Penetrations of partitions.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 26 00 page 5 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
3.
Tolerance: Maximum 1/4" space between gypsum board at floor, ceiling, and penetrations.
4.
Install electrical box pads with pads molded and pressed on back side of box, closing openings, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, for complete acoustical barrier.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 26 00 page 6 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 SECTION 09 31 00 THIN-SET TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES A.
Glass mat gypsum backer boards.
B.
Interior wall and base tile installed using thinset method with epoxy grouted joints.
C.
Interior floor and base tile installed using thinset method with epoxy grouted joints.
D.
Joint sealer.
RELATED SECTIONS A.
Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing: Troweling of floor slab.
B.
Section 09 22 16 - Non-Structural Metal Framing: Wall framing.
C.
Section 09 26 00 - Gypsum Board: Gypsum board assemblies.
REFERENCES A.
B.
American National Standards Institute: 1.
ANSI A108.5 - Ceramic Tile Installed with Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
2.
ANSI A108.11 - Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units.
3.
ANSI A118.3 - Chemical-Resistant, Water Cleanable, Tile Setting and Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile Setting Adhesive.
4.
ANSI A118.4 - Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
5.
ANSI A118.6 - Ceramic Tile Grouts.
ASTM International: 1.
ASTM C627 - Methods of Evaluating Ceramic Floor Tile Installation Systems.
2.
ASTM C920 - Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
3.
ASTM C1028 - Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynomometer Pull Meter Method.
4.
ASTM C1178 - Specification for Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel.
C.
TCA (Tile Council of America) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
D.
TCA 137.1 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
THIN-SET TILING 09 31 00 page 1 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: Submit data and installation instructions for bond coats, grouts, grout releases and grout release removers, sealants and grout sealers.
B.
Samples: initial selection full color chart from tile manufacturer.
C.
Samples: verification samples 1.
Submit samples of each type and color of tile specified.
2.
Submit samples, minimum 3 inches long, of grout in each color specified.
3.
Submit samples illustrating full range of sealant colors available for Architect's selection.
4.
Submit samples, minimum 3 inches long, of stone threshold illustration profile, color and finish.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installation and Setting Materials: Conform to TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
B.
Tile: Conform to TCA 137.1.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.
Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.
B.
Deliver products and store products in their original unbroken cartons.
C.
Store tile in dry covered area.
EXTRA STOCK A.
Provide 1 carton of each type and color of tile used.
B.
Wrap and label identifying manufacturer, size, color, project name and areas installed.
C.
Deliver to District; obtain receipt.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
TILE MANUFACTURERS A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Porcelain Ceramic Tile: 1.
Ceramic Wall Tile: TCA 137.1. Basis of Design Dal tile or approved equal
2.
Ceramic Base Tile: TCA 137.1. Basis of Design Dal tile or approved equal
3.
Ceramic Floor Tile: TCA 137.1. Basis of Design Dal tile or approved equal
THIN-SET TILING 09 31 00 page 2 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 2.2
TILE MATERIALS A.
B.
2.3
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Porcelain Tile Floor: unpolished finish; Dal –Tile color body “Fabrique” 1.
Size: 12 inch x 12 inch x 3/8 inches
2.
Edge: Square
3.
Colors: as selected by Architect.
Porcelain Tile Wall: light polish finish, Dal Tile ColorBody “Fabrique” series. 1.
Size: 12inches x 24 inches x 3/8inches.
2.
Edge: Square.
3.
Colors as selected by Architect.
C.
Trim: Same type, color, thickness, and finish as adjacent tile. Provide bullnose cap at wainscot and open tile terminations.
D.
Bond (or Setting) Coat: ANSI A118.4, liquid latex Portland cement mortar; two component setting system, consisting of a flexible liquid latex and dry-set cementitious of type to suit application.
E.
Epoxy Tile Grout: ANSI A118.3; multi-component epoxy consisting of resin and hardener; water washable; minimum 7000 psi compressive strength; chemically resistant; formulated specially for use in commercial kitchens, toilet rooms and custodial areas.
ACCESSORIES A.
B.
C.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backer Boards: 1.
Boards: ASTM C1178; Type X noncombustible water-resistant gypsum core surfaced with embedded glass fiber mesh and water-resistant coating; 5/8 inch nominal thickness; Georgia-Pacific Dens-Shield or equal product substituted under provisions of Section 01 25 00.
2.
Fasteners: Bugle head screws recommended by backer board manufacturer; stainless steel or corrosion resistant finish; length sufficient to penetrate through second surface minimum 1/4 inch.
3.
Reinforcing Tape: Coated fiberglass mesh type recommended by backer board manufacturer.
Expansion Joints: 1.
Backing Material: Closed cell polyurethane foam; 2.7 pcf; approximately 20 percent thicker than width of expansion joint.
2.
Sealants: Joints Between Floor and Walls and at Door Frames: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Uses M and G; 1 part silicone; color to match grout.
Trim: Stainless steel, Schlutter “ Rondec-E ,” or approved equal, size as required to match tile thickness.
THIN-SET TILING 09 31 00 page 3 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine installed work of other trades to verify that such work is complete to point that work of this section may begin. Report deficiencies that will adversely affect work of this section to Architect.
B.
Concrete Slabs:
C.
3.2
3.3
1.
Verify that surfaces to receive thinset tile are level and plumb with maximum variation in surface not to exceed 1/8 inch in 10’-0” from required plane.
2.
Verify that no curing compounds have been used on areas to receive thinset tile.
3.
Verify that surfaces to receive thinset tile have been steel troweled and fine broom finished.
Coated Glass Mat, Water-Resistant Gypsum Board Backing: 1.
Verify that studs supporting backing are plumb, aligned and properly placed; verify that are spaced at 16 inches oc maximum.
2.
Verify that surfaces to receive thinset tile are level and plumb with maximum variation in surface not to exceed 1/8 inch in 8'-0” from required plane.
3.
Verify that joints in glass mat gypsum board backing have been treated with tape and bedding coat of joint compound with no finish coats. Verify that fasteners heads have been treated with 1 coat of joint compound.
4.
Verify that surfaces to receive glass mat backer boards are free from protruding nail and screw heads and other protrusions which deflect backer units.
D.
Ensure surfaces are clean and well cured.
E.
Do not begin installing tile until deficiencies are corrected.
INSTALLATION - GLASS MAT GYPSUM BACKER BOARD A.
Install glass mat gypsum backer units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
B.
Install backer units with ends and edges occurring over framing or solid blocking.
C.
Space panels 1/8 inches apart.
D.
Secure to framing with fasteners at 6 inches o.c.
E.
Tape joints, including corner joints, with fiberglass mesh tape embedded in tile bond coat.
INSTALLATION - TILE A.
Interior Floor Tile: 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Porcelain Floor Tile Over Slabs-on-Grade: Install interior ceramic floor tile with THIN-SET TILING 09 31 00 page 4 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
latex-Portland cement bond coat in accordance with TCA F113-07 and ANSI A108.5. 2.
3.4
Porcelain Floor Tile Over Raised Concrete Slabs: Install interior ceramic floor tile with latex Portland cement bond coat in accordance with TCA F113-07 and ANSI A108.5
B.
Interior Wall and Base Tile: Install interior wall tile over reinforced mortar bed on metal studs using latex-Portland cement mortar bond coat in accordance with TCA W245 and ANSI A108.5.
C.
Install expansion joints in accordance with TCA EJ171: 1.
Where tile abuts restraining surfaces such as curbs, pipes and door frames.
2.
To perimeter walls in rooms and spaces larger than 16 feet on a side.
3.
At 16 foot maximum spacing where expanse of interior or exterior tile exceed 12 feet in either direction.
D.
Place tile in accordance with patterns indicated on Drawings. Carefully plan tile layouts, ensure pattern is uninterrupted from one surface to the next and through door ways.
E.
Neatly cut tile around fixtures; accurately form corners, base, intersections and returns.
F.
Ensure tile joints are uniform in width, subject to normal variance in tolerance allowed in tile size; ensure joints are watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar or grout.
G.
Form internal wall angles square, external angles and exposed edges bullnosed unless otherwise directed. Provide coved base at wall-floor intersection unless otherwise directed.
H.
Sound tile after setting, remove and replace hollow sounding units.
GROUTING A.
B.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Apply grout release to unglazed tile in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations prior to applying grout. 1.
Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive grout release.
2.
Rake out high ridges of mortar from grout joints.
3.
Apply thin coat grout release to tile using sponge brush, short napped roller or paint pad; cover tiles thoroughly and allow to dry.
4.
Apply second coat grout release at right angles to first coat; allow to dry.
5.
Ensure grout is applied within 12 hours after second coat is thoroughly dry.
Mix and apply epoxy grout in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. 1.
Remove excess mortar and construction debris from tile joints.
2.
Wipe face of tile with slightly dampened sponge to remove dirt and dust. Ensure THIN-SET TILING 09 31 00 page 5 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
no standing water remains in joints. 3.
Mix epoxy grout components; add colored cementitious grout. Mix to smooth trowelable consistency; do not over mix.
4.
Remove mixed grout from container and place in small piles on floor to be grouted; place grout for wall bases on mortar boards on floor.
5.
Pack joints full of grout using stiff rubber float; ensure no voids are left during application.
6.
Remove excess grout by pulling grout float diagonally across grout lines. Avoid gouging joints while removing as much epoxy from tile surface as possible.
7.
Allow grout to set for approximately 15 minutes or until joints begin to firm prior to final clean-up; do not allow grout to set on face of tile. a.
b. c. d.
C.
3.5
3.6
Apply liberal amount of clean potable water to grouted wall; loosen epoxy film and smooth joint finish using abrasive pad recommended by grout manufacturer in circular motion. Pick up remaining residue with damp cotton towel or hydro sponge and clean water. Take care to avoid removing excess grout from joints while leaving surface of tile clean. If remaining film is noticed after final clean-up, allow joints to cure for approximately 2 hours and rinse grouted tile with clean water and hydro sponge.
As soon as possible after grout has sufficiently cured, remove remaining grout release residue using grout release remover in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 1.
Mix grout release remover with water in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
2.
Apply grout release remover solution liberally over small area. Allow solution to soak until grout release film becomes white; do not allow solution to dry.
3.
Scrub treated area with nylon stripping pad until grout release film is removed; rinse surface with clean water.
4.
Examine surface for residual traces of grout release film; repeat procedure if necessary to remove remaining traces.
CLEANING A.
Remove excess mortar, grout and sealer from tile and adjacent surfaces.
B.
Clean soiled surfaces.
PROTECTION A.
Prohibit traffic from cementitious grouted floor finish for 48 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION AC Transit Oakland, CA
THIN-SET TILING 09 31 00 page 6 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 SECTION 09 50 00 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Suspended metal grid ceiling system.
B.
Mineral fiber acoustical panels.
C.
Perimeter trim.
D.
Metal suspension system for Gypsum Board Ceilings.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 092600 – Gypsum Board Assemblies (for gypsum board on suspended ceiling)
B.
Division 21 Fire Suppression
C.
Division 23 – HVAC and Fire Protection Sections (for air diffusion and fire protection devices in ceiling)
D.
Division 26 – Electrical Sections (for light fixtures and fire alarm smoke detectors)
1.03 A.
B.
REFERENCES ASTM, International (ASTM): 1.
ASTM A568
2. 3.
ASTM A641 ASTM C635
4.
ASTM C636
5.
ASTM C754
6. 7. 8.
ASTM E84 ASTM E1264 CISCA
California Code of Regulations (CCR): 1. 2.
1.04 A.
General Requirements for Steel, Carbon and High-Strength LowAlloy Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled Sheet. Specification for Zinc Coated Galvanized Steel Wire. Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels. Specifications for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypusm Boards Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. Classification of Acoustical Ceiling Products. Ceiling Systems Installation Handbook.
CCR Title 24 UBC Standard 8-1
Part 2, California Building Code (CBC) Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics for Building Materials.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Locations of elements in suspended ceilings shall conform to locations shown on Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans. Conflicts with Mechanical or Electrical Drawings shall be promptly brought to the attention of the City Representative for resolution.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 50 00 page 1 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.05 A.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: 1.
2. 3.
Indicate complete reflected ceiling layout at 1/4 inch = 1’-0” scale with every element penetrating or contacting ceiling including, but not limited to, lighting fixtures, mechanical diffusers and registers, speakers, smoke detectors and ceiling mounted equipment and supports. Indicate general and atypical conditions and details. Include calculations where required, details of bracing, special featured and joints, perimeters, relationship to adjacent construction, anchorage and connections.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on metal grid system components, acoustic panels and vinyl faced gypsum lay-in panels.
C.
Samples: 1. 2.
D.
1.06 A.
Panels: Submit samples, minimum 6 x 6 inches in size, illustrating material, edge condition, and finish of each type panel. Suspension System: Submit samples, minimum 12 inches long, of suspension system main runner, cross runner, and edge trim.
Closeout Submittals: Include maintenance procedures and recommended maintenance materials for panel finishes. QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturers Qualifications: 1. 2.
Ceiling Suspension System: Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling suspension systems with minimum 5 years documented experience. Panels: Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling panels of types specified with minimum 5 years documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installation of suspended ceilings with minimum 3 years documented experience and approved by manufacturers.
C.
Regulatory Requirements: 1. 2.
1.07
Conform to CBC Section 804 for combustibility requirements for finish materials. Conform to CBC Chapter 16A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver products to site, store, handle and protect in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
B.
Deliver panels only after glazing has been completed, exterior openings are closed in and wet work is completed and dried.
C.
Deliver and store products in original packaging and containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use.
D.
Store products inside enclosed storage facilities or closed buildings and supported above grade and slabs-on-grade.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 50 00 page 2 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation E.
1.08
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Maintain storage spaces and products in dry condition and within temperature rage recommended by manufacturer. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Do not install suspended acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed with temperature and humidity closely approximating conditions that will exist during occupancy for not less than 10 days.
B.
Store acoustical panels within spaces in which they will be installed for at least 3 days prior to installation with cartons opened and stripped sufficiently to permit panels to stabilize to ambient conditions.
1.09
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate work of this section with installation of mechanical, electrical and other equipment, materials or work which could conflict with installation of suspended acoustical ceilings.
B.
Coordinate installation of hanger and bracing wires with installation of roof insulation over steel decks. Ensure reinforcing steel and hanger wires are installed prior to installation of roof insulation.
C.
Do not install acoustical ceilings until wet work and dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested and approved.
D.
Schedule installation of acoustic panels after interior wet work is dry.
1.10
EXTRA STOCK
A.
Deliver one carton of each type of panel used to City; obtain receipt.
B.
Wrap and label with name of material, project and areas installed.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01
SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTIC PANEL CEILINGS
A.
Basis of Design: USG Interiors, Inc.: Donn Brand Suspension Systems or approved equal.
B.
Grids: ASTM C635, heavy duty; double web with continuous exposed bottom flange; components die cut and interlocking; main tees with non-directional bayonet couplings; cross tees with stab-in end tabs; commercial quality cold rolled galvanized steel; baked enamel finish; 15/16 Inch Grid Face with steel cap; nonrated, white color; Donn DX: 1. 2.
Main Tees: 1-1/2 inch high; 12 foot length; DX26. Cross Tees: • •
C.
4-Foot Length: 1-1/2 inch high; DX424. 2-Foot Length: 1 inch high; DX216.
Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, splices and edge moldings required for suspended grid system; commercial quality cold rolled galvanized steel; enamel finish to match grid where exposed to view unless otherwise specified.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 50 00 page 3 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1. 2. 3. 4. D.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Edge Trim: Wall Moldings for 15/16 Grid Face with Steel Caps for Tapered Reveal Edge Panels: Equal leg wall angle; hemmed edged; 7/8 inch legs; Donn Wall Angle M7. Runner Splice: Equal leg wall angle; hemmed edges; minimum 7/8 inch legs; Donn Wall Angle M7. Slotted Angle Spacer Bars: Hemmed edges; slotted for rectangular bulb components; Chicago Metallic 826 and 828. Seismic Clip; Provide AMC7 seismic clip at perimeter of each Tee.
Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, to rigidly secure acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360. 1. 2.
Trapeze Framing: 12 gauge framing channel; 1-5/8 x 1-5/8 inch size; galvanized finish; P1000 as manufactured by Unistrut Corporation, or approved equal. Fasteners: a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3. 4.
Steel Decks without Concrete Fill: 12 inch length of No. 3 reinforcing steel. Steel Beams: • Clips: Bent steel plates; 13 gauge; right angle; minimum 3/4 inch wide; 5/16 inch diameter eye in vertical leg for hanger wire; hole in horizontal leg for shot in anchor with centerline not more than 5/8 inch from vertical leg; Hilti Corporation CC27 Ceiling Clips or equal product substituted under provisions of Section 01 25 00. • Fasteners: Powder-actuated fasteners; type specified above.
Bracing Wire Anchors: a.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Rivets: Blind pop rivets; steel body; steel mandrel; 1/8 inch diameter rivet; 1/4 inch head diameter domed head; 0.063 to 0.125 inch grip range; painted finish to match color of grid face.
Hanger and Bracing Wire: ASTM A641, Class 1 coating; mild steel; soft temper; galvanized coating; minimum 12 gauge. Hanger Wire Anchors: a. b.
5.
Screws: Self-drilling and self-tapping sheet metal screws; zinc plated steel; pan head or hex head with washer; point as required to drill 12 gauge stock; #10 x by length sufficient to penetrate through second surface minimum 1/4 inch unless otherwise indicated or specified. Expansion Anchors: FF S-325, Group II, Type 4, Class 1; stud type expansion anchor with single-piece three-section wedge; zinc plated steel; 3/8 inch diameter; length sufficient for minimum 1-5/8 inch embedment into concrete; Hilti Corporation “Kwik Bolt 3” Expansion Anchor, ITW Ramset/Red-head “Trubolt” Wedge Anchors or equal product substituted under provisions of Section 01 25 00. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Zinc plated steel; 0.145 diameter knurled shank; 7/8 inch length; plastic guide washer to accurately control penetration to minimum 3/4 inch; Hilti Corporation #EDNI22P8 or equal product substituted under provisions of Section 01 25 00. Machine Screws with Nuts: • Machine Screws: Hex head; fully threaded; 1/4 inch diameter size or as indicated on Drawings; length sufficient to penetrate through framing member minimum 1/2 inch. • Nuts: Hex; thread to match machine screws.
Steel Deck without Concrete Fill: ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 50 00 page 4 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation • •
b.
E.
2.
2.02
Clips: Custom bent steel angle plates with profile as required to set bracing wires at required angle; 12 gauge; minimum 3 inch wide x 4 inches long; 5/16 inch diameter eye in splayed leg for bracing wire. Fasteners: Self-drilling and self-tapping sheet metal screws; zinc plated steel; pan head or hex head with washer; point as required to drill 12 gauge stock; #8 x 1/2 inch; minimum 2 per clip.
Steel Beams: • Clips: Custom bent steel angle plates with profile as required to set bracing wires at required angle; 12 gauge; minimum 1 inch wide; 5/16 inch diameter eye in splayed leg for bracing wire; hole in horizontal leg for expansion anchor with centerline not more than 5/8 inch from angle break. • Fasteners: Powder-actuated fasteners; type specified above.
Compression Strut Assembly: 1.
F.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Vertical Members: Compression Struts: Hot or cold rolled metal studs; formed from steel complying with ASTM A653 with minimum 33,000 psi yield point; G60 galvanized finish; “Cee” shape; 20 gauge; 4 inch deep web; 1-5/8 inch flanges; 1/2 inch returns; minimum radius of gyration about y-axis of 0.104; 1/r ratio of 200 maximum; Dietrich CSJ 4 Inch CStuds or equal product substituted under provisions of Section 01 25 00. Clips: Custom bent steel angle bracket with right angle break; 12 gauge; dimensions as indicated on drawings.
Seismic Requirements: Provide components required for seismic restraint of suspended ceiling assembly in accordance with CBC Chapter 16A and other applicable codes. SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS
A.
Basis of Design: USG Drywall Suspension System – Commercial quality, cold-rolled steel, hot dipped galvanized finish.for flat ceilings, or approved equal.
B.
Grids: ASTM C635 heavy duty; double-web tee, hot dipped galvanized steel. 1. 2.
C.
Accessories: 1. 2. 3.
2.03 A.
Main Tees: 1-5/8” inch high; 12 foot length; DGL-26 15/16” face and 1-1/2” high. Cross Members: Cross Tees: DGLW-424 cross tee1-1/2” high x 48” long with 1-1/2” wide face; quick release cross tee ends for positive locking and removability without tools
Cross tees: (DGL-824 Non Fire-Rated 1-1/2” high x 96” long with 15/16” face). Wall Moldings: DGCM-27 144” x 1-5/8” x 1” x 1” channel molding Splice Clip: DGSC-180
MINERAL FIBER ACOUSTIC PANELS Panels: Panels with face routing; ASTM E1264, Type III, Form 1 or 2, Pattern G; USG Millennia ClimaPlus Illusion Two/24 Panels. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Size and Edge Detail: 24 x 48 Inches with Tapered Reveal Edge; Item #78780 with Shadowline Tapered edge detail. Thickness: 3/4 inch. Weight: 1.04 lbs/sq ft. Composition: Mineral fiber. Light Reflectance: 0.85. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 50 00 page 5 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
NRC: 0.70. Minimum CAC: 35. Surface Color: White. Surface Pattern: Smooth with 15/16 inch wide tapered routed reveal to simulate two 24 x 24 inch panels. Surface Finish: Vinyl latex paint. Flame Spread: Not to exceed 25 per UBC Standard 8-1. Smoke Developed: Not to exceed 25 per UBC Standard 8-1.
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work.
B.
Verify that installation of building components above ceiling is complete, inspected and approved.
C.
Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
D.
Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A.
Install grid members in accordance with ASTM C636, CISCA installation standards, and other applicable references..
B.
Install system according to Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plan and final reviewed shop drawings after major above ceiling work is complete.
C.
Coordinate location of hanger and bracing wires with other work. Separate hanger and bracing wires minimum 6 inches from unbraced ducts, pipes and conduits.
D.
Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to deflection of 1/360 maximum. 1. 2.
E.
Provide hanger wires at ends of main and cross runners within 8 inches from support or within 1/4 of length of end tee, whichever is least, for perimeter of ceiling area. Provide sets of 4 splayed bracing wires oriented 90 degrees to each other at spacing not more than 12 feet by 12 feet on center in field and not more than 6 feet by 6 feet from each perimeter wall and at edge of vertical ceiling offsets.
Install hanger and bracing wires taut without causing ceiling to lift. 1.
Install hanger and bracing wires so that direction of wire aligns as closely as possible with direction of forces acting on wire. a. b.
2.
Secure hanger wires to structure and to suspension system. a.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Install hanger wires plumb; provide counter sloping wires at hanger wires that are more than 1 in 6 out of plumb. Install bracing wires within 45 degrees of plane of ceiling.
Secure hanger wires to concrete filled steel decks with clips; secure clips to bottom of deck with powder-actuated fasteners. Thread hanger wire through eyes in clips; secure with 3 tight turns in 1-1/2 inches. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 50 00 page 6 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation b.
c.
d. e.
3.
b.
c.
d. e.
F.
Secure bracing wires to concrete filled steel decks with clips; secure clips to bottom of deck with expansion anchors. Thread bracing wires through eyes in clips; secure with 4 tight turns in 1-1/2 inches. Secure bracing wires steel decks without concrete fill by clips. Secure clips to sides of deck flutes with screws; provide two screws per clip. Thread bracing wires through eyes in clips; secure with 4 tight turns in 1-1/2 inches. Secure bracing wires to steel beams with clips; secure clips to bottom of lower flange with powder-actuated fasteners. Thread bracing wires through eyes in clips; secure with 4 tight turns in 1-1/2 inches. Secure bracing wires to open-web steel joists with double loop saddle ties; fasten with 4 tight turns in 1-1/2 inches. Ensure bracing wires are oriented parallel to joist. Secure bracing wires to suspension system by threading through eyes in runners and fastening with 4 tight turns in 1-1/2 inches.
Do not splice hanger or bracing wires.
Provide compression struts at each set of bracing wires to resist vertical component induced by bracing wires. 1. 2. 3.
G.
Secure hanger wires to steel decks without concrete fill by threading wire through hole in deck and wrapping reinforcing steel laid in flute of deck. Secure hanger wire to reinforcing steel with 3 wraps around reinforcing steel and 1 wrap around wire. Secure hanger wires to steel beams with clips; secure clips to bottom of lower flange with powder-actuated fasteners. Thread hanger wire through eyes in clips; secure with 3 tight turns in 1-1/2 inches. Secure hanger wires to open-web steel joists with double loop saddle ties; fasten with 3 tight turns in 1-1/2 inches. Secure hanger wires to suspension system by threading through eyes in runners and fastening with 3 tight turns in 1-1/2 inches.
Secure bracing wires to structure and to suspension system. a.
4.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Fasten clips to joists or decks without concrete fill with screws; provide minimum 2 screws per clip. Fasten struts to clips with machine bolts and nuts; provide minimum 2 bolts per strut. Fasten struts to main runners with machine bolts and nuts; provide minimum 2 bolts per strut.
Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. 1. 2.
Do not attach ceiling grid members to more than two adjacent walls. Separate ceiling grid members from other walls by 3/4 inch. At perimeter of ceiling area where main or cross runners are not connected to adjacent wall, provide seismic clip interconnection between runners at free end to prevent lateral spreading. Where perpendicular distance from wall to first parallel runner is 12 inches or less, this interlock is not required.
H.
Use carrying members using longest practical lengths; do not use scraps and short cut members. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face panel of adjacent members.
I.
Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers, provide trapeze framing or other supplementary support members. Provide additional hanger struts or braces as required at ceiling breaks, soffits, or discontinuous areas.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 50 00 page 7 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation J.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support components independently. 1.
2.
3.
Support flush or recessed light fixtures and air terminals or services weighing 56 pounds or more independently from grid by not less than 4 taut hanger wires attached to fixture, terminal or service and to structure above. Support flush or recessed light fixtures and air terminals or services weighing less than 56 pounds directly on runners and tees with slack safety wires attached at corners and anchored to structure above. At 4 x 4 light fixtures, provide four slack safety wires; one at each corner. For smaller light fixtures, air terminals or services, provide two slack safety wires at diagonal corners. Support surface mounted light fixtures by minimum 2 hanger wires attached to fixture connection devices and anchored to structure above.
K.
Do not eccentrically load system or produce rotation of runners.
L.
Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and junctions with other penetrations. 1. 2. 3.
M. 3.03
Using longest practical lengths; pieces shorter than 48 inches will not be permitted. Miter corners. Where round obstructions occur, provide preformed closers to match edge molding.
Level suspension system in each area after installation of mechanical and electrical equipment. INSTALLATION - PANELS
A.
Install ceiling panels in accordance with respective manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Fit panels in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function.
C.
Install panels level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents.
D.
Cut panels to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. 1.
2. 3.04 A. 3.05
Double cut exposed edges of panels with tapered reveal edges designated to be set in 15/16 inch face grids with equal leg wall angles. Cut to match edge profile; field paint to match panel color. Provide hold down clips for field cut panels.
ERECTION TOLERANCES Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field testing will be performed by District Testing Laboratory.
B.
District’s Testing Laboratory will test powder-actuated fasteners and expansion anchors for tension. 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
When used for hanger wires; 10 percent of anchors will be tested for minimum 200 pound. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 50 00 page 8 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 2. 3.06 A.
3.07 A.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
When used for bracing wires; 50 percent of anchors will be tested for 440 pounds.
ADJUSTING Remove damaged or soiled components and replace with new components prior to final acceptance of project. PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK Protect installed system from damage until final acceptance of project.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 50 00 page 9 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
AC Transit Oakland, CA
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 50 00 page 10 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 SECTION 09 65 16 LINOLEUM
PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Linoleum floor tile; full spread adhesive method installation
B.
Resilient base (for all flooring)
C.
Accessories
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 09 26 00 – Gypsum Board Assemblies (for wall materials to receive base)
B.
Section 09 68 13 – Tile Carpeting (termination edging of adjacent flooring)
1.03 A.
B.
REFERENCES ASTM, International (ASTM): 1.
ASTM D2047
2.
ASTM E84
3.
ASTM E648
4.
ASTM E662
5.
ASTM F137
6. 7. 8.
ASTM F970 ASTM F1861 ASTM F1869
9.
ASTM F2034
California Code of Regulations (CCR): 1.
C.
CCR Title 24, Part 2
California Building Code (CBC)
South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) 1.
1.04
Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Floor Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials Test Method for Flexibility of Resilient Flooring with Cylindrical Mandrel Apparatus Test Method for Static Load Limit Specification for Resilient Wall Base Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Specification for Linoleum Sheet Flooring
SCAQMD Rule 1168
Adhesive and Sealant Applications
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Indicate seam locations, method of joining seams, coving details and method of integrating edge and cove trim for sheet flooring.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on each type of floor material, base, edge strip, cove trim and stick, subfloor filler, primer, adhesive, detergent and polish used describing physical characteristics.
C.
Samples: Submit duplicate samples of the following:
AC Transit Oakland, CA
LINOLEUM 09 65 16 page 1 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.
Linoleum Sheet Flooring: a. b.
2.
For Selection: Full range of colors available for Architect selection. For Verification: Minimum 8 x 8 inch size, illustrating gauges, colors and patterns selected by Architect.
Resilient Base: a. b.
3.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
For Selection: Full range of colors available for Architect selection. For Verification: Minimum 3 inches long, illustrating profiles and colors selected by Architect.
Resilient Edge Strips and Cove Trim: a. b.
For Selection: Full range of colors available for Architect selection. For Verification: Minimum 3 inches long illustrating profiles and colors selected by Architect.
D.
Test Reports: Submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
E.
Manufacturer’s Certificates:
F.
1.05
1.
Products: Submit signed certificates attesting that materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and with physical requirements.
2.
Installers: Submit signed certificates attesting that installers are qualified and approved to install products.
Operation and Maintenance Data 1.
Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping and re-waxing.
2.
Include precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of commercial resilient flooring of type specified with minimum 10 years documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installation of commercial resilient flooring of type specified with minimum 5 years documented experience and certified by manufacturer.
C.
Regulatory Requirements: 1.
Conform to and comply with CBC Chapter 8 for flame/fuel/smoke rating requirement in accordance with ASTM E84.
2.
Conform to and comply with CBC Section 1120B.2 for slip resistance. Coefficient of friction for polished floor shall not be less than 0.05 when tested in accordance with ASTM D2047.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
LINOLEUM 09 65 16 page 2 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
1.06
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver products to site, store, handle and protect in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.
B.
Deliver materials in their original packages with seals unbroken and with manufacturer's name and product identification clearly visible.
C.
Deliver materials sufficiently in advance of installation to condition materials to room temperature prior to installation.
D.
Store packaged materials in original packaging with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of installation.
E.
Store materials in protected area. Keep materials dry. Maintain temperature between 40 and 100 degrees F.
1.07
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Areas to receive flooring shall be clean, fully enclosed, weathertight with permanent HVAC system set at uniform temperature of at least 68 degrees F.
B.
Store materials for minimum 72 hours prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability.
C.
Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer 72 hours prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials.
1.08 A. 1.09
FIELD MEASUREMENTS Verify actual dimensions and opening locations by field measurements prior to fabrication. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Do not install resilient flooring until finishing operations including painting and ceiling installation are complete.
B.
Do not install resilient flooring over concrete substrates until substrates are cured and are dry to bond adhesives as determined by bond, moisture and pH tests.
1.10 A.
1.11
WARRANTY Manufacturer's Warranty: Warrant linoleum flooring to be free from manufacturing defects for period of five years from date of Substantial Completion. EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Provide additional maintenance materials from same production runs as products installed.
B.
Linoleum Sheet Flooring: Furnish quantity equivalent to 5 percent of amount installed for each type and color of flooring used.
C.
Resilient Base: Furnish quantity equivalent to 5 percent of amount installed for each type and color of resilient base used. Furnish in maximum contiguous length units.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
LINOLEUM 09 65 16 page 3 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
D.
Edge Strips: Furnish quantity equivalent to 5 percent of amount installed for each type of edge strip used. Furnish in maximum unit lengths.
E.
Wrap and clearly identify each box or roll. Deliver to the District and obtain receipt.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01
LINOLEUM TILE FLOORING
A.
Linoleum Tile: ASTM F2195 Type I; homogeneous floor covering composed of linseed oil, wood flour, rosin binders, limestone, and dry pigments mixed and calendered onto polyester backing; color and pattern extending throughout total thickness of material; factory coated with crosslinked primer and water-based protective topcoat (“Topshield”); 2.0 mm thick; approximate size 13 x 13 inches; Forbo Linoleum, Inc.: “Marmoleum MCT” composition tile; colors scheduled on the Drawings.
B.
Properties:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.02 A.
2.03 A.
PROPERTY
TEST METHOD
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
Critical Radiant Flux Smoke Density Static Load Limit Slip Resistance Flexibility
ASTM E648 ASTM E662 ASTM F970 ASTM D2047 ASTM F137
Class 1 450 or less 1,500 psi >0.60 No cracking or breaking when bent around a 1.4 inch diameter cylinder
RESILIENT BASE Wall Base: ASTM F1861 Type TP, Group 1 extruded thermoplastic rubber;coved profile, 1/8 inch thick, 4 inches high, 120 foot coiled length; Johnsonite “Duracove” or approved equal; colors scheduled on the Drawings. ACCESSORIES Edge Strips: Homogeneous composition of polyvinyl chloride, additives and colorants; minimum 85 Shore A hardness; static coefficient of friction not less than 0.6; Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45 W/sq cm or greater in accordance with ASTM E648; smoke developed rating of 450 or less in accordance with ASTM E662; Johnsonite or approved equal; color scheduled on Drawings. 1. 2.
Ceramic Tile to Linoleum: One-piece wheeled traffic transition for 3/8 inch (tile) to 1/8 inch (linoleum); 2-1/2 inches wide x 12 feet long; Johnsonite #CTA-XX-K. Linoleum to Exposed Concrete: One-piece transition for 1/16 or 1/8 inch (linoleum) to floor; 1-5/8 inches wide x 12 feet long; Johnsonite #SSR-XX-B.
B.
Subfloor Filler: Portland cement based types containing not more than 7 percent gypsum, recommended by adhesive material manufacturers for commercial installation.
C.
Adhesives: 1. 2.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
All adhesives shall meet or exceed the VOC limits of SCAQMD Rule 1168, and shall be free of urea-formaldehyde resins.comply with CBC Greenbuilding Standards limitation of VOC content for adhesives not to exceed 50 grams Per Liter. Flooring: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring manufacturer for commercial installations; Forbo “T940” typically, Forbo “660” in areas prone to rolling carts or topical moisture. LINOLEUM 09 65 16 page 4 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 3. 4.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Rubber Base and Edge Trim: Water-resistant type recommended by base manufacturer for commercial installations for specific base type and substrate material. Detergents and Polishes: Types recommended by flooring manufacturers for specific material.
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine condition of substrates to determine acceptability for installation.
B.
Verify that substrates are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.
C.
Verify that no curing, hardening or bond breaking compounds have been applied to substrate. Do not proceed with installation until existing compounds have been removed.
D.
Concrete Flatness Tolerance: Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 3/16 inch in 10 feet and are ready to receive work.
E.
Concrete Moisture Tests: 1.
Calcium Chloride Tests: a. b. c.
2.
F.
Humidity and Moisture Vapor Emission Tests: Verify internal relative humidity of the concrete is not more than 75 percent in accordance with ASTM F2170 and the moisture vapor emissions are less than 5 lb/1,000 SF in 24 hours for “Forbo T960” adhesive, and not more than 3 lb for “Forbo 660” adhesive. If test results indicate moisture emission exceeds amount recommended by flooring manufacturer, do not proceed with flooring installation until corrective action has been completed.
Concrete pH Test: 1. 2.
G.
Verify that concrete slabs are dry by conducting calcium chloride tests in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM F1869. Conduct minimum one calcium chloride test for every 1,000 square feet of flooring or portion thereof, around perimeter, at columns and where moisture is present. Prepare diagram of area or room showing location and results of each test.
Verify that concrete slabs exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization and dusting Perform pH tests on concrete slabs. If pH is greater than 10, neutralize slab prior to beginning installation.
Adhesive Bonding Tests: Verify that adhesives are compatible with substrates by conducting adhesive bond tests for each resilient tile adhesive, resilient sheet flooring adhesive and resilient base adhesive in each major area prior to installation. 1. 2.
Examine after 72 hours to determine whether bond is solid and no moisture is present. Do not proceed with installation until results of bond tests are acceptable.
H.
If moisture migration and/or alkalinity levels exceed specified limits, provide an inhibitor coating at no additional cost to the District. Refer to Section 07 26 95 for approved inhibitor coating.
I.
Verify that temperatures of products and substrates are within manufacturers’ recommended tolerances.
J.
Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
LINOLEUM 09 65 16 page 5 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 3.02
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
PREPARATION
A.
Clean floors of dust, dirt, solvents, oil, grease, paint, plaster and other substances detrimental to proper performance of adhesive and resilient flooring. Allow floors to dry thoroughly.
B.
Remove subfloor ridges and bumps.
C.
Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes and other defects in concrete slabs with subfloor filler.
D.
Apply, trowel and float filler to leave smooth, flat, hard surface.
E.
Prohibit traffic from area until filler is cured.
F.
Vacuum clean substrate.
G.
Allow coiled wall base to lay flat for minimum 24 hours at a minimum temperature of 70 degrees F prior to installation.
3.03
INSTALLATION - LINOLEUM TILE FLOORING
A.
Install linoleum tile flooring in accordance with final approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
B.
Spread adhesive per tile manufacturer’s instructions.
C.
Lay flooring to patterns selected by Architect. Do not lay tiles less than one-third full width.
D.
Set flooring in place in wet adhesive, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.
E.
Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar.
F.
Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges and where flooring terminates.
G.
Use full length pieces.
H.
Center under door where flooring terminates at door openings not designated to receive thresholds.
I.
Fit ends to door frames and abutting surfaces. Fit edges to adjoining materials.
J.
Secure in place with adhesive. Bond securely to substrate in straight true lines.
K.
Scribe flooring to existing flooring, walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints.
3.04
INSTALLATION - BASE MATERIALS
A.
Install wall base materials in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations.
B.
Fit joints tight and vertical. Use maximum lengths possible; maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints.
C.
Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.
D.
Install base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall surfaces.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
LINOLEUM 09 65 16 page 6 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
E.
Apply adhesive to wall base in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Leave 1/4 inch uncovered space at top of wall base.
F.
Position base on wall surface and roll with hand roller to ensure adhesive transfer and good fit. Roll back to starting point to prevent stretching of base.
G.
Field cut outside corners on wall base.
H.
Stop application of adhesive approximately 18 inches from outside corner of wall.
I.
Position base on corner and mark location on back of base where bend should occur.
J.
Lay base on standard base floor with back up; make notch approximately 1/4 thickness of base with gouge tool along mark on back of base. Miter cut contoured base using compound miter saw.
K.
Glue mitered corners of contoured base together with contact cement.
L.
Reposition base on wall and check fit; apply adhesive and install.
M.
Miter inside corners of wall base. Miter cut contoured base using compound miter saw.
N.
Glue mitered corners of contoured base together with contact cement.
O.
Install wall base terminating in corner.
P.
Position meeting piece of wall base on opposing wall without adhesive; scribe to adhered piece.
A.
Cut meeting piece to pattern, apply adhesive and install.
3.05 A.
3.06
ADJUSTING Prior to final acceptance, remove and replace scratched or damaged tile, sheet flooring, edge strips and base. CLEANING
A.
Remove excess adhesive from floor, base and wall surfaces without damage.
B.
Clean, seal and polish floor surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for initial maintenance and preparation for commercial use. Ensure slip resistance of polished surfaces is not less than specified.
C.
Linoleum Tile Flooring: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
3.07
Do not scrub floor for minimum of five days after installation. Remove surface soil, debris and grit by sweeping, vacuuming or dust mopping. After five days, scrub floor using neutral detergent. Apply cleaning solution with mop and bucket. Allow solution to remain on floor; scrub with rotary electric scrubber or automatic scrubber with non-abrasive pad. Do not oversaturate floor. Pick-up scrubbing solution with wet vacuum. Rinse entire floor surface with clean cool water; allow to thoroughly dry. Spray buff with spray buff solution; dry buff with non-abrasive pad.
PROTECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
LINOLEUM 09 65 16 page 7 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
A.
Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation.
B.
Where construction must be continued on top of floor, leave floor undisturbed for 48 hours then cover floor with paper, plywood, plastic or combination these materials to prevent damage and staining.
END OF SECTION 09 65 16
AC Transit Oakland, CA
LINOLEUM 09 65 16 page 8 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
SECTION 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section includes modular anti static carpet tile that fits the access flooring system.
B.
Related Requirements: 1.
1.3
Section 096516 "Linoleum" (for resilient base)
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
B.
C.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Product Data: For each type of product. 1.
Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance.
2.
Include manufacturer's written installation recommendations for each type of substrate.
3.
Test results from an independent testing laboratory showing compliance with performance criteria listed here-in.
Sustainable Design Submittals: 1.
Adhesives to meet VOC limitation of not exceeding 50 grams per Liter.
2.
Meet requirements of the Carpet and Rug Institute’s Green Label Plus Program
Shop Drawings: For carpet tile installation, plans showing the following: 1.
Doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles.
2.
Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot.
3.
Type of subfloor.
4.
Type of installation.
5.
Pattern type, location, and direction.
6.
Pile direction.
TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 page 1 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 7. D.
E.
1.4
1.5
1.
Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample.
2.
Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- long Samples.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of carpet tile. Include Samples of exposed edge, transition, and other accessory stripping involving color or finish selection.
Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1.
Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample.
2.
Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- long Samples.
G.
Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
H.
Sustainable Product Certification: Provide ANSI/NSF 140 certification for carpet products.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
B.
Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
C.
Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
1.6
Transition details to other flooring materials.
Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
1.
F.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1.
Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
2.
Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 page 2 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.
1.7
1.8
1.10
Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 9 sq. yd.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Carpet fabricated from an integrated mill (in-house fiber and/or yarn manufacturing, tufting, dyeing and finishing) with a formal Quality Improvement Process or equivalent Quality initiative. In operation manufacturer shall provide verification when requested.
B.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level.
C.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1.
Build mockups at locations and in sizes shown on Drawings. 4x6’ on each side of a door way including a doorway transition.
2.
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
1.9
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard."
FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period.
WARRANTY A.
Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.
2.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.
3. AC Transit Oakland, CA
More than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, and runs. Dimensional instability. Excess static discharge. Loss of tuft-bind strength. Loss of face fiber. Delamination.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 page 3 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
CARPET TILE – CPT-1 A.
Manufacturer 1.
Static Worx, Julie Industries, Shaw or approved equal
B.
Electrostatic dissipating or anti-static floor tile
C.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range
D.
Pattern: directional or monolithic
E.
Pile Fiber Content: 100 percent nylon 6, Solution Dyed, Static Dissipating and Recyclable
F.
Conductive fiber: continuous conductive monofilament in every tuft. StaticSmart, FiberLink or approved equal.
G.
Pile Characteristic: Textured-loop or Multi-level patterned-loop pile.
H.
Density: 5538 oz./cu. yd.
I.
Special treatment: Conductive pre-coat
J.
Pile Thickness: 4.78 mm for finished carpet tile according to ASTM D 6859.
K.
Stitches: 9.83 tufted stitches per inch.
L.
Gage: 1/10 ends per inch.
M.
Surface Pile Weight: 24 oz..
N.
Total Weight: 98.98oz/sq.yd for finished carpet tile.
O.
Primary Backing/Backcoating: synthetic non-woven with anti-microbial treatment.
P.
Secondary Backing: Conductive layer (PVC free) made from recyclable material.
Q.
Backing System: Ecoworx or approved equal.
R.
Size: 24 by 24 inches.
S.
Applied Treatments: 1.
Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard treatment
2.
Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard treatment that protects carpet tiles as follows: a.
T. AC Transit Oakland, CA
Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for grampositive bacteria, not less than 1-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria, and no fungal growth, according to AATCC 174.
Sustainable Design Requirements: TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 page 4 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
U.
V.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
1.
Sustainable Product Certification: Gold level certification according to ANSI/NSF 140.
2.
Carpet shall meet the testing and product requirements of the Carpet and Rug Institute’s Green Label Plus Program.
3.
Adhesives shall meet the indoor adhesive VOC limit of 50 Grams Per Liter.
Performance Characteristics: 1.
Appearance Retention Rating: Moderate traffic, 2.5 minimum according to ASTM D 7330.
2.
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.22 W/sq. cm according to NFPA 253.
3.
Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf according to ASTM D 2646.
4.
Tuft Bind: Not less than 10 lbf for loop pile according to ASTM D 1335.
5.
Delamination: Not less than 4 lbf/in. according to ASTM D 3936.
6.
Dimensional Tolerance: Within 1/32 inch of specified size dimensions, as determined by physical measurement.
7.
Dimensional Stability: 0.2 percent or less according to ISO 2551 (Aachen Test).
8.
Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) .25 according to ASTM C 423.
9.
Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, according to AATCC 165.
10.
Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 3 after 40 AFU (AATCC fading units) according to AATCC 16, Option E.
11.
Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 1 kV according to AATCC 134.
12.
Electrical resistance of the installed floor: ESD S7.1, NFP A99 Rtt, RTG: 2.5 x 104 Ohms Minimum, 1.0 x 109 Ohms Maximum per ANSI/ESD S20.20
13.
Gounding: Groundable path- grounding kit 5mm 26 gauge Copper Strip (RTG connector)
Color: multi color: gray, gray/green tan/offwhite and flecks of black. Other colors in
addition to the primary colors can be considered based on selection from manufacturer’s full range. 2.2
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for access flooring installation.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that comply with flammability requirements for
AC Transit Oakland, CA
TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 page 5 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
installed carpet tile, and are recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. 1.
Comply with maximum VOC of 50 Grams Per Liter
2.
Conductive, releasable adhesive for carpet tile 1.0 x 106 Ohms Rtt.
C.
Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of profile and width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.
D.
Where primers/sealers are used, their compatibility with adhesive must be verified by the primer /sealer manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance.
B.
Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION A.
General: Comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standards" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile.
B.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers.
D.
Metal Substrates: Clean grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if recommended in writing by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive.
E.
Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.
INSTALLATION A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard," Section 18, "Modular Carpet" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.
TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 page 6 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
3.4
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
B.
Maintain dye-lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.
C.
Maintain pile-direction patterns as recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
D.
Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces that penetrate the floor, outlets, conduits. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
E.
Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, coverplates intended to receive floor finish, alcoves, and similar openings.
F.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on carpet tile as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
G.
Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.
Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1.
Remove excess adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
2.
Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.
3.
Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B.
Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standard," Section 20, "Protecting Indoor Installations."
C.
Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
D.
Remove spots or replace carpet where spots cannot be removed.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 page 7 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
AC Transit Oakland, CA
TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 page 8 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING
PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1
1.2
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: Surface preparation and field application of paints and coatings on all surfaces scheduled to receive paint.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
Section 06410 – Architectural Casework (for finishes on casework and trim)
2.
Section 092600 – Gypsum Board Systems ( typical wall surfaces)
3.
Division 15 – Mechanical (finish of piping and ductwork and their supports where exposed to view)
4.
Division 16 – Electrical (finish of boxes, conduit, and supports where exposed to view)
REFERENCES A.
B.
ASTM, International (ASTM): 1.
ASTM D16 Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications
2.
ASTM D2486
Test Method for Scrub Resistance of Wall Paints
3.
ASTM D2825 Materials
Standard Terminology Relating to Polishes and Related
4.
ASTM D5031 Practice for Conducting Tests on Paints and Related Coatings and Materials Using Enclosed Carbon-Arc Light and Water Exposure Applications
Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA): 1.
C.
The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) 1.
D.
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Manual
California Code of Regulations (CCR): 1.
1.3
PDCA Architectural Specification Manual
CCR Title 24
Part 2, California Building Code (CBC)
COLOR SCHEDULE A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Provide paint colors as scheduled on the Drawings and selected by the City Representative. PAINTING 09 90 00 page 1 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
1.4
B.
Prior to commencement of work, the City Representative will furnish three copies of color schedule. Accent colors used for exterior and interior surfaces shall not exceed 40 percent. Color selection will include up to eight different colors.
C.
Where deep tone colors are scheduled, provide sufficient extra coats of paint as required to provide uniform color.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: Manufacturer's description of products and manufacturer's preparation, mixing and application instructions.
B.
Samples:
C.
1.5
1.6
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
1.
Prepare four sets of 8-1/2 x 11 inch sample “brush-outs” of each paint color and finish. Apply finishes on identical type materials to which they will be applied on job.
2.
Identify each sample as to color name and mixture number, finish, formula, sheen name and gloss units in accordance with ASTM D16.
Product Data: 1.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures, substrate conditions requiring special attention.
2.
Provide manufacturer's material safety data sheets (MSDSs) for all products proposed for use on the project.
3.
Products containing volatile and semi-volatile aromatic hydrocarbons, halogenated aliphatic and aromatic hydrocarbons, mucous membrane irritants, central nervous system depressants, and liver and kidney toxins and compounds found on the California Proposition 65 list of known carcinogens shall not be used.
4.
Where there is a suitable alternative product, products which have any of the above mentioned components shall not be used.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Acceptable manufacturers, materials, workmanship and all items affecting the work of this section shall be in accordance with Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
B.
Applicator: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years documented experience, and possessing a valid Contractors State License Board C-33 Painting & Decorating license.
C.
Regulatory Requirements: All products proposed for use under this Section, including primers, thinners, sealers, and cleaning solutions shall be in compliance with local California Air Resources Board (ARB) regulations for VOC content.
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Convene at least two weeks prior to starting work of this section.
PAINTING 09 90 00 page 2 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING A.
Deliver paint materials in sealed and labeled containers, inspect to verify acceptability.
B.
Container label to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, clean-up requirements, color designation and instructions for mixing and/or reducing.
MOCK-UP A.
Provide paint on walls, 8'-0" long by 8'-0" wide, illustrating prime coat, base coat and final paint color scheduled for interior surfaces for examination by District Representative prior to application of the paint. Do not begin painting until District Representative has approved mock-ups.
B.
Provide door and frame assembly illustrating paint, texture and finish for application of sample paint mock-up.
C.
Locate where directed by Architect.
D.
Mock-up may remain in place only if, and when, approved by Architect
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A.
Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
B.
Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
C.
Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F. for interiors; 50 degrees F. for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Epoxy Finishes: 65 degrees F. for interior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E.
Provide adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities to maintain temperatures above 45 degrees F. for 24 hours before, during and 48 hours after application of finishes.
F.
Provide lighting level of 80 foot candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Provide one gallon of each color, sheen level, and type to District rep.
B.
Label each container in accordance with ASTM D16 with color, type, room locations in addition to manufacturer's label.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Typical Products: Kelly-Moore, Dunn Edwards, Frazee; ICI Paint Stores, Benjamin Moore, or approved equal. PAINTING 09 90 00 page 3 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation MATERIAL
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 KELLYMOORE
DUNN EDWARDS
FRAZEE
GLIDDEN
5725
43-4
561
4020PF
5725
W715 Utra Grip
561
4020PF
1240
W701
203 Duratec
6201 Fortis
1250
W901
6407 Fortis
1680
W960
124 Mirro Glide 143 Mirro Glide
Acrylic Metal Primer Acrylic Latex Primer (Low VOC/Odor)
1725 1505
43-5 DEW 600 Sealer
Acrylic Flat Latex (Low VOC/Odor) Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel (Low VOC/Odor)) Acrylic Eggshell Enamel (Low VOC/Odor) Epoxy Paint (waterborne)
1500
DEW 603
1520
DEW 602 Sierra Semi-Gloss
1510
W 540 Sierra Eggshell
7100
1735
EXTERIOR 100% Acrylic Metal Primer Acrylic Galvanized Metal Primer 100% Acrylic Flat Finish 100% Acrylic SemiGloss 100% Acrylic Gloss
3028
INTERIOR
B.
4020PF LM9116
LM9100 LM9200
LM9300
4408
Equivalent products of other manufacturers will only be acceptable subject to conformance with specified requirements and the following criteria: 1.
Submit proposed substitution request in accordance with Division One product substitution procedures.
2.
Provide independent laboratory tests conducted within the previous 12 months.
3.
Provide test results of the following characteristics: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
561 066 Envirokote Primer 018 Envirokote 032 Envirokote SG 029 Envirokote Eggshell Amercoat 335
The resin type. Solids by volume and solids by weight. Identify by percent of weight both primary and reinforcing pigments. Identify resins and additives by percent of weight. Provide “Contrast Ratio” tests in accordance with ASTM D2805. Interior Paint: Provide “Scrub to Failure” test results in accordance with ASTM D2486. Exterior Paint: Provide “Accelerated Weathering” test results in accordance with ASTM D5031. Submit manufacturer’s data and test results for each product as separate exhibits.
PAINTING 09 90 00 page 4 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 2.2
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
MATERIALS A.
Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating; good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
B.
Paint Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified of commercial quality.
C.
Patching Materials: Latex filler.
D.
Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Verify that surfaces and substrate conditions are ready to receive work as instructed by product manufacturer.
B.
Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report in writing to the City Representative, any condition that may potentially affect proper application. Do not commence until all such defects have been corrected.
C.
Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
D.
Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic "Moisture Meter" with one inch long prongs (minimum). Do not apply finishes unless the moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
E.
3.2
1.
Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.
2.
Concrete: 12 percent.
3.
Cement Plaster: 12 percent.
4.
Interior Located Wood: 15 percent.
Measure exterior Portland cement for pH value using litmus paper. If pH value is 8 or less, paint can be applied, if more than 8, wait until pH value is determined to be less than 8, or consult manufacturer’s data sheets for recommendation.
PREPARATION OF SURFACES A.
Comply with Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA) Architectural Specifications Manual, and as herein specified.
B.
Remove all electrical cover plates, surface hardware, fittings, escutcheons, and fastenings, prior to painting operations.
C.
Store items carefully, clean and replace on completion of work.
D.
Do not use solvent to clean hardware that may remove the permanent lacquer finish.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
PAINTING 09 90 00 page 5 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation E.
Prepare all surfaces, including areas to be patched, in strict accordance with paint manufacturer’s published instructions for each particular substrate condition.
F.
Adequately protect other surfaces from paint and damage. Make good any damage as a result of inadequate or unsuitable protection.
G.
Furnish sufficient drop cloths, shields and protective equipment to prevent spray or droppings from fouling surfaces not being painted and in particular, surfaces within storage and preparation area.
H.
Place cotton waste, cloths and material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers and remove daily from site.
I.
Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew, by scrubbing with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry completely.
J.
Gypsum Wallboard Surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.
K.
Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply a coat of etching primer.
L.
Shop Primed Steel Surfaces:
M. 3.3
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
1.
Sand and scrape to remove all loose primer rust.
2.
Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous.
3.
Clean surfaces with solvent.
4.
Prime bare steel surfaces. Prime metal items including shop primed metals.
Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer.
APPLICATIONS A.
Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Finishes specified are intended to cover surfaces satisfactorily when applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
C.
Apply each coat to uniform finish.
D.
Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than the preceding coat unless otherwise approved by the City Representative.
E.
Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
F.
Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. Use tack cloth just prior to applying next coat.
G.
Allow each coat of finish to dry before a following coat is applied, a minimum of 24-hours, unless directed otherwise by manufacturer.
H.
Paint tops and bottoms of doors; match color of doors edges.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
PAINTING 09 90 00 page 6 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
3.4
3.5
3.6
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
I.
Where clear finishes are required ensure tint fillers match wood. Wood fillers well into the grain before it has set. Wipe excess from the surface.
J.
Backprime exterior and interior woodwork, which is to receive a paint or enamel finish, with enamel undercoat paint.
K.
Backprime interior woodwork, which is to receive a stain and/or varnish finish, with a gloss varnish. Do not thin varnish for backpriming.
L.
Factory Finished and Anodized Aluminum: No paint finish required.
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A.
Refer to Mechanical and Electrical sections with respect to painting and finishing requirements color coding identification banding of equipment, ducting, piping and conduit.
B.
Remove grilles, covers and access panels for mechanical and electrical systems from location and paint separately.
C.
Finish paint primed equipment to color selected in schedule.
D.
Prime and paint insulated and bare pipes, conduits, boxes, except where items are plated or covered with a pre-finished cladding.
E.
Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted over or spattered.
F.
Paint interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed immediately behind louvers, grilles.
G.
Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished surfaces.
H.
Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical equipment before installing backboards and mounting equipment on them.
I.
Color code equipment, piping, conduit and exposed ductwork in accordance with requirements indicated. All color banding and identification flow arrows, naming, numbering, etc., in accordance with ANSI requirements.
CLEANING A.
As the work proceeds and upon completion, promptly remove all paint where spilled, splashed or spattered.
B.
During the progress of the work keep the premises free from any unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris.
C.
Upon completion of work leave premises neat and clean, to the satisfaction of the City Representative.
PAINTING AND FINISHING SCHEDULE A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Exterior: PAINTING 09 90 00 page 7 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.
Galvanized and Miscellaneous Metal other than Factory Finished: Steel doors and frames; sheet metal flashing, trim, metal cladding, and other exposed exterior metal: a. b.
2.
First Coat: Acrylic metal primer. Second and Third Coats: Acrylic gloss enamel.
Galvanized and Miscellaneous Metal other than Factory Finished – Exposed structural steel col. a. b. c. d.
B.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Pretreatment: - Galvanized Metal: Remove oil film with neutral detergent or emulsion cleaner. Pretreatment – Steel: Remove oil film with neutral detergent or emulsion cleaner and abrasive blast. First Coat – Galvanized Metal: Lithform No. 2 zinc treatment.. Second and Third Coat: PPG “Amercoat Amerlock PSX-700” VOC-compliant 2-component siloxane.
Interior: 1.
Drywall: Gypsum wallboard, flat finish (Ceilings): a. b.
2.
Drywall: Gypsum wallboard eggshell finish (Walls): a. b.
3.
First Coat: Primer, acrylic enamel undercoat. Second and Third Coat: 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel.”
Galvanized and Miscellaneous Metal: Control panels, steel doors, steel door frames, metal deck, exposed ducts, pipes, and other interior metals: a. b.
5.
First Coat: Primer, Latex Wallboard. Second and Third Coat: 100% Acrylic Eggshell.
100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel at Toilets and Janitor: a. b.
4.
First Coat: Primer, Latex Wallboard. Second and Third Coat: 100% Acrylic Flat Latex.
First Coat: Metal primer. Second and Third Coat: 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel.
Shop Primed Metal: Monitor support beams and brackets.
a.
First Coat: Primer, acrylic enamel undercoat.
b.
Second and Third Coat: 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel.”
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
PAINTING 09 90 00 page 8 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNAGE
PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
B.
1.2
This Section includes the following: 1.
Plaques
2.
Panel signs
3.
Exterior reflectorized parking signs
4.
Schedules for all signage on Door Schedule
Related Sections include the following: 1.
Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications (for exterior sign posts)
2.
Division 15 – Mechanical (Section for identification of mechanical identification)
3.
Division 16 – Electrical (Sections for electrical service and connections for illuminated signs; electrical identifications of electrical equipment; and illuminated exit signs.
REFERENCES A.
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): 1.
B.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
ADA ADAAG
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
ASTM, International (ASTM): 1.
ASTM A240 Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications
2.
ASTM A529 Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality
3.
ASTM A572 Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy ColumbiumVanadium Structural Steel
4.
ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
5.
ASTM A666 Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar
SIGNAGE 10 14 00 page 1 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
C.
6.
ASTM A1008 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable
7.
ASTM B26
Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings
8.
ASTM B36 Bar
Standard Specification for Brass Plate, Sheet, Strip, And Rolled
9.
ASTM B209 and Plate
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet
10.
ASTM B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
11.
ASTM B584 Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications
12.
ASTM D256 Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics
13.
ASTM D638
14.
ASTM D790 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
15.
ASTM D1644
Standard Test Methods for Nonvolatile Content of Varnishes
16.
ASTM D4802 Plastic Sheet
Standard Specification for Poly(Methyl Methacrylate) Acrylic
1.3
10 CFR 1910.7 Definition and Requirements of a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL)
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1.
E.
Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR): 1.
D.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code
Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): 1.
SSPC SP5
White Metal Blast Cleaning
2.
SSPC SP8
Pickling
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs. 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories.
SIGNAGE 10 14 00 page 2 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
C.
D.
1.4
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
2.
Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign.
3.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors available for the following: 1.
Aluminum.
2.
Acrylic sheet.
3.
Polycarbonate sheet.
4.
Die-cut vinyl characters and graphic symbols. Include representative samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols.
Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for the full range of color, texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated: 1.
Aluminum: For each form, finish, and color, on 6-inch long sections of extrusions and squares of sheet at least 4 by 4 inches.
2.
Polycarbonate Sheet: 8 by 10 inches for each color required.
3.
Panel Signs: Not less than 12 inches square including border.
4.
Trim and Frames: 6-inch long sections of each profile.
5.
Accessories: Manufacturer's full-size unit.
E.
Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
F.
Qualification Data: For fabricator.
G.
Closeout Documentation: 1.
Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.
2.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single manufacturer.
C.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADAAG.
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by an NRTL and marked for intended use.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
SIGNAGE 10 14 00 page 3 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.5
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation of exterior signage only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit installation of signs in exterior locations to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.
B.
Field Measurements: Verify recess openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on approved shop drawings.
COORDINATION A.
1.7
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs.
WARRANTY A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
Failures include deterioration of metal and polymer finishes beyond normal weathering; and deterioration of embedded graphic image colors, and sign lamination.
2.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
Aluminum Castings: ASTM B26, of alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated.
B.
Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the strength and durability properties of Alloy 5005-H32.
C.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the strength and durability properties of Alloy 6063-T5.
D.
Steel:
AC Transit Oakland, CA
1.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653, G90 coating, either commercial or forming steel.
2.
Steel Sheet: Uncoated, cold-rolled, ASTM A1008, commercial steel, Type B, exposed with steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A1008, commercial steel, exposed.
3.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A240 or ASTM A666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
4.
Steel Members Fabricated from Plate or Bar Stock: ASTM A529 or ASTM A572, 42,000-psi minimum yield strength.
SIGNAGE 10 14 00 page 4 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 5.
E.
F.
2.2
For steel exposed to view on completion, provide materials having flat, smooth surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials whose surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
Polycarbonate Sheet: Of thickness indicated, manufactured by extrusion process, coated on both surfaces with abrasion-resistant coating: 1.
Impact Resistance: 16 ft-lbf/in per ASTM D256, Method A.
2.
Tensile Strength: 9000 lbf/sq. in. per ASTM D638.
3.
Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: 340,000 lbf/sq. in. per ASTM D790.
4.
Heat Deflection: 265 deg F at 264 lbf/sq. in. per ASTM D648.
5.
Abrasion Resistance: 1.5 percent maximum haze increase for 100 revolutions of a Taber abraser with a load of 500 g per ASTM D1044.
Applied Vinyl: Die-cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 3 mils with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing, suitable for exterior applications.
PLAQUES entry A.
B.
2.3
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on the Drawings from one of the following: 1.
Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division.
2.
Gemini Incorporated.
3.
Metal Arts; Div. of L&H Mfg. Co.
4.
Mills Manufacturing Company.
Cast Plaques: Provide castings free of pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects, as follows: 1.
Plaque Material: Aluminum
2.
Background Texture: Manufacturer's standard matte texture.
3.
Border Style: Projected bevel.
4.
Mounting: Concealed studs, non-corroding for substrates encountered.
PANEL SIGNS Interior doors, exterior ADA A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.
ASI-Modulex, Inc.
2.
Best Sign Systems Inc.
SIGNAGE 10 14 00 page 5 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
B.
3.
Gemini Incorporated.
4.
Mohawk Sign Systems.
5.
Seton Identification Products.
Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from corner to corner, complying with the following requirements: 1.
Laminated Sheet: High-pressure engraved stock with contrasting color face laminated to acrylic core as selected by District Representative from manufacturer's full range.
2.
Laminated, Sandblasted Polymer: Raised graphics with Braille 1/32 inch above surface with contrasting colors as selected by District Representative from manufacturer's full range and laminated to acrylic back.
3.
Edge Condition: Square cut.
4.
Corner Condition: Rounded to radius indicated.
5.
Mounting: Unframed As indicated. a. b.
C.
Color: As selected by District Representative from manufacturer's full range.
7.
Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch above surface with contrasting colors.
Exterior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from corner to corner, complying with the following requirements: 1.
Aluminum Sheet: 0.080 inch thick.
2.
Acrylic Sheet: 0.080 inch thick.
3.
Edge Condition: Square cut.
4.
Corner Condition: Rounded to radius indicated.
5.
Mounting: Unframed As indicated.
6.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Wall mounted with two-face tape. Manufacturer's standard anchors for substrates encountered.
6.
a. b.
D.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Wall and pendant mounted. Manufacturer's standard noncorroding anchors for substrates encountered.
Color: As selected by District Representative from manufacturer's full range.
Brackets: Fabricate brackets and fittings for bracket-mounted signs from extruded aluminum to suit panel sign construction and mounting conditions indicated. Factory paint brackets in color matching District Representative's sample.
SIGNAGE 10 14 00 page 6 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation E.
Changeable Message Inserts: Fabricate interior office door signs to allow insertion of changeable messages in the form of [slide-in inserts] [transparent covers with paper inserts printed by District] [changeable panel inserts for use in fixed frames].
F.
Tactile and Braille Sign: Manufacturer's standard process for producing text and symbols complying with ADAAG and ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square-cut edges free from burrs and cut marks; Braille dots with domed or rounded shape.
G.
2.4
2.6
1.
Panel Material: Opaque acrylic sheet.
2.
Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch.
Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy colors, provide colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are UV and water resistant for five years for application intended. Color: As selected by City Representative from manufacturer's full range.
ACCESSORIES A.
2.5
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.
FABRICATION A.
Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of exposed side. Clean exposed welded surfaces of welding flux and dress exposed and contact surfaces.
B.
Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration.
C.
Preassemble signs in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation, in location not exposed to view after final assembly.
D.
Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous.
FINISHES, GENERAL A.
Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
SIGNAGE 10 14 00 page 7 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
ALUMINUM FINISHES A.
Clear Anodic Finish: Manufacturer's standard Class 1 clear anodic coating, 0.018 mm or thicker, over a satin (directionally textured) mechanical finish, complying with AAMA 611.
B.
Color Anodic Finish: Manufacturer's standard Class 1 integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color anodic coating, 0.018 mm or thicker, applied over a satin (directionally textured)] [polished (buffed)] mechanical finish, complying with AAMA 611.
C.
Baked-Enamel Finish: 1.
AA-C12C42R1x (chemical finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; chemical finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Apply baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting.
2.
Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system complying with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils, medium gloss.
STEEL FINISHES A.
Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5 or SSPC-SP 8.
B.
Factory Priming for Painted Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Shop primer shall be manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer, selected for resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated, and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
C.
Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.
STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A.
Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.
B.
Directional Satin Finish: No. 4 finish.
ACRYLIC SHEET FINISHES A.
Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy [and] [background] [and frame] colors, provide colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and that are UV and water resistant for five years for application intended.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
SIGNAGE 10 14 00 page 8 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 3.1
3.2
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B.
Verify that items, [including anchor inserts], [and electrical power] are sized and located to accommodate signs.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION A.
Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.
B.
Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply. 1.
Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.
2.
Hook-and-Loop Tapes: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces.
3.
Magnetic Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces.
4.
Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces.
5.
Shim Plate Mounting: For mounting on irregular surfaces, provide 1/8-inch thick, concealed aluminum shim plates with predrilled and countersunk holes, at locations indicated, and where other mounting methods are not practicable. Attach plate with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate. Attach panel signs to plate using method specified above.
6.
Mechanical Fasteners: Use nonremovable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer.
7.
Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide matching opaque plate on opposite side of glass to conceal mounting materials.
C.
Bracket-Mounted Signs: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets, fittings, and hardware for mounting signs that project at right angles from walls and ceilings. Attach brackets and fittings securely to walls and ceilings with concealed fasteners and anchoring devices to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for character form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish character spacing and to locate holes for fasteners. 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Flush Mounting: Mount characters with backs in contact with wall surface. SIGNAGE 10 14 00 page 9 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 2.
E.
3.3
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Projected Mounting: Mount characters at projection distance from wall surface indicated on the Drawings.
Cast-Metal Plaques: Mount plaques using standard fastening methods to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for type of wall surface indicated. 1.
Concealed Mounting: Mount plaques by inserting threaded studs into tapped lugs on back of plaque. Set in predrilled holes filled with quick-setting cement.
2.
Face Mounting: Mount plaques using exposed fasteners with rosettes attached through face of plaque into wall surface.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.
After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by District.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
SIGNAGE 10 14 00 page 10 of 10
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
1.3
1.4
Related Requirements: 1.
Section 093000 - Ceramic Tiling for ceramic tile wall finish.
2.
Section 092600 - Gypsum Board Systems.
3.
Division 22 - Plumbing: Plumbing fixtures
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
B.
Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete as required to prevent delaying the Work.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
B.
Product Data: For each type of product. 1.
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
2.
Include anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation.
Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1.
1.5
Public-use washroom accessories.
Identify locations using room designations indicated.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 page 1 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.6
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A.
Source Limitations: Obtain public-use washroom accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
B.
Manufacturers:
C.
D.
E.
1.
Basis of Design: Bobrick Washroom Equipment
2.
American Specialties Inc.
3.
Or equal
Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser TTD1 1.
Manufacturer: Basis of Design: Bobrick Washroom Equipment B-6977
2.
Description: Double-roll dispenser.
3.
Mounting: Recessed
4.
Controlled-delivery units cannot be used at accessible toilets.
5.
Operation: Non-control delivery with standard spring loaded spindle
6.
Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2- or 5-inch- diameter tissue rolls.
7.
Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
Seat Cover Dispenser SCD-1 1.
Manufacturer Basis of design: Bobrick Contura Series B 4221
2.
Description: Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser.
3.
Mounting: Surface mounted.
4.
Minimum Capacity: 250 single or half fold, paper toilet seat covers
5.
Material and Finish: 20 gauge Type 304 Stainless Steel with Satin finish
6.
Fill from bottom.
Sanitary Napkin Disposal SCD-1 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Manufacturer Basis of design: Bobrick Contura Series B 270
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 page 2 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
F.
2.
Description: All welded construction, cover flips up for disposal of sanitary napkins and for servicing container. Container has integral finger depression for opening cover.
3.
Mounting: Surface mounted.
4.
Minimum Capacity: 1.0 gal ( 3.8L)
5.
Material and Finish: 22 gauge Type 304 Stainless Steel with Satin finish
6.
Disposable paper liners: B270-12.
Combination Towel (Folded) Dispenser/Waste Receptacle PTD-1 1.
Manufacturer: Basis of Design: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Contura Series B43944
2.
Description: Combination unit for dispensing C-fold or multifold towels, with removable waste receptacle.
3.
Mounting: Recessed with projecting receptacle. a.
G.
Designed for nominal 4-inch wall depth.
4.
Minimum Towel-Dispenser Capacity: 600 C-fold or 800 multifold paper towels.
5.
Minimum Waste-Receptacle Capacity: 14.2 gal.
6.
Material and Finish: Stainless steel 304, No. 4 finish (satin).
7.
Liner: Reusable, vinyl waste-receptacle liner.
8.
Lockset: Tumbler type for towel-dispenser compartment.
Liquid-Soap Dispenser SD-1 1.
Manufacturer: Basis of Design: Bobrick Washroom Equipment B-4063
2.
Description: Designed for dispensing antibacterial soap in liquid or lotion form.
3.
Mounting: Horizontally oriented, recessed
4.
Capacity: 50 fl oz.
5.
Materials: a.
b. c.
6. AC Transit Oakland, CA
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Face plate: 22-gauge, type 304 stainless steel satin finish, Drawn, onepiece seamless construction; Heavy gauge type 304 stainless steel Cabinet and Flange. Container: Molded plastic. Large opening equipped with plastic cover. Soap Valve: Black molded plastic push button and spout; soap headholding mushroom valve; stainless steel spring; U-packing seal and duckbills. Antimicrobial-soap resistant plastic cylinder.
Lockset: Tumbler type. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 page 3 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 7. H.
Refill Indicator: Window type.
Grab Bar GB-1 and GB-2 1. 2.
Manufacturer: Basis of Design: Bobrick Washroom Equipment B-5806 x 36 inch and B 5806 x 42 inch. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.
3.
Material: Stainless steel, 18 gauge type 304 satin finish stainless steel. a.
I.
Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches
5.
Configuration and Length: Straight 42 inches long and Straight, 36 inches long.
Mirror Unit M-1 1.
Manufacturer: Basis of Design: Bobrick Washroom Equipment B-166-1836
2.
Frame: Type 430 Stainless Steel Channel ¼ inch return at rear with bright polish finish. Galvanized steel back has integral horizontal hanging brackets at top and bottom of mirror. Corners: 1 piece frame with 90 degree mitered corners
3.
Integral Shelf: 5 inches deep. Type 304, 22 gauge stainless steel with satin finish. 3/8 inch return edges on front and sides with front edge hemmed for additional safety. Shelf welded to mirror frame and reinforced by concealed 16 gauge stainless steel brackets.
4.
Hangers: 20 gauge galvanized steel. Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below. a.
5.
2.2
Mounting flange Cover is 22 gauge type 304 satin finish stainless steel
4.
a.
J.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove.
Mirror: No. 1 quality, ¼ inch select float glass: selected for silvering electrolytically copper-plated by the galvanic process, and guaranteed for 10 years against silver spoilage. Corners protected by friction absorbing filler strips; back is protected by full size, shock absorbing water resistant, nonabrasive, 3/16 inch thick polyethylene padding.
Coat Hook CH-1 1.
Manufacturer: Basis of design: Bobrick Washroom Equipment: B 6727
2.
Description: Double prong unit surface mounted.
3.
Material and Finish: Type 304 22 gauge stainless steel satin finish, with concealed 16 gauge stainless steel mounting bracket All welded construction
UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Underlavatory Guard UG-1 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 page 4 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
2.3
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
1.
Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevents direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings.
2.
Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.
FABRICATION A.
General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.
B.
Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of Six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION A.
Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B.
Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.
Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.
B.
Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C.
Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 page 5 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
AC Transit Oakland, CA
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 page 6 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
SECTION 10 51 13 METAL LOCKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
1.3
Section Includes: 1. Welded corridor lockers. 15 inches wide, 18 inches deep 2. Triple tier as shown
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of metal locker. 1.
B.
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of metal locker.
Shop Drawings: For metal lockers. 1. 2. 3.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show locker trim and accessories. Include locker identification system and numbering sequence.
C.
Samples: For each color specified, in manufacturer's standard size.
D.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available.
E.
Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard size: 1. 2.
F.
1.4
Lockers and equipment. Locker benches.
Product Schedule: For lockers.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
B.
Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13 page 1 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
1.5
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
1.6
Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.
Full-size units of the following metal locker hardware items equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each type and finish installed, but no fewer than one units: a. b. c.
1.7
Lockable latch Identification plates. Hooks.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
1.8
Do not deliver metal lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for their installation.
FIELD CONDITIONS A.
1.9
Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of recessed openings by field measurements before fabrication.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of metal bases for metal lockers.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of work specified in other Sections to ensure that metal lockers can be supported and installed as indicated.
1.10 A.
WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within specified warranty period. 1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b.
2. 3.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Structural failures. Faulty operation of latches and other door hardware.
Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is excluded. Warranty Period for Welded Metal Lockers: Lifetime from date of Substantial Completion.
METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13 page 2 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Source Limitations: Obtain metal lockers and accessories from single source from single locker manufacturer. 1.
2.2
Obtain locks from single lock manufacturer.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
2.3
Accessibility Requirements: For lockers indicated to be accessible, comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC A117.1.
WELDED CORRIDOR LOCKERS A.
Manufacturers: AJW, Art Metal Products, Republic or approved equal.
B.
Doors: One piece; fabricated from 0.075-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; formed into channel shape with double bend at vertical edges and with right-angle single bend at horizontal edges. 1. 2.
Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard reinforcing angles, channels, or stiffeners for doors more than 15 inches wide; welded to inner face of doors. Door Style: Vented panel as follows: a. b.
C.
Body: Assembled by welding body components together. Fabricate from unperforated steel sheet with thicknesses as follows: 1. 2. 3.
D.
Tops, Bottoms, and Sides: 0.060-inch (1.52-mm) nominal thickness. Backs: 0.048-inch (1.21-mm) nominal thickness. Shelves: 0.060-inch (1.52-mm) nominal thickness, with double bend at front and single bend at sides and back.
Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; lapped and factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory welded into vertical main frames. Form continuous, integral, full-height door strikes on vertical main frames. 1. 2.
E.
Louvered Vents: No fewer than three louver openings at top or bottom, for triple-tier lockers. Security Vents: Manufacturer's standard, stamped horizontal or vertical.
Cross Frames between Tiers: Channel formed and fabricated from same material as main frames; welded to vertical main frames. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, steel, continuous or knuckle type.
Recessed Door Handle and Latch: Stainless-steel cup with integral door pull, recessed so locking device does not protrude beyond door face; pry and vandal resistant.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13 page 3 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
1.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Single-Point Latching: Nonmoving latch hook with steel padlock loop that projects through recessed cup and is finished to match metal locker body. a.
Latch Hook: Equip each door with one latch hook, fabricated from 0.120-inch (3.04mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded midway up full-height door strike; with resilient silencer.
F.
Door Handle and Latch for Box Lockers: Stainless-steel strike plate with integral pull; with steel padlock loop that projects through metal locker door.
G.
Locks: Combination padlocks
H.
Identification Plates: Manufacturer's standard, etched, embossed, or stamped aluminum plates, with numbers and letters at least 3/8 inch high.
I.
Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed type, aluminum or steel; zinc plated.
J.
Coat Rods: Manufacturer's standard. 2 per locker
K.
Continuous Zee Base: Fabricated from, manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet. 1.
L.
Height: 4 inches (102 mm) .
Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated from 0.048-inch (1.21-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet, with a pitch of approximately 20 degrees. 1.
Closures: Vertical -end type.
M.
Filler Panels: Fabricated from 0.048-inch (1.21-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet.
N.
Materials: 1.
O.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, suitable for exposed applications.
Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat. 1.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range
P.
Unperforated Sides: Fabricated from 0.060-inch (1.52-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet.
Q.
Seats/Shelves: Full width of metal locker; channel formed; fabricated from 0.075-inch (1.90-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet; with stiffeners for reinforcement.
2.4
LOCKS A.
Combination Padlocks: Provided by Owner.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13 page 4 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
2.5
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
FABRICATION A.
Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, without warp, and with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch and free of sharp edges and burrs. 1. 2.
Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet unless otherwise indicated. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for complete installation.
B.
Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, and back; and common intermediate uprights separating compartments. Factory weld frame members of each metal locker together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly.
C.
Equipment: Provide each locker with an identification plate and the following equipment: 1. Triple-Tier Units: One double-prong ceiling hook. 2. Ceiling hook: For each compartment of each locker
D.
Welded Construction: Factory preassemble metal lockers by welding all joints, seams, and connections; with no bolts, nuts, screws, or rivets used in assembly of main locker groups. Factory weld main locker groups into one-piece structures. Grind exposed welds flush.
E.
Accessible Lockers: Fabricate as follows: 1. 2.
Locate bottom shelf no lower than 15 inches (381 mm) above the floor. Where hooks, coat rods, or additional shelves are provided, locate no higher than 48 inches (1219 mm) above the floor.
F.
Continuous Base: Formed into channel or zee profile for stiffness, and fabricated in lengths as long as practical to enclose base and base ends of metal lockers; finished to match lockers.
G.
Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated in lengths as long as practical, without visible fasteners at splice locations; finished to match lockers.
H.
Filler Panels: Fabricated in an unequal leg angle shape; finished to match lockers. Provide slipjoint filler angle formed to receive filler panel.
I.
Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners, except for perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of non-recessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers.
2.6
ACCESSORIES A.
Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type, exposed bolt heads; with self-locking nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts.
B.
Anchors: Material, type, and size required for secure anchorage to each substrate. 1. 2.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls, and elsewhere as indicated, for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13 page 5 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine walls, floors, and support bases, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION A.
General: Install lockers level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. 1.
2.
Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more than 36 inches o.c. Using concealed fasteners, install anchors through backup reinforcing plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion. Anchor single rows of metal lockers to walls near top and bottom of lockers and to floor.
B.
Welded Lockers: Connect groups together with standard fasteners, with no exposed fasteners on face frames.
C.
Equipment: 1. 2. 3.
Attach hooks with at least two fasteners. Attach door locks on doors using security-type fasteners. Identification Plates: Identify metal lockers with identification indicated on Drawings. a.
D.
3.3
Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two aluminum rivets.
Trim: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately together to form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates. 1. Attach filler panels with concealed fasteners. Locate filler panels where indicated on Drawings. 2. Attach sloping-top units to metal lockers, with closures at exposed ends. 3. Attach finished end panels using fasteners only at perimeter to conceal exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers.
ADJUSTING A.
3.4
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding.
PROTECTION A.
Protect metal lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit use during construction.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13 page 6 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
B.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Touch up marred finishes, or replace metal lockers that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13 page 7 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
AC Transit Oakland, CA
METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13 page 8 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 SECTION 12 24 00 WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A. B.
Section Includes: Manually-operated window shades with brackets and accessories as required for complete finished operational installation. Related sections: 1.
1.2
1.3
REFERENCES A.
NFPA 701: Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films.
B.
FS CCC-T-191b: Flame Retardancy of Textiles.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.
1.4
System: Provide pull chain operated, single banded shade that covers entire window, including hardware, accessory items, mounting brackets and fastenings.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: 2.
B.
Furnish manufacturer’s literature.
Shop Drawings: Show hardware, clearances and operation of shades with specified system. 1.
Layout of openings subject to Architect approval where not clearly indicated.
C.
Samples: Submit samples of each fabric indicating finishing of top, bottom and sides, and section of frame indicating finish.
D.
Certificate of Flame Proofing or Flame Resistance: Submit certification, recommendations and instructions for laundering of specified fabrics and maintenance of entire installation. 1.
1.5
08 43 13 Aluminum Framed Storefront
Instructions: Specifically applicable to this installation.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Regulatory Requirements:
1.
Flame Retardant Materials: Approved by California State Fire Marshal’s Office.
2.
Fire Resistant Fabrics: Required to have passed one of the following:
WINDOW SHADES 12 24 00 page 1 of 4
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation a. b. 1.6
1.7
NFPA 701. FS CCCD-T-191, test 5903.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Do not deliver shades until building is ready for installation.
B.
Number and identify shades as to locations in Project.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Before installation, physically measure and inspect space after limiting conditions are established. 1.
1.8
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Note floor and ceiling may not be level.
WARRANTY A.
Roller Shade Hardware and Chain Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard non-depreciating twenty-five year warranty.
B.
Roller Shade Installation: One year from date of Substantial Completion, not including scaffolding, lifts or other means to reach inaccessible areas.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1
2.2.
MANUFACTURERS A.
Mecho Shade Corporation/Mecho Shade System Basis of Design
B.
Levolor Lorentzen, Inc./Contract Shades
C.
Sol-R-Veil, Inc., General Drapery Services/Sure Shade.
D.
Substitutions: Refer to Section 01630.
MATERIALS A.
B.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Fabric: Manufacturer’s standard fire resistant glass cloth fabric solar shades. 1.
Fabric: Mecho Shade Euro twill 6000 series, 126” wide, 3% openness.
2.
Colors: Reversible weave to match shades installed by others at office windows. 6016 Slate. As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors.
Manual Operated Chain Drive Hardware and Brackets: 1.
Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8-inch thick plated steel, or heavier, thicker, as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade.
2.
Provide for universal, regular and offset drive capacity, allowing drive chain to fall at front, rear or non-offset for all shade drive end brackets. Universal offset shall be adjustable for future change.).
WINDOW SHADES 12 24 00 page 2 of 4
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
C.
D.
2.3
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
3.
Provide hardware capable for installation of a removable fascia, for both regular and/or reverse roll, which shall be installed without exposed fastening devices of any kind.
4.
Provide shade hardware system that allows fascias to be mounted continuously across two or more shade bands without requiring exposed fasteners of any kind.
5.
Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shade bands (multi-banded manually operated shades) by a single chain operator,. Connectors shall be off set to assure alignment from the first to the last shade band.
6.
Provide positive mechanical engagement of drive mechanism to shade roller tube. Friction fit connector for drive mechanism connection to shade roller tube are not acceptable.
7.
Drive Chain: #10 qualified stainless steel chain rated to 90lb minimum breaking strength. Nickel plate chain shall not be accepted.
Accessories: Provide accessories, brackets, fittings and fastenings as necessary for proper operation and installation of shades; conceal fasteners or finish flush, painted to match exposed metal finish. 1.
Shade housing mounted inside the window frame.
2.
Cover plate: Mecho 4124 3 inch wide removable, extruded aluminum closure plate.
Exposed Metal Finish: Manufacturer’s standard bronze painted finish as approved by Architect.
FABRICATION A.
Fabric: Heat set to prevent edges from unraveling when knife cut. 1.
Fabricate shades with threads square.
2.
Allow sufficient overage to provide finished shades required from single run of fabric.
3.
Fabricate shade cloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion. Fabricate with heat-sealed trimmed edges to hang straight without curling or raveling. Fabricate unguided shade cloth to roll true and straight without shifting sideways more than 1/8inch in either direction per 8feet of shade height due to warp distortion or weave design.
B.
Cutting: Edge sealing hot knife system.
C.
Sewing: Locked or blind stitch, done on power machines using tension and spacing as required to be permanent and to avoid pulling. 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Thread: Match fabric color.
WINDOW SHADES 12 24 00 page 3 of 4
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
2.
Seams: Flat double back or lock-over-lock, with hems and seams free from pucker.
3.
Length: Finish length so bottom clearance is by 1”, with ¼” tolerance acceptable.
D.
Bottom: Provide weighted hembar sealed within bottom hem.
E.
Center Seams: Use single widths of fabric with no center seams for each shade.
F.
Shade Mounting System: Allow for shade removal and replacement without disassembling hardware assembly.
G.
Operating System: Provide upper and lower stop limits to prevent over-winding and unrolling.
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION A.
Inspect site conditions prior to installation for conditions that could affect proper installation and operation of shades.
B.
Beginning installation signifies acceptance of substrates and conditions.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install shades in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and installation instructions. 1.
3.3
Install shades level, plumb, secure, and at proper height; cooperate with other trades for securing shades to substrate and finished surfaces.
B.
Hang shades to be straight and even, employing hand sewing of seams and hems as necessary for carefully matched installation with even, horizontal top and bottom hems, and quiet, smoothly operating system.
D.
Fabricate and install shades so when open, closed or while operating shades will not be abraded by window frame, ceiling or sill.
ADJUSTING A. Thirty days after hanging of shades, inspect installation for fabric shrinkage or expansion or other variations and rehang as necessary for conformance to specified tolerances.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
WINDOW SHADES 12 24 00 page 4 of 4
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
SECTION 21 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
1.3
Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. Sleeves. Escutcheons. Grout. Fire-suppression equipment and piping demolition. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. Painting and finishing. Concrete bases. Supports and anchorages.
DEFINITIONS A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.
D.
The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1.
E.
CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 1. 2.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION 21 05 00 page 1 of 9
April 2016 April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.4
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
SCOPE OF WORK A.
1.5
Existing fire protection system is to remain in place and be protected from damage during ceiling work. Remove existing sprinklers and cap branch piping above ceiling, and protect during demolition of existing ceiling. Upon installation of new ceiling grid, re-connect new sprinkler piping to capped piping in ceiling space, extend and re-route piping to new sprinkler locations as shown on Architectural drawings. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following: 1. 2.
B. 1.6
Mechanical sleeve seals. Escutcheons.
Welding certificates. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
B.
Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. 2.
C.
1.7
Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current.
Electrical Characteristics for Fire-Suppression Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B.
Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.8
COORDINATION A.
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for fire-suppression installations.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION 21 05 00 page 2 of 9
April 2016 April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
B.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C.
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for fire-suppression items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1.
2.
2.2
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A.
Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.
B.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.3
JOINING MATERIALS A.
Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1.
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. b.
2.
Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION 21 05 00 page 3 of 9
April 2016 April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
E.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.
F.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H.
Solvent Cements for Joining CPVC Plastic Piping: ASTM F 493.
2.4
SLEEVES A.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: longitudinal joint.
B.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C.
Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1.
2.5
0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
ESCUTCHEONS A.
Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.
B.
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw. 1.
C.
Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw. 1.
2.6
Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
GROUT A.
Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout. 1. 2. 3.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION 21 05 00 page 4 of 9
noncorrosive,
April 2016 April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
FIRE-SUPPRESSION DEMOLITION A.
Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" and Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.
B.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. C.
3.2
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality. PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping systems.
B.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
D.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
E.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
H.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION 21 05 00 page 5 of 9
April 2016 April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
I.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
L.
Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following: 1.
New Piping: a. b. c. d. e. f.
2.
Existing Piping: Use the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.
M.
Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, castbrass type with polished chrome-plated finish. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type.
Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, castbrass type with chrome-plated finish. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, cast-brass type. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, floor-plate type.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor. 1.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a.
2. 3.
Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. b.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board partitions. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION 21 05 00 page 6 of 9
April 2016 April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 4.
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.
N.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
O.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
P.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.
3.3
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping systems.
B.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
D.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. 2.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I.
Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. 2.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION April 2016 21 05 00 page 7 of 9
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation J. 3.4
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139. PAINTING
A.
Painting of fire-suppression systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."
B.
Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.
3.5
CONCRETE BASES A.
Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6.
3.6
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete”.
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A.
Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor fire-suppression materials and equipment.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.7
GROUTING A.
Mix and install grout for fire-suppression equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.
B.
Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C.
Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D.
Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION 21 05 00 page 8 of 9
April 2016 April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
E.
Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F.
Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G.
Place grout around anchors.
H.
Cure placed grout. END OF SECTION 21 05 00
AC Transit Oakland, CA
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPRESSION 21 05 00 page 9 of 9
April 2016 April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
SECTION 22 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
1.3
Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. Transition fittings. Dielectric fittings. Mechanical sleeve seals. Sleeves. Escutcheons. Grout. Plumbing demolition. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. Painting and finishing. Concrete bases. Supports and anchorages.
DEFINITIONS A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.
D.
The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 1. 2.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 page 1 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.4
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B. 1.5
Transition fittings. Dielectric fittings. Mechanical sleeve seals. Escutcheons.
Welding certificates. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
B.
Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. 2.
C.
1.6
Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current.
Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. COORDINATION
A.
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations.
B.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C.
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."
AC Transit Oakland, CA
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 page 2 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1.
2.
2.2
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A.
Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.
B.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.3
JOINING MATERIALS A.
Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1.
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. b.
2.
Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.
E.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 page 3 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 2.4
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
TRANSITION FITTINGS A.
AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined. 1.
Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e. f.
2. 3. 4. 2.5
Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div. JCM Industries. Smith-Blair, Inc. Viking Johnson.
Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A.
Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solderjoint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B.
Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C.
Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F. 1.
Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
2.6
Capitol Manufacturing Co. Central Plastics Company. Eclipse, Inc. Epco Sales, Inc. Hart Industries, International, Inc. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
SLEEVES 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
A.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: longitudinal joint.
B.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C.
Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral water stop, unless otherwise indicated.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 page 4 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation D.
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1.
Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E.
Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F.
PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
G.
Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
2.7
ESCUTCHEONS A.
Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.
B.
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw. 1.
2.8
Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
GROUT A.
Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout. 1. 2. 3.
Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
noncorrosive,
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PLUMBING DEMOLITION A.
Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" and Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.
B.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. 1. 2. 3.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 page 5 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 4.
5. C.
3.2
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality. PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.
B.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
D.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
E.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
H.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
I.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
L.
Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following: 1.
New Piping: a. b. c.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 page 6 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation d. e. f. g. h. i. 2.
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, castbrass type with polished chrome-plated finish. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge with set screw. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type.
Existing Piping: Use the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, castbrass type with chrome-plated finish. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, cast-brass type. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with set screw or spring clips. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, floor-plate type.
M.
Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
N.
Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
O.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.
P.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a.
2. 3.
Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. b. c.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board partitions. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 page 7 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing. 1) 4.
Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.
Q.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
R.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
S.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.
3.3
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.
B.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
D.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. 2.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 page 8 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 3.4
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
PIPING CONNECTIONS A.
Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4.
3.5
Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A.
Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.
B.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D.
Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.6
PAINTING A.
Painting of plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."
B.
Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.
3.7
CONCRETE BASES A.
Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. 1. 2. 3. 4.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 page 9 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 5. 6. 7.
3.8
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete”.
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A.
Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.9
GROUTING A.
Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.
B.
Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C.
Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D.
Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E.
Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F.
Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G.
Place grout around anchors.
H.
Cure placed grout. END OF SECTION 22 05 00
AC Transit Oakland, CA
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 page 10 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
SECTION 22 05 23 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. Brass ball valves. 2. Bronze ball valves. 3. Bronze gate valves. 4. Lubricated plug valves.
B.
Related Sections: 1. 2. 3.
1.3
Division 22 plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules. Division 33 water distribution piping Sections for general-duty and specialty valves for site construction piping.
DEFINITIONS A.
CWP: Cold working pressure.
B.
EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.
C.
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.
D.
NRS: Nonrising stem.
E.
OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.
F.
RS: Rising stem.
G.
SWP: Steam working pressure.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 page 1 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.4
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
SUBMITTALS A.
1.5
Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.
B.
ASME Compliance: 1. 2. 3.
C. 1.6
ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
Use the following precautions during storage: 1. 2.
Maintain valve end protection. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES A.
Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.
B.
Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.
C.
Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Valve Actuator Types: 1. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. 2. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller except plug valves. 3. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 5 plug valves, for each size square plug-valve head.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 page 2 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation E.
Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features: 1. 2.
F.
2.2
Gate Valves: With rising stem. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.
Valve-End Connections: 1. 2. 3.
G.
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. BRASS BALL VALVES
A.
One-Piece, Reduced-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.
2.
Description: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.
B.
Kitz Corporation.
Standard: MSS SP-110. CWP Rating: 400 psig (2760 kPa). Body Design: One piece. Body Material: Forged brass. Ends: Threaded. Seats: PTFE or TFE. Stem: Brass. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. Port: Reduced.
Two-Piece, Full-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. DynaQuip Controls. Flow-Tek, Inc.; a subsidiary of Bray International, Inc. Hammond Valve. Jamesbury; a subsidiary of Metso Automation. Jomar International, LTD. Kitz Corporation. Legend Valve. GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 page 3 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation j. k. l. m. n. 2.3
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Marwin Valve; a division of Richards Industries. Milwaukee Valve Company. NIBCO INC. Red-White Valve Corporation. RuB In
BRONZE BALL VALVES A.
Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.
2.
Description: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.
B.
American Valve, Inc. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. Hammond Valve. Lance Valves; a division of Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc. Legend Valve. Milwaukee Valve Company. NIBCO INC. Red-White Valve Corporation. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Standard: MSS SP-110. SWP Rating: 150 psig. CWP Rating: 600 psig. Body Design: Two piece. Body Material: Bronze. Ends: Threaded. Seats: PTFE or TFE. Stem: Bronze. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. Port: Full.
Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. Hammond Valve. Lance Valves; a division of Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc. Milwaukee Valve Company. NIBCO INC. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 page 4 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 2.
Description: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.
2.4
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Standard: MSS SP-110. SWP Rating: 150 psig. CWP Rating: 600 psig. Body Design: Two piece. Body Material: Bronze. Ends: Threaded. Seats: PTFE or TFE. Stem: Stainless steel. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. Port: Full.
BRONZE GATE VALVES A.
Class 125, NRS, Bronze Gate Valves: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l.
2.
Description: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
B.
American Valve, Inc. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. Crane Co; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division Hammond Valve. Kitz Corporation. Milwaukee Valve Company. NIBCO INC. Powell Valves. Red-White Valve Corporation. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
Standard: MSS SP-80, Type I. CWP Rating: 200 psig. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. Ends: Threaded. Stem: Bronze. Disc: Solid wedge;bronze. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free. Handwheel: Malleable iron.
Class 125, RS, Iron Gate Valves: 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 page 5 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
2.
a.
American Valve, Inc.
b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. Hammond Valve. Kitz Corporation. Milwaukee Valve Company. NIBCO INC. Powell Valves. Red-White Valve Corporation. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
Description: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
2.5
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. CWP Rating: 200 psig. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. Ends: Threaded. Stem: Bronze. Disc: Solid wedge. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.
LUBRICATED PLUG VALVES A.
Class 125, Regular-Gland, Lubricated Plug Valves with Threaded Ends: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.
2.
Description: a. b. c. d. e.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Nordstrom Valves, Inc.
Standard: MSS SP-78, Type II. CWP Rating: 200 psig. Body Material: ASTM A 48/A 48M or ASTM A 126, cast iron with lubricationsealing system. Pattern: Regular Plug: Cast iron or bronze with sealant groove.
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 page 6 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.
B.
Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.
C.
Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
D.
Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
E.
Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2
VALVE INSTALLATION A.
Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D.
Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
3.3
ADJUSTING A.
3.4
Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. 2. 3.
Shutoff Service: Ball valves. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) type. Throttling Service: Ball valves.
B.
If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C.
Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:
AC Transit Oakland, CA
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 page 7 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 3.5
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valveend option is indicated in valve schedules below. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.
DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE A.
Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. 2.
Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, brass or bronze with bronze trim. END OF SECTION 22 05 23
AC Transit Oakland, CA
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 page 8 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
SECTION 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.1 A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
1.2 A.
This Section includes the following hangers and supports for plumbing system piping and equipment: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
B.
Steel pipe hangers and supports. Trapeze pipe hangers. Fiberglass pipe hangers. Metal framing systems. Fiberglass strut systems. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. Fastener systems. Pipe stands. Pipe positioning systems. Equipment supports.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports. Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems" for pipe hangers for firesuppression piping. Division 22 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping" for pipe guides and anchors. Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for vibration isolation devices.
DEFINITIONS
1.3 A.
MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
B.
Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports."
AC Transit Oakland, CA
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 page 1 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.4 A.
Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B.
Design heavy duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system content, and test water.
C.
Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.
SUBMITTALS
1.5 A.
Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical data for each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermal hanger shield insert indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: for multiple piping supports and trapeze hangers. Include design calculations and indicate size and characteristics of components and fabrication details.
C.
Welding certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6 A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
MANUFACTURERS
1.7 A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.
STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
1.8 A.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
B.
Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. Empire Industries, Inc. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. Grinnell Corp. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 page 2 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
GS Metals Corp. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. PHS Industries, Inc. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. Tolco Inc.
TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
1.9 A.
1.10
Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A.
Description: 100-psig minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield.
B.
Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. PHS Industries, Inc. Pipe Shields, Inc. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc. Value Engineered Products, Inc.
C.
Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier.
D.
Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass.
E.
For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
F.
For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
G.
Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.
1.11
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. 2.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 page 3 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
PART 2 - EXECUTION
HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
2.1 A.
Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.
B.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
C.
Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.
D.
Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
E.
Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
F.
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
9. 10.
G.
Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1.
H.
Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow offcenter closure for hanger installation before pipe erection. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction. Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
AC Transit Oakland, CA
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 page 4 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. I.
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. b. c.
10. 11. 12.
J.
Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb . Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. 2. 3.
K.
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. 2. 3. 4.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 11/4 inches. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 page 5 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 5. 6.
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types: a. b. c.
Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.
L.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
M.
Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
N.
Use powder-actuated fasteners instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.
O.
Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
2.2 A.
Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.
B.
Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1.
2.
Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
C.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
D.
Fastener System Installation: 1.
2.
E.
Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 page 6 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
F.
Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
G.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
H.
Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
I.
Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
J.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
K.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.
L.
Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 1.
Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. b. c.
2.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a.
3.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. b. c. d. e.
5. 6. 7.
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a.
4.
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 page 7 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
2.3 A.
Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.
B.
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C.
Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
METAL FABRICATIONS
2.4 A.
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers.
B.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
ADJUSTING
2.5 A.
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
PAINTING
2.6 A.
Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1.
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B.
Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
C.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 22 05 29
AC Transit Oakland, CA
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 page 8 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
SECTION 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
1.3
Equipment labels. Warning signs and labels. Pipe labels. Stencils. Valve tags. Warning tags.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.
C.
Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.
D.
Valve numbering scheme.
E.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 page 1 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
EQUIPMENT LABELS A.
Metal Labels for Equipment: 1. 2. 3.
4. 5. B.
Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
6. 7.
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. Color: Comply with ANSI/ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
C.
Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
D.
Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.2
WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A.
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B.
Letter Color: Black.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 page 2 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
C.
Background Color: Yellow.
D.
Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
E.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 5-1/4 by 3 inch.
F.
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
G.
Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.
H.
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I.
Label Content: instructions.
2.3
Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification
PIPE LABELS A.
General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B.
Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C.
Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
D.
Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. 2.
2.4
Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
STENCILS A.
Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions. 1. 2. 3.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless otherwise indicated.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 page 3 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 2.5
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
VALVE TAGS A.
Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2inch numbers. 1. 2.
B.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. 1.
2.6
Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. Fasteners: Brass S-hook.
Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
WARNING TAGS A.
Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT OPERATE." Color: Yellow background with black lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
3.2
Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A.
Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B.
Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3
PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A.
Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section Interior Painting.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 page 4 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation B.
Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels complying with ASME A13.1, on each piping system. 1. 2.
C.
Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.
Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
3.4
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Near each valve and control device. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION A.
Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B.
Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs: 1.
Valve-Tag Size and Shape: a. b.
2.
Valve-Tag Color: a. b.
3.
Cold Water: Green. Hot Water: Green.
Letter Color: a. b.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches, round. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches round.
Cold Water: Black. Hot Water: Black.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 page 5 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 3.5
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION A.
Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required. END OF SECTION 22 05 53
AC Transit Oakland, CA
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 page 6 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
SECTION 22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
SUMMARY
1.1 A.
Section Includes: 1.
Insulation Materials:
a. b. 2. 3. 4. 5. B.
Flexible elastomeric. Mineral fiber.
Insulating cements. Adhesives. Mastics. Sealants.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."
SUBMITTALS
1.2 A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: 1. 2. 3. 4.
C.
Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels.
Field quality-control reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3 A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00 page 1 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1. 2.
B.
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.
Installer Qualificiations: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticehip programor another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
INSULATION MATERIALS
2.1 A.
Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C.
Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D.
Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c.
E.
Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2.
F.
Comply with
Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ jacket complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m) or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F (55 deg C) is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.042 W/m x K) or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00 page 2 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. Johns Manville; MicroFlex. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation.
INSULATING CEMENTS
2.2 A.
Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting ASTM C 449/C 449M. 1.
Insulating
and
Finishing
Cement:
Comply
with
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c.
Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.
ADHESIVES
2.3 A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d.
C.
Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.
Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
MASTICS
2.4 A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00 page 3 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation B.
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40. Vimasco Corporation; 749.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. Color: White.
SEALANTS
2.5 A.
Joint Sealants: 1.
Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444. Vimasco Corporation; 750.
SECUREMENTS
2.6 A.
Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing or closed seal. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c.
B.
Childers Products; Bands. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.
Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1.
Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00 page 4 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1) 2) 3)
b. c. d.
C.
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series T. GEMCO; Perforated Base. Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.
Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inchdiameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
Wire: 0.080-inch (2.0-mm) nickel-copper alloy. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d.
C & F Wire. Childers Products. PABCO Metals Corporation. RPR Products, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PREPARATION
3.1 A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
B.
Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C.
Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
Comply with
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
3.2 A.
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B.
Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00 page 5 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.
K.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
L.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.
M.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.
N.
For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Vibration-control devices. Testing agency labels and stamps. Nameplates and data plates. Manholes. Handholes. Cleanouts.
PENETRATIONS
3.3 A.
Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: penetrations. 1. 2.
3. 4. B.
Install insulation continuously through roof
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. 2.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00 page 6 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
3. 4.
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
C.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
D.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. 1.
E.
Install insulation
Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" and fireresistive joint sealers.
Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. 2.
Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
3.4 A.
Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B.
Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. 2.
3.
4.
5.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00 page 7 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 6.
7.
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
3.5 A.
Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. 2. 3.
4.
C.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. 2.
D.
Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. 2.
3. 4.
Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION
3.6 A.
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. 2. 3.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00 page 8 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 4.
B.
3. 4.
Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. 2.
D.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. 2.
C.
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
FINISHES
3.7 A.
Equipment and Pipe Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections. 1.
Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a.
Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
B.
Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C.
Color: Final color as selected by Architect. inspection of the completed Work.
D.
Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Vary first and second coats to allow visual
PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00 page 9 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.8 A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections: 1.
2.
C.
Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing fieldapplied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.
PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
3.9 A.
Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B.
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. 2. 3.
3.10 A.
Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. Underground piping. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE Domestic Hot: Insulation shall be one of the following
1.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick.
END OF SECTION 22 07 00
AC Transit Oakland, CA
PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00 page 10 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
SECTION 22 11 13 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
This Section includes water-distribution piping and related components outside the building for water service.
B.
Utility-furnished products include water meters that will be furnished to the site, ready for installation.
1.2
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail precast concrete vault assemblies and indicate dimensions, method of field assembly, and components.
C.
Field quality-control test reports.
D.
Operation and maintenance data.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Regulatory Requirements: 1. 2. 3.
Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of water mains and backflow prevention. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable-water-service piping, including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-suppression waterservice piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.
B.
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
C.
NSF Compliance: 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Comply with NSF 61 for materials for water-service piping and specialties for domestic water.
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 22 11 13 page 1 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.4
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Interruption of Existing Water-Distribution Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water-distribution service according to requirements indicated: 1. 2.
1.5
Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service. Do not proceed with interruption of water-distribution service without Owner's written permission.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate connection to water main with utility company.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PIPE AND FITTINGS A.
Soft Copper Tube: temper. 1.
B.
Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K and ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper. 1.
2.2
ASTM B 88, Type K and ASTM B 88, Type L, water tube, annealed
Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
JOINING MATERIALS A.
Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for commonly used joining materials.
B.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series.
2.3
PIPING SPECIALTIES A.
Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 22 11 13 page 2 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 2.4
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
GATE VALVES A.
Bronze Gate Valves: 1.
2. 3.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product name or designation or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. Hammond Valve. Milwaukee Valve Company. NIBCO INC. Red-White Valve Corporation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EARTHWORK A.
3.2
Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following applications.
B.
Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping.
D.
Flanges, unions, and special fittings may be used, instead of joints indicated, on aboveground piping and piping in vaults.
E.
Aboveground Water-Service Piping NPS 3/4 to NPS 3 shall be hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints.
3.3
VALVE APPLICATIONS A.
Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. Use the following for valves in vaults and aboveground:
AC Transit Oakland, CA
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 22 11 13 page 3 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation a. 3.4
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze, nonrising stem.
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A.
3.5
See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping-system common requirements. PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Make connections NPS 2 and smaller with drilling machine according to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Install service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves in size, quantity, and arrangement required by utility company standards. Install service-saddle assemblies on water-service pipe to be tapped. Position outlets for corporation valves. Use drilling machine compatible with service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves. Drill hole in main. Remove drilling machine and connect water-service piping. Install corporation valves into service-saddle assemblies. Install manifold for multiple taps in water main. Install curb valve in water-service piping with head pointing up and with service box.
B.
Sleeves are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
C.
Mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
3.6
ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION A.
Anchorage, General: Install water-distribution piping with restrained joints. Anchorages and restrained-joint types that may be used include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
3.7
Concrete thrust blocks. Locking mechanical joints. Set-screw mechanical retainer glands. Bolted flanged joints. Heat-fused joints. Pipe clamps and tie rods.
VALVE INSTALLATION A.
AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.
B.
UL/FMG, Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. Install each underground valve and valves in vaults with stem pointing up and with vertical cast-iron indicator post.
C.
MSS Valves: Install as component of connected piping system.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 22 11 13 page 4 of 6
Install each
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation D.
3.8
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Corporation Valves and Curb Valves: Install each underground curb valve with head pointed up and with service box. CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping connections to valves and equipment.
C.
Connect water-distribution piping to existing water main.
D.
Connect water-distribution piping to interior domestic water piping.
3.9
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water.
B.
Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one-and-one-half times working pressure for two hours. 1.
C. 3.10 A.
Increase pressure in 50-psig increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig. Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed limits.
Prepare reports of testing activities. CLEANING Clean and disinfect water-distribution piping as follows: 1. 2.
3.
Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or do as follows: a.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours.
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 22 11 13 page 5 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation b.
c. d. B.
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine remains in water coming from system. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination.
Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities. END OF SECTION 22 11 13
AC Transit Oakland, CA
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 22 11 13 page 6 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
SECTION 22 13 13 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
SUMMARY
1.1 A.
This Section includes gravity-flow, nonpressure sanitary sewerage outside the building, with the following components: 1.
Cleanouts.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.2 A.
Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure, Drainage-Piping Pressure Rating: 10-foot head of water.
SUBMITTALS
1.3 A.
Shop Drawings: For manholes. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames and covers.
B.
Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations.
C.
Field quality-control test reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
2.1 A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1.
2.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.
PIPING MATERIALS
2.2 A.
Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 22 13 13 page 1 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
2.3 A.
Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.
B.
Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.
NONPRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS
2.4 A.
Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
B.
Sleeve Materials: 1. 2.
C.
For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined.
Shielded, Flexible Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1.
Manufacturers: a. b. c.
D.
Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.
Ring-Type, Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring. 1.
Manufacturers: a. b. c.
Fernco Inc. Logan Clay Products Company (The). Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc
CLEANOUTS
2.5 A.
Gray-Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug. 1.
Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Josam Company. MIFAB Manufacturing Inc. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. Watts Industries, Inc. Watts Industries, Inc.; Enpoco, Inc. Div. Zurn Specification Drainage Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group. FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 22 13 13 page 2 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 2. 3.
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Top-Loading Classification: Medium duty. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PIPING APPLICATIONS
3.1 A.
Pipe couplings and fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. 1.
Use nonpressure-type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure sewer piping, unless otherwise indicated. a. b. c.
B.
Shielded flexible couplings for same or minor difference OD pipes. Unshielded, increaser/reducer-pattern, flexible couplings for pipes with different OD. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation.
Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure Sewer Piping: Use any of the following pipe materials for each size range: 1.
NPS 3 and NPS 4: Hubless, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
PIPING INSTALLATION
3.2 A.
General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground sanitary sewerage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.
C.
Install gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following: 1. 2.
Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 2 percent, unless otherwise indicated. Install hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook."
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
3.3 A.
Basic piping joint construction is specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." Where specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 22 13 13 page 3 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation B.
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Join gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following: 1. 2.
Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type, flexible couplings.
CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
3.4 A.
Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe. 1. 2. 3.
B.
Use light-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in earth or unpaved foot-traffic areas. Use medium-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in paved foot-traffic areas. Use heavy-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in vehicle-traffic service areas.
Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface.
CONNECTIONS
3.5 A.
Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping to building's sanitary building drains specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."
B.
Make connections to existing piping . 1.
Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting, plus 6-inch overlap, with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.6 A.
Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. 1. 2.
Submit separate report for each system inspection. Defects requiring correction include the following: a. b. c. d. e.
3. 4. B.
Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 22 13 13 page 4 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance notice. Submit separate report for each test. Hydrostatic Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.
Allowable leakage is maximum of 50 gal./inch of nominal pipe size per mile of pipe, during 24-hour period. Close openings in system and fill with water. Purge air and refill with water. Disconnect water supply. Test and inspect joints for leaks. Option: Test ductile-iron piping according to AWWA C600, "Hydrostatic Testing" Section. Use test pressure of at least 10 psig.
C.
Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
D.
Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.
END OF SECTION 22 13 13
AC Transit Oakland, CA
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 22 13 13 page 5 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
AC Transit Oakland, CA
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 22 13 13 page 6 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
SECTION 22 13 19 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.1 A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
1.2 A.
This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:
1. 2. 3. B.
Cleanouts. Through-penetration firestop assemblies. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for hair interceptors.
DEFINITIONS
1.3 A.
ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
B.
PE: Polyethylene plastic.
C.
PP: Polypropylene plastic.
D.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
SUBMITTALS
1.4 A.
Field quality-control test reports.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5 A.
Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19 page 1 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C.
Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary piping specialty components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
CLEANOUTS
2.1 A.
Exposed Metal Cleanouts : 1.
2. 3.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. B.
Josam Company; Josam Div. MIFAB, Inc. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. Watts Drainage Products Inc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. Josam Company; Blucher-Josam Div.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. Size: Same as connected drainage piping Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. Closure: Countersunk cast-iron plug. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. Closure: Stainless-steel plug with seal.
Metal Floor Cleanouts : 1.
2. 3.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Josam Company; Josam Div. Oatey. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19 page 2 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation f. g. h. i. j. k. l. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. C.
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Watts Drainage Products Inc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. Josam Company; Josam Div. Kusel Equipment Co. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. Josam Company; Blucher-Josam Div.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast-iron soil pipe with cast-iron ferrule cleanout. Size: Same as connected branch. Type: Cast-iron soil pipe with cast-iron ferrule. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron Outlet Connection: Inside calk. Closure: Cast-iron plug. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with set-screws or other device. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy. Frame and Cover Shape: Round Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout. Standard: ASME A112.3.1. Size: Same as connected branch. Housing: Stainless steel. Closure: Stainless steel with seal. Riser: Stainless-steel drainage pipe fitting to cleanout.
Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts: 1.
2. 3.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Josam Company; Josam Div. MIFAB, Inc. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. Watts Drainage Products Inc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. Body: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. Closure: Countersunk, cast-iron plug. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw. Wall Access: Round, nickel-bronze, copper-alloy, or stainless-steel wall-installation frame and cover.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES
2.2 A.
Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies:
AC Transit Oakland, CA
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19 page 3 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.
2.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.
3. 4. 5. 6.
7.
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
ProSet Systems Inc.
Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective cap for plug. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.
MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
2.3 A.
Sleeve Flashing Device: 1.
2. B.
Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device, that forms sleeve for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top of fitting that will extend 2 inches above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.
Stack Flashing Fittings: 1. 2.
Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.
FLASHING MATERIALS
2.4 A.
Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2.
C.
General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0469-inch thickness. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness.
General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft.
Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dip galvanized, millphosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19 page 4 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
D.
Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil minimum thickness.
E.
Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
F.
Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
G.
Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
H.
Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic. 1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
3.1 A.
Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B.
Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
C.
For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.
D.
For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
E.
Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane.
F.
Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.
CONNECTIONS
3.2 A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
AC Transit Oakland, CA
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19 page 5 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation D.
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
FLASHING INSTALLATION
3.3 A.
Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required: 1. 2.
B.
Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.
Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane. 1. 2. 3.
Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty.
C.
Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D.
Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
E.
Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.4 A.
Tests and Inspections: 1. 2.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
PROTECTION
3.5 A.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 22 13 19
AC Transit Oakland, CA
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19 page 6 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
SECTION 22 33 13 Instantaneous Electric Domestic Water Heaters PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
Domestic water heater systems: a.
Tankless, electric water heaters.
b.
Accessories.
1.02
NOT USED
1.03
NOT USED
1.04
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type and size of water heater. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail water heater assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1.
1.05
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer installed and field installed wiring.
C.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of water heaters certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.
D.
Maintenance Data: For water heaters to include in maintenance manuals specified.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from single manufacturer.
B.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water heaters and are based on specific units indicated. Other manufacturers' products complying with requirements may be
AC Transit Oakland, CA
April 2016 Instantaneous Electric Domestic Water Heaters 23 33 13 page 1 of 6
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
considered. Refer to Section 01 60 00, Product Requirements, and Section 01 25 00, Substitution Procedures. C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
D.
ASHRAE Standards: Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed for the following: 1.
1.06
ASHRAE 90.1, Energy Standard of New Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings for commercial water heaters.
WARRANTY A.
Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
B.
Failures include heating elements.
Warranty Period: From date of Final Acceptance: 1.
Heating Elements: 5 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01
GENERAL A.
2.02
Where products and manufacturers are listed, make submittals for proposed comparable products and substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00, Product Requirements, and Section 01 25 00, Substitution Procedures.
MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Point-of-Use, Tankless, Electric Water Heaters (IWH-1): a.
Eemax, Inc.
b.
Chronomite Laboratories, Inc.
c.
Hubbell Heaters.
d.
Niagara Industries, Inc. April 2016 Instantaneous Electric Domestic Water Heaters 23 33 13 page 2 of 6
Operation Control Center Relocation
e. 2.03
Stiebel Eltron, Inc.
POINT-OF-USE, TANKLESS, ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS A.
Comply with UL 499.
B.
Construction: Without hot water storage.
C.
D. 2.04
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
1.
Working Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum.
2.
Tappings: ASME B1.20.1, pipe thread.
3.
Interior Finish: Materials complying with NSF 61, barrier materials for potable-water tank linings.
4.
Jacket: Aluminum or steel, with enameled finish, or plastic.
Heating System: Electric resistance type. 1.
Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.
2.
Safety Control: Automatic, high temperature limit cutoff device or system.
Mounting: Bracket or device for wall mounting.
WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES A.
Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input and include pressure setting less than water heater working pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into tank. 1.
Option: Separate temperature and pressure relief valves are acceptable instead of combination relief valve.
2.
Exception: Omit combination temperature and pressure relief valve for tankless water heater, and furnish pressure relief valve for installation in piping.
B.
Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include pressure setting less than heat exchanger working pressure rating.
C.
IWH-1 includes factory-assembled mixing valve assembly.
D.
Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Water heater manufacturer’s factory fabricated, steel bracket for wall mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
April 2016 Instantaneous Electric Domestic Water Heaters 23 33 13 page 3 of 6
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01
WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A.
3.02
Install water heaters on wall brackets, level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so that controls and devices needing service are accessible.
CONNECTIONS A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect hot and cold water piping with shutoff valves and unions.
D.
Make connections with dielectric fittings where piping is made of dissimilar metal.
E.
Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Division 26. Arrange wiring to allow unit service.
F.
Ground equipment. 1.
3.03
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Engage factory authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B.
In addition to manufacturer's written installation and startup checks, perform the following:
AC Transit Oakland, CA
1.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. malfunctioning controls and equipment.
Replace damaged and
2.
Verify that piping system tests are complete.
3.
Check for piping connection leaks.
4.
Check for clear relief valve inlets, outlets, and drain piping.
5.
Test operation of safety controls, relief valves, and devices.
6.
Energize electric circuits. April 2016 Instantaneous Electric Domestic Water Heaters 23 33 13 page 4 of 6
Operation Control Center Relocation
3.04
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
7.
Adjust operating controls.
8.
Adjust hot water outlet temperature settings. Do not set above 140 deg F unless piping system application requires higher temperature.
DEMONSTRATION A.
Engage factory authorized service representative to train SJRRC's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain water heaters. 1.
Train SJRRC's maintenance personnel on procedures for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.
2.
Review data in maintenance manuals.
3.
Schedule training with SJRRC, through Engineer, with at least 7 days' advance notice.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4.01
MEASUREMENT A.
4.02
No separate measurement will be made for work of this section.
PAYMENT A.
Payment for work of this section will be included in lump sum payment(s) for the applicable building or facility in accordance with the Schedule of Values. END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
April 2016 Instantaneous Electric Domestic Water Heaters 23 33 13 page 5 of 6
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
AC Transit Oakland, CA
April 2016 Instantaneous Electric Domestic Water Heaters 23 33 13 page 6 of 6
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
SECTION 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
1.2
Faucets for lavatories and sinks. Flushometers. Toilet seats. Protective shielding guards. Fixture supports. Water closets. Lavatories.
DEFINITIONS A.
Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities.
B.
Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-, impact-, scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities.
1.3
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Operation and maintenance data.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 page 1 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
C.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.
D.
NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
E.
Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.
F.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M. Porcelain-Enameled, Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M. Solid-Surface-Material Lavatories and Sinks: ANSI/ICPA SS-1. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.
G.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory and sink faucets: 1. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025. 2. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1. 3. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011. 4. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 5. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 6. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61. 7. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 8. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951. 9. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1. 10. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
H.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous fittings: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
I.
Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 10 Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components: 1. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6. 2. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446. 3. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M. 4. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 5. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. 6. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 page 2 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
LAVATORY FAUCETS A.
Lavatory Faucets: 1.
2. 3.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t. u. v. w. x. y. z. aa. bb. cc. dd. ee. ff. gg. hh. ii. jj.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
American Standard Companies, Inc. Bradley Corporation. Chicago Faucets. Delta Faucet Company. Eljer. Elkay Manufacturing Co. Fisher Manufacturing Co. Grohe America, Inc. Just Manufacturing Company. Kohler Co. Moen, Inc. Royal Brass Mfg. Co. Sayco; a Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. Company. Speakman Company. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation. American Standard Companies, Inc. Bradley Corporation. Brasstech Inc.; Newport Brass Div. Broadway Collection. Central Brass Manufacturing Company. Chicago Faucets. Delta Faucet Company. Eljer. Elkay Manufacturing Co. Fisher Manufacturing Co. Franke Consumer Products, Inc.; Kitchen Systems Div. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. Geberit Manufacturing, Inc. Grohe America, Inc. Hansgrohe Inc. Hydrotek International, Inc. Intersan Manufacturing Company. Just Manufacturing Company. Kohler Co. Moen, Inc. PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 page 3 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
kk. Pegler, Ltd. ll. Price Pfister, Inc. mm. Rohl LLC. nn. Royal Brass Mfg. Co. oo. Sayco; a Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. Company. pp. Speakman Company. qq. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. rr. Water Management, Inc. ss. Wolverine Brass, Inc. tt. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation. uu. American Standard Companies, Inc. vv. Bradley Corporation. ww. Brasstech Inc.; Newport Brass Div. xx. Broadway Collection. yy. Central Brass Manufacturing Company. zz. Chicago Faucets. aaa. Delta Faucet Company. bbb. Eljer. ccc. Elkay Manufacturing Co. ddd. Fisher Manufacturing Co. eee. Franke Consumer Products, Inc.; Kitchen Systems Div. fff. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. ggg. Geberit Manufacturing, Inc. hhh. Grohe America, Inc. iii. Hansgrohe Inc. jjj. Hydrotek International, Inc. kkk. Intersan Manufacturing Company. lll. Just Manufacturing Company. mmm.Kohler Co. nnn. Moen, Inc. ooo. Paul Decorative Products. ppp. Pegler, Ltd. qqq. Phoenix Products, Inc. rrr. Price Pfister, Inc. sss. Rohl LLC. ttt. Royal Brass Mfg. Co. uuu. Sayco; a Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. Company. vvv. Sterling Plumbing Group, Inc. www. St. Thomas Creations. xxx. Speakman Company. yyy. Symmons Industries, Inc. zzz. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. aaaa. Water Management, Inc. bbbb. WhiteRock Corp. cccc. Wolverine Brass, Inc. dddd. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation. eeee. American Standard Companies, Inc. ffff. Delta Faucet Company. gggg. Eljer. hhhh. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. iiii. Moen, Inc. AC Transit Oakland, CA
PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 page 4 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
jjjj. Phoenix Products, Inc. kkkk. Sayco; a Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. Company. llll. Sterling Plumbing Group, Inc. mmmm. WhiteRock Corp. nnnn. Wolverine Brass, Inc. oooo. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. pppp. Phoenix Products, Inc. qqqq. Sterling Plumbing Group, Inc. rrrr. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Operation 4.
Description: Single-control nonmixing valve. Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l.
2.2
Body Material: Commercial, solid brass. Finish: Polished brass. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm Centers: 3-3/8 inches Single hole. Mounting: Deck, exposed. Valve Handle(s): Push button. Inlet(s): NPS 1/2 male shank. Spout: Rigid type. Spout Outlet: Aerator Operation: Self-closing, metering. Drain: Grid. Tempering Device: Mechanical.
SINK FAUCETS A.
Sink Faucets: 1.
2. 3.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
American Standard Companies, Inc. Bradley Corporation. Broadway Collection. Chicago Faucets. Delta Faucet Company. Dormont Manufacturing Company. Eljer. Elkay Manufacturing Co. Fisher Manufacturing Co. Grohe America, Inc. Just Manufacturing Company. PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 page 5 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t. u. v. w. x. y. z. aa. bb. cc. dd. ee. ff. gg. hh. ii. jj. kk. ll. mm. nn. oo. pp. qq. rr. ss. tt. uu. vv. ww. xx. yy. zz. aaa. bbb. ccc. ddd. eee. fff. ggg. hhh. iii. jjj. AC Transit Oakland, CA
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Kohler Co. Moen, Inc. Royal Brass Mfg. Co. Sayco; a Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. Company. Speakman Company. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation. American Standard Companies, Inc. Bradley Corporation. Brasstech Inc.; Newport Brass Div. Broadway Collection. Central Brass Manufacturing Company. Chicago Faucets. Delta Faucet Company. Eljer. Elkay Manufacturing Co. Fisher Manufacturing Co. Franke Consumer Products, Inc.; Kitchen Systems Div. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. Grohe America, Inc. Hansgrohe Inc. Hydrotek International, Inc. Intersan Manufacturing Company. Just Manufacturing Company. Kohler Co. Moen, Inc. Pegler, Ltd. Price Pfister, Inc. Rohl LLC. Royal Brass Mfg. Co. Sayco; a Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. Company. Speakman Company. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. Water Management, Inc. Wolverine Brass, Inc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation. American Standard Companies, Inc. Bradley Corporation. Brasstech Inc.; Newport Brass Div. Central Brass Manufacturing Company. Chicago Faucets. Delta Faucet Company. Eljer. Elkay Manufacturing Co. Fisher Manufacturing Co. Franke Consumer Products, Inc.; Kitchen Systems Div. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. Grohe America, Inc. Hansgrohe Inc. Hydrotek International, Inc. Intersan Manufacturing Company. PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 page 6 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
kkk. Just Manufacturing Company. lll. Kohler Co. mmm.Moen, Inc. nnn. Paul Decorative Products. ooo. Pegler, Ltd. ppp. Phoenix Products, Inc. qqq. Price Pfister, Inc. rrr. Rohl LLC. sss. Royal Brass Mfg. Co. ttt. Sayco; a Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. Company. uuu. Sterling Plumbing Group, Inc. vvv. St. Thomas Creations. www. Speakman Company. xxx. Symmons Industries, Inc. yyy. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. zzz. Water Management, Inc. aaaa. WhiteRock Corp. bbbb. Wolverine Brass, Inc. cccc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation. dddd. American Standard Companies, Inc. eeee. Delta Faucet Company. ffff. Eljer. gggg. Moen, Inc. hhhh. Phoenix Products, Inc. iiii. Sayco; a Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. Company. jjjj. Sterling Plumbing Group, Inc. kkkk. WhiteRock Corp. llll. Wolverine Brass, Inc. mmmm. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. nnnn. Sterling Plumbing Group, Inc. oooo. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Operation. 4.
Description: Kitchen faucet without spray. Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Body Material: Commercial, solid brass. Finish: Polished brass. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm, unless otherwise indicated. Mixing Valve: Two-lever handle. Centers: 4 inches. Mounting: Deck. Handle(s): Wrist blade, 4 inches. Spout Type: Rigid gooseneck. Spout Outlet: Aerator. Operation: Noncompression, manual. Drain: Crumb catcher.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 page 7 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 2.3
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
FLUSHOMETERS A.
Flushometers: 1.
2. 3.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m.
4.
Description: Flushometer for water-closet-type fixture. Include brass body with corrosion-resistant internal components, non-hold-open feature, control stop with check valve, vacuum breaker, copper or brass tubing, and polished chrome-plated finish on exposed parts. a. b. c. d. e.
2.4
Coyne & Delany Co. Delta Faucet Company. Sloan Valve Company. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation. Hydrotek International, Inc. Sloan Valve Company. TOTO USA, Inc. Coyne & Delany Co. Delta Faucet Company. Hydrotek International, Inc. Sloan Valve Company. TOTO USA, Inc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation.
Internal Design: piston operation. Style: Exposed. Inlet Size: NPS 1. Trip Mechanism: Oscillating, lever-handle actuator. Consumption: 1.28 gallons per flush
TOILET SEATS A.
Toilet Seats: 1.
2. 3.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
American Standard Companies, Inc. PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 page 8 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. 4.
Bemis Manufacturing Company. Centoco Manufacturing Corp. Church Seats. Eljer. Kohler Co. Olsonite Corp. Sanderson Plumbing Products, Inc.; Beneke Div. Sperzel. Bemis Manufacturing Company. Centoco Manufacturing Corp. Church Seats. Kohler Co. Olsonite Corp. Pressalit A/S. Sanderson Plumbing Products, Inc.; Beneke Div. Sperzel.
Description: Toilet seat for water-closet-type fixture. a. b. c. d. e. f.
2.5
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Material: Molded, solid plastic. Configuration: Open front without cover. Size: Elongated. Hinge Type: SC, self-sustaining, check. Class: Standard commercial. Color: White.
PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS A.
Protective Shielding Pipe Covers: 1.
2.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
3.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Engineered Brass Co. Insul-Tect Products Co.; a Subsidiary of MVG Molded Products. McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc. Plumberex Specialty Products Inc. TCI Products. TRUEBRO, Inc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.
Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and coldwater supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 page 9 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 2.6
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
FIXTURE SUPPORTS A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
C.
Lavatory Supports: 1. 2.
2.7
Josam Company. MIFAB Manufacturing Inc. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
Description: Type II, lavatory carrier with concealed arms and tie rod for wall-mounting, lavatory-type fixture. Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.
WATER CLOSETS A.
Water Closets,
: 1.
2. 3.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
American Standard Companies, Inc. Barclay Products, Ltd. Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products. Duravit USA, Inc. Eljer. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. Kohler Co. Mansfield Plumbing Products, Inc. Peerless Pottery, Inc. Sanitarios Azteca, S.A. de C.V. Sterling Plumbing Group, Inc. St. Thomas Creations. TOTO USA, Inc. Water Management, Inc. Capizzi. St. Thomas Creations. PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 page 10 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation r. s. t. u. v. w. x. y. z. aa. bb. cc. dd. ee. ff. gg. hh. ii. jj. kk. ll. 4. 5.
2.8
Bowl Type: Elongated with siphon-jet design. Include bolt caps matching fixture. Height: Accessible. Design Consumption: 1.28 gallons per flush. Trip Mechanism: Lever-handle actuator. Color: White
Supply: NPS 1 chrome-plated brass or copper with screwdriver stop. Style: Flushometer valve. a. b. c.
8. 9.
American Standard Companies, Inc. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. Kohler Co. Mansfield Plumbing Products, Inc. St. Thomas Creations. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products. Eljer. Peerless Pottery, Inc. Water Management, Inc. Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. American Standard Companies, Inc. Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. Capizzi. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products. Eljer. Kohler Co. Mansfield Plumbing Products, Inc. Peerless Pottery, Inc. Sanitarios Azteca, S.A. de C.V. St. Thomas Creations. TOTO USA, Inc.
Description: Accessible, wall-mounted, rear-outlet, vitreous-china fixture designed for flushometer valve operation. Style: One piece. a. b. c. d. e.
6. 7.
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Bowl Type: Elongated with siphon-jet design. Include bolt caps matching fixture. Height: Accessible Design Consumption: 1.28 gallons per flush.
Flushometer: American Standard #6065.121 Toilet Seat: Olsonite #95SSCT
LAVATORIES A.
Lavatories, : 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 page 11 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 2. 3.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p.
4.
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
American Standard Companies, Inc. Commercial Enameling Company. Eljer. Kohler Co. American Standard Companies, Inc. Barclay Products, Ltd. Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products. Eljer. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. Kohler Co. Mansfield Plumbing Products, Inc. Peerless Pottery, Inc. Sterling Plumbing Group, Inc. St. Thomas Creations. TOTO USA, Inc.
Description: Accessible, wall-mounting, vitreous-china fixture. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
Type: Ledge back. Size: 20 by 18 inches rectangular. Faucet Hole Punching: One hole. Faucet Hole Location: Top. Color: White. Faucet: Metering push handle. Supplies: NPS 3/8 chrome-plated copper with stops. Drain: Grid. 1)
i. j.
Location: Near back of bowl.
Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/4 by NPS 1-1/2 chrome-plated, cast-brass P-trap; and wall escutcheon. Protective Shielding Guard(s): Plumberex “Trap Gear”
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions.
B.
Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures. 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures. PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 page 12 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 2. 3.
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.
C.
Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.
D.
Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building substrate.
E.
Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.
F.
Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
G.
Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
H.
Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system.
I.
Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage system.
J.
Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.
K.
Install toilet seats on water closets.
L.
Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
M.
Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves.
N.
Install traps on fixture outlets. 1. 2.
Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.
O.
Install escutcheons at piping wall and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
P.
Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
AC Transit Oakland, CA
PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 page 13 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 3.2
Invitation for Bid #2016-1370
CONNECTIONS A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
C.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
D.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.
B.
Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.
C.
Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
D.
Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.
3.4
PROTECTION A.
Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B.
Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner. END OF SECTION 22 40 00
AC Transit Oakland, CA
PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 page 14 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
SECTION 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
B. 1.2
1.3
Section Includes: 1.
Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2.
Transition fittings.
3.
Dielectric fittings.
4.
Mechanical sleeve seals.
5.
Sleeves.
6.
HVAC demolition
7.
Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
8.
Painting and finishing.
9.
Supports and anchorage.
10.
Training requirements.
The requirements of this section apply to all sections in Division 23.
DEFINITIONS A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.
Mechanical work must include furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and services required for providing heating, ventilating, air conditioning and hydronic piping systems.
B.
System layouts are generally diagrammatic and location of equipment is approximate and they don’t show all offsets. Contractor shall field verify existing condition and coordinate
AC Transit Oakland, CA
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 page 1 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
with other trades field offsets of any existing piping as necessary for a clear obstruction shall not be additional cost to the AC Transit. Exact routing of pipes, ducts, etc and location of equipment is to be governed by structural conditions and obstructions. Equipment requiring maintenance and inspection is to be readily accessible. C.
Provide finished work, tested and ready for operation including apparatus, appliances, materials and work. Provide incidental accessories necessary to make work complete and ready for operation without additional expense to the owner.
D.
Before beginning work or ordering materials, contractor shall consult Architect for clarification of discrepancies between or questionable intent, of contract documents.
E.
Contractor shall visit the site and field survey the existing conditions prior to bid. Any site conditions which may cause significant deviation from the design drawings shall be brought to the attention of the owner representative for clarification prior to bid.
F.
Substitution of Equipment Items 1.
1.4
Manufacturer/product listed in equipment schedule forms basis of design. All other manufacturer’s products are substitutions. Contractor to submit drawings and details of redesign required due to substitution of equipment items to engineer for approval. Expense for architect/engineer review shall be additional service and shall be approved by the owner.
SUBMITTALS A.
Drawings and Submittal Review: 1.
Where a conflict exists between drawings and specifications, promptly notify architect for interpretation and resolution. The most stringent shall be based for bid.
2.
In checking drawings and submittals data, the reviewer makes every effort to detect errors and omissions. Failure of the reviewer to detect errors or omissions during the review of drawings and submittal data shall not relieve the vendors and/or contractor of his/her responsibility to comply with the contract documents.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit detailed fabrication drawings for metal and wood supports and anchorage for mechanical materials and equipment.
C.
Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings to a 1/4 inch equals 1 foot scale or larger. Detail major elements, components, and systems of HVAC equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Show space requirements for installation and access. Show where sequence and coordination of installations are important to the efficient flow of the work. Include the following: 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Proposed locations of piping, equipment, and materials. Include the following: a.
Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve stem movement.
b.
Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.
c.
Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance.
d.
Equipment service connections and support details.
e.
Clearance from existing ducts/pipes and electrical elements.
f.
Fire rated wall and floor penetrations. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 – page 2 of 14
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
g.
1.5
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.
2.
Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction.
3.
Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.
4.
Reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air outlets and inlets, light fixtures, communication systems components, sprinklers, and other ceiling mounted items.
5.
Nonconforming M/E work installed within designated coordination areas is subject to removal and replacement by the installing contractor at no additional cost to owner
6.
It is the intent of this provision to find, bring forth, and resolve potential constructability problems prior to actual construction, thereby allowing for the resolution of issues before construction cost and schedule are impacted.
D.
Samples: Submit samples of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for each identification material and device.
E.
Certificates: Submit copies of required certificates, certifications, and reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
B.
Regulatory Requirements: 1.
Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code--Steel.
2.
Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, Code for Pressure Piping.
b.
Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current.
3.
Welding: Perform welding in accordance with Factory Mutual Hot Water Permit conditions.
4.
ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.
Equipment Selection: Should equipment of greater or larger power, dimensions, capacities, and ratings be proposed by Contractor, written approval of Engineer is required prior to ordering equipment. Submit written request for a substitution and indicate provisions for connecting HVAC and electrical services and upgrading and increasing circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and equipment spaces at no additional cost. 1.
C.
a.
Where minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of the equipment are specified, provide equipment that meets design requirements and commissioning requirements.
Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Should equipment of higher electrical characteristics be proposed by Contractor, written approval of Engineer is required prior to ordering equipment. Submit written request for a substitution and indicate provisions for connecting and modifying electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 page 3 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1. 1.6
1.7
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B.
Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. When stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor.
C.
Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.
COORDINATION A.
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for HVAC installations. See Section 23 05 48, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment, for piping, ductwork, and equipment seismic restraint requirements.
B.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured in place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C.
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Section 08 31 00, Access Doors and Panels.
D.
Coordinate HVAC equipment installation with other building components. 1.
Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for HVAC installations.
E
Sequence, coordination, and integrates installations of HVAC materials and equipment for efficient flow of work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.
F.
Coordinate connection of HVAC systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies.
G.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completion of covering and painting, where devices are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
GENERAL A.
Where products and manufacturers are listed, make submittals for proposed comparable products for review and approval.
B.
Pipe, Tube, Fittings: Refer to individual piping sections for requirements for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 – page 4 of 14
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
C.
Joining Materials: 1.
Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. a.
b.
1)
Full Face Type: For flat face, Class 125, cast iron and cast bronze flanges.
2)
Narrow Face Type: For raised face, Class 250, cast iron and steel flanges.
AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B32, lead-free alloys. Include water flushable flux according to ASTM B813.
4.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.
5.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
6.
Flanged, Ductile Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbon steel bolts and nuts.
7.
Copper Tubing:
b. c. d.
Solder for Copper Pipe, 4 inch and smaller: No lead for copper pipes above ground. Sil-Fos silver alloy for pipe underground and for piping above ground having a continuous street main pressure of 100 psi or more. Wire solder only; paste mixed solder not permitted. Flux: As recommended by manufacturer of solder.
Transition Fittings: 1.
AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined. a. b.
2.
Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: 1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. 2) Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated. 3) JCM Industries. 4) Smith-Blair, Inc. 5) Viking Johnson.
Couplings: Iron body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match outside diameters of plain-end, pressure pipes. a.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8 inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
2.
a.
D.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Sleeve: ASTM A126, Class B, gray iron. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 page 5 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation b. c. d. e. E.
Followers: ASTM A47, Grade 32510 or ASTM A536 ductile iron. Gaskets: Rubber. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111. Finish: Enamel paint.
Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals, to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. 1.
Fitting: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld neck end types and matching piping system materials.
2.
Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
3.
Dielectric Unions: Factory fabricated, union assembly, for 250 psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F temperature. a.
4.
5.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: 1) Capitol Manufacturing Co., member Phoenix Forge Group. 2) Central Plastics Company. 3) Hart Industries, International, Inc. 4) Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 5) Wilkins Water Control Products, div. Zurn Industries.
Dielectric Flanges: Factory fabricated, companion flange assembly, for 150 or 300 psig minimum pressure to suit system pressures. a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: 1) Capitol Manufacturing Co., member Phoenix Forge Group 2) Central Plastics Company. 3) Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Dielectric Flange Insulation Kits: Field assembled, companion flange assembly, full face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. a. b.
Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150 psig or 300 psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: 1) Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2) Calpico, Inc. 3) Central Plastics Company. 4) Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
6.
Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized steel coupling, having inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining, with threaded ends and 300 psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F temperature.
7.
Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple, having inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types and 300 psig working pressure at 225 deg F temperature. a.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: 1) Perfection Corporation, subsidiary of American Motor Company 2) Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. 3) Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. 4) Victaulic Company.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 – page 6 of 14
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
F.
Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. 1.
Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
2.
Pressure Plates: Carbon steel; include two for each sealing element.
3.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
4.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: a. b. c. d.
G.
1.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: 0.0239 inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.
2.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
3.
Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated wall pipe equivalent to ductile iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. Cast Iron Sleeve Fittings: Commercially made, sleeve having integral clamping flange, with clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing. 1) Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws
4.
Steel Sheet Metal: 0.020 inch minimum thickness (aka 24 gauge) or heavier, galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.
5.
Wall Penetration Systems: Wall sleeve assembly, consisting of housing, gaskets, and pipe sleeve, with one mechanical joint end conforming to AWWA C110 and 1 plain pipe sleeve end. a. b.
c. d.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Advance Products & Systems, Inc. Calpico, Inc. Metraflex Company Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
Sleeves:
a.
H.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Penetrating Pipe Deflection: 5 percent without leakage. Housing: Ductile iron casting having waterstop and anchor ring, with ductile iron gland, steel studs and nuts, and rubber gasket conforming to AWWA C111, of housing and gasket size as required to fit penetrating pipe. Pipe Sleeve: AWWA C151, ductile iron pipe. Housing to Sleeve Gasket: Rubber or neoprene, push on type, of manufacturer's design.
Escutcheons: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. 1.
One Piece, Deep Pattern Type: Deep drawn, box shaped brass with polished chrome plated finish.
2.
One Piece, Cast Brass Type: Set screw; Finish: Polished chrome plated.
3.
One Piece, Stamped Steel Type: Set screw; Finish: Chrome plated finish.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 page 7 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
I.
4.
One Piece, Floor Plate Type: Cast iron floor plate.
5.
Inside Diameter: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping.
6.
Outside Diameter: Completely cover opening.
Grout: ASTM C1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout; premixed and factory packaged. 1.
Characteristics: Post hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2.
Design Mix: 5000 psi minimum 28 day compressive strength.
3.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: a. b.
J.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Masterflow 928, BASF Building Systems. Hi-Flow Grout, Euclid Chemical Company.
Protective Wrapping for Underground Pipe and Fittings: 1.
Copper Pipe, Cast Iron Soil Pipe, and Ductile Pipe and Fittings: Factory applied 8 mil thick polethylene pipe encasement complying with AWWA C105, Class C.
2.
Steel Pipe and Fittings: Standard pipe protection, X-Tru-Coat, 20 mil thick or Scotchkote 6233 fusion bonded epoxy powder coating, 12 mil thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PIPING SYSTEMS COMMON REQUIREMENTS A.
Install piping according to requirements for piping systems.
B.
General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
C.
Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
D.
Install piping and components:
AC Transit Oakland, CA
1.
In concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
2.
Indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
3.
Exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited, except where indicated.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 – page 8 of 14
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
4.
Tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal.
5.
Piping to allow application of insulation plus 1 inch clearance around insulation.
6.
Above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
7.
To permit valve servicing.
8.
At indicated slopes.
9.
Free of sags and bends.
10.
To allow application of insulation.
E.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
F.
Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
G.
Install couplings according to manufacturer's printed instructions.
H.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
I.
Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following: 1.
Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern type.
2.
Chrome Plated Piping: One piece, cast brass type with polished chrome plated finish.
3.
Insulated Piping: Cast brass or stamped steel, with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome plated finish; one piece, stamped steel type with spring clips.
4.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, stamped steel type.
5.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass type with polished chrome plated finish.
6.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, cast brass type with rough brass finish.
7.
Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, cast brass type.
8.
Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One piece, floor plate type.
9.
Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set screw.
10.
Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast iron floor plates.
11.
Piping in Utility Areas: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set-screw or spring clips.
J.
Sleeves are not required for core drilled holes.
K.
Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 page 9 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation L.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a.
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
2.
Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3.
Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4 inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a.
4.
3.2
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.
Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Section 07 90 00, Joint Protection, for materials and installation.
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.
Join pipe and fittings according to requirements for piping systems.
B.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
D.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B813, water flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B828 or CDA's Copper Tube Handbook using lead free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's Brazing Handbook, Pipe and Tube chapter, using copper phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.
2.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
3.
Note internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
4.
Align threads at point of assembly.
5.
Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being threaded.
G.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators.
H.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 – page 10 of 14
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
I.
J.
3.3
3.4
3.5
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Piping Connections: Make connections according to requirements: 1.
Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.
2.
Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.
3.
Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.
4.
Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.
Protective Wrapping for Underground Metal Pipe and Fittings: Protected piping with factory applied wrapping. 1.
Underground copper pipe, cast iron soil pipe, and ductile iron pipe and fittings factory-encased in 10 mil thick polyethylene conforming to AWWA C105, Class C.
2.
Underground steel pipe and fittings factory-coated with standard pipe protection.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION COMMON REQUIREMENTS A.
Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.
B.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D.
Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
TRADE INTERFERENCES A.
Determine exact location of equipment, ductwork and piping on the job, being affected by existing conditions of the building.
B.
Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services which are to remain. If temporary shutdown of services is unavoidable, consult with owner representative as to dates, procedures and estimated duration of down time period at least ten working days prior to date of shutdown.
C.
Determine exact location of existing ductwork and pipes or installations encountered in performance of work and provide suitable protection, support and maintenance.
D.
If existing active ductwork and pipes are encountered which require relocation, consult architect and engineer for approval.
HVAC DEMOLITION A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Disconnect, demolish and remove HVAC systems, equipments and components indicated to be removed.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 page 11 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
3.6
3.7
B.
Piping to be removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping watertight with same or compatible piping material.
C.
Duct to be removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and sealed airtight.
D.
Equipment to be removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
E.
If pipe, insulation or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.
PAINTING A.
Painting of HVAC systems, equipment, and components is specified in Section 09 91 00, Painting.
B.
Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.
CUTTING AND PATCHING A.
3.8
Prior to the completion of the contract, submit 3 identified copies of the operation and maintenance instructions with parts lists for the equipment used. The instructions and parts lists must be indexed and bound in a manual form and must be complete and adequate for the equipment installed. Inadequate or incomplete material must be returned. The contractor must resubmit adequate and complete manuals at no expense to the Caltrans.
WARRANTY A.
3.10
Cutting and Patching: Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and surfaces as required to accommodate HVAC work. Perform cutting and patching in accordance specified requirements. Obtain written permission from structural engineer prior to cutting into structural members. Restore surfaces to original new condition. Restore fire ratings as applicable.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
3.9
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Warranties and Guarantees: Manufacturer’s warranties and guarantees for materials and equipment used in the work must be delivered to the owner representative at the job site prior to acceptance of the contract.
SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION A.
Above ground piping and ducts: Markers must be provided on lines which are either exposed or concealed in accessible spaces. For piping systems, except drain and vent lines, indicate the fluid convoyed or its abbreviation, either by preprinted markers or stenciled markings and include arrows to show the direction of flow. Colors must comply with ANSI Standard: A13.1 Locate markers at ends of lines, near major branches and other interruptions including equipment in the line, where lines pass through penetrations in floors, walls, or ceilings or otherwise pass into inaccessible spaces, and 50-foot maximum intervals along exposed portions of the lines. Making of short branches and repetitive branches for equipment connections is not required.
B.
Valves: Valve tags must be provided on all valves of each piping system, excluding check valves, valves within equipment, faucets, stops and shut-off valves at fixtures and other repetitive terminal units. Provide brass or plastic laminate tags. Prepare and submit a
AC Transit Oakland, CA
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 – page 12 of 14
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
tagged valve schedule, listing each valve by tag number, location and piping service. Valve schedule must be mounted in a glazed frame at a location authorized by owner representative. C.
Equipment: all equipment must be identified with a plastic laminated, engraved nameplate which bears the unit mark number as indicated on the drawings (for example, AC-4). Provide 1/2 inch high lettering, white on black background. Nameplates must be permanently secured to the unit.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 page 13 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
AC Transit Oakland, CA
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 – page 14 of 14
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 SECTION 23 05 23
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
B.
Section Includes: 1.
Bronze ball valves.
2.
Bronze check valves.
3.
Bronze gate valves.
Related Sections: 1.
1.2
SUBMITTALS A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
ASME Compliance: ASME B31.1 for power piping valves and ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. 1.
1.4
Section 23 09 00, Instrumentation and Control for HVAC.
Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold-water piping valves unless referenced.
B.
ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and design criteria.
C.
NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1.
Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
2.
Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3.
Set globe valves closed to prevent rattling.
4.
Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5.
Block check valves in either closed or open position.
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 page 1 of 4
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation B.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Use the following precautions during storage: 1.
Maintain valve end protection.
2.
Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
GENERAL A.
2.2
2.3
Where products and manufacturers are listed, make submittals for proposed comparable products for review and approval..
VALVES A.
Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.
C.
Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Valve Actuators: 1.
Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.
2.
Lever Handle: For quarter turn valves NPS 6 and smaller, except plug valves.
E.
Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.
F.
Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.
G.
Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
BRONZE BALL VALVES A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: 1.
Two Piece, Copper Alloy Ball Valves: a. b. c. d.
Nibco Inc. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Kitz Or Equal
B.
Copper Alloy Ball Valves, Nibco T-580; Watts B-6000
C.
Two Piece, Copper Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with chrome plated bronze ball, PTFE or TFE seats, threaded ends and 400 psig minimum CWP rating.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 page 2 of 4
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 2.4
BRONZE CHECK VALVES A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: 1.
Check valve (1-1/2 and smaller) must be silent spring loaded type. a. b. c. d.
2.5
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Nibco Inc. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Kitz Or Equal
B.
Nibco/Scott T-480; Kitz 26
C.
Threaded bronze body, mylon or t eflon disc, beryllium or stainless steel helical spring and shaft. Class 125 and same size as pipe in which installed.
BRONZE GATE VALVES A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: 1.
Gate Valve (2-1/2 inch and smaller) a. b. c. d.
Nibco Inc. Crane Jenkins Or Equal
B.
Nibco T-113; Crane 438; Jenkins 310J
C.
Bronze body and trim, removable bonnet and non rising stem. Threaded ends, class 125 and same size as pipe in which installed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B.
Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.
C.
Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.
D.
Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 page 3 of 4
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
3.2
E.
Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
F.
Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
VALVE APPLICATIONS A.
B.
3.3
Refer to piping sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1.
Shutoff Service: Ball valves.
2.
Throttling Service: ball, or gate valves.
If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted.
VALVE INSTALLATION A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
C.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
D.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
E.
Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
F.
Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 1.
3.4
Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.
3.5
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B813, water flushable, lead free flux; ASTM B32, lead free alloy solder; and ASTM B828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
ADJUSTING A.
Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 23 page 4 of 4
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 SECTION 23 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and equipment.
Section 23 05 48, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
DEFINITIONS A.
MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.
B.
Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B.
Design heavy duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
C.
Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.
D.
Design and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction for seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical data for each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermal hanger shield insert indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for multiple piping supports and trapeze hangers. Include design calculations and indicate size and characteristics of components and fabrication details.
C.
Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Regulatory Requirements: 1.
Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
AC Transit HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Oakland, CA 23 05 29 page 1 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation B.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of shop drawings and calculations for each multiple pipe support, trapeze, and seismic restraint by a qualified professional engineer. 1.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the State of California and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of hangers and supports that are similar to those indicated in material, design, and extent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
GENERAL A.
2.2
Where products and manufacturers are listed, make submittals for proposed comparable products for review and approval.
MATERIALS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: 1.
Pipe Hangers: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
2.
Channel Support Systems: a. b. c. d.
3.
Carpenter & Paterson Ltd. PHS Industries, Inc. Pipe Shields, Inc., subsidiary Piping Technology & Products, Inc. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Power Actuated Fastener Systems: a. b. c. d.
B.
Cooper B-Line, div. Cooper Industries Power-Strut brand, Tyco Electrical and Metal Products GS Metals Corp. Unistrut Corp.
Thermal Hanger Shield Inserts: a. b. c. d.
4.
Cooper B-Line, div. Cooper Industries Carpenter & Paterson Ltd. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. Grinnell Mechanical Products, div. Tyco Fire and Building Products GS Metals Corp. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. PHS Industries, Inc.
Gunnebo Fastening, div. Gunnebo Industrier AB Hilti, Inc. Ramset Fastening Systems, div. Illinois Tool Works, Inc. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory fabricated components.
AC Transit HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Oakland, CA 23 05 29 page 2 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
C.
D.
2.3
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
1.
Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field applied finish.
2.
Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory fabricated components for field assembly. 1.
Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
2.
Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
Thermal Hanger Shield Inserts: 100 psi minimum compressive strength insulation, encased in sheet metal shield. 1.
Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C552, Type I cellular glass or water repellent treated, ASTM C533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier.
2.
Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C552, Type I cellular glass or water repellent treated, ASTM C533, Type I calcium silicate.
3.
For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe.
4.
For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
5.
Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.
See Section 23 05 48, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment, for piping and equipment seismic restraint requirements.
B.
Power Actuated Drive Pin Fasteners: Powder actuated type, drive pin attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
C.
Mechanical Anchor Fasteners: Insert type attachments with pull out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
D.
Structural Steel: ASTM A36 steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.
E.
Grout: ASTM C1107, Grade B, factory mixed and packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic cement grout. 1.
Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and exterior applications.
2.
Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
3.
Design Mix: 5000 psi 28 day compressive strength.
AC Transit HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Oakland, CA 23 05 29 page 3 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A.
B.
Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. 1.
Do not hang one pipe from another, or from ductwork or conduits.
2.
Do not use chains or wire as hangers.
Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field assembled channel systems. 1.
C.
Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Heavy Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy duty trapezes. 1.
Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.
2.
Field fabricate from ASTM A36 steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.
D.
Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
E.
Install power actuated drive pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators licensed by power actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to power actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
F.
Install mechanical anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
G.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.
H.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
I.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
J.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and for maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, Building Services Piping, are not exceeded.
AC Transit HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Oakland, CA 23 05 29 page 4 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation K.
Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 1.
Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. b. c.
2.
3.
Option: Thermal hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. b. c. d. e.
3.3
Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. Option: Thermal hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees. a.
4.
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. a. b.
3.2
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
L.
Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.
M.
Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
N.
Thermal Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A.
Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support equipment above floor.
B.
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
METAL FABRICATION A.
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy duty steel trapezes and equipment supports. Comply with requirements of Section 05 60 00, Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications.
B.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
AC Transit HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Oakland, CA 23 05 29 page 5 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation C.
3.4
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 1.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3.
Remove welding flux immediately.
4.
Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS A.
Specific hanger requirements are specified in sections specifying equipment and systems.
B.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system specification sections.
C.
Horizontal Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system specification sections, install the following types: 1.
Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2.
Yoke Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
3.
Carbon or Alloy Steel, Double Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
4.
Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.
5.
Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
6.
Adjustable Swivel Split or Solid Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
7.
Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
8.
Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
9.
Adjustable Swivel Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.
10.
Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
AC Transit HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Oakland, CA 23 05 29 page 6 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
D.
E.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
11.
Extension Hinged or Two Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
12.
U Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipe, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
13.
Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction.
14.
Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
15.
Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
16.
Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion type support for pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
17.
Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
18.
Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
19.
Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
20.
Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.
21.
Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.
Vertical Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system specification sections, install the following types: 1.
Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20.
2.
Carbon or Alloy Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
Hanger Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified for piping system, install the following types: 1.
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2.
Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
AC Transit HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Oakland, CA 23 05 29 page 7 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
F.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
3.
Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4.
Malleable Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments.
5.
Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified for piping system, install the following types: 1.
Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2.
Top Beam C Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3.
Side Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.
4.
Center Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5.
Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6.
C Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7.
Top Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge.
8.
Side Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
9.
Steel Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I beams for heavy loads.
10.
Linked Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
11.
Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel.
12.
Welded Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. b. c.
Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
13.
Side Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
14.
Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
AC Transit HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Oakland, CA 23 05 29 page 8 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 15.
G.
H.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where head room is limited.
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified for piping system, install the following types: 1.
Steel Pipe Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2.
Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
3.
Thermal Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360 degree insert of high density, 100 psi minimum compressive strength, water repellent treated calcium silicate or cellular glass pipe insulation, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier and encased in 360 degree sheet metal shield.
Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified for piping system, install the following types: 1.
Restraint Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.
2.
Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches.
3.
Spring Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs.
4.
Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems.
5.
Variable Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.
6.
Variable Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.
7.
Variable Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.
8.
Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and loadadjustment capability. Supports include: a. b. c.
Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical type supports and one trapeze member.
AC Transit HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Oakland, CA 23 05 29 page 9 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 3.5
ADJUSTING A.
3.6
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
PAINTING A.
Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with Section 09 91 00, Painting, and SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field painted surfaces. 1.
B.
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Oakland, CA 23 05 29 page 10 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 SECTION 23 05 48
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1- GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
1.2
Section Includes: 1.
Vibration isolators.
2.
Seismic restraints.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: Technical data including load deflection curves for each vibration isolation device.
B.
Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include the following:
C.
1.
Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
2.
Seismic Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of seismic restraints and snubbers. Show anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter, and depth of penetration of anchors.
3.
Submittals for Interlocking Snubbers: Include load deflection curves up to 1/2 inch deflection in x, y, and z planes.
Certifications: 1.
1.3
Welding certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Provide seismic restraint devices with horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis performed according to OSHPD and bearing anchorage preapproval "R" number, from OSHPD or agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic restraint ratings. 1.
Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred.
2.
Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Testing and calculations must include both shear and tensile loads and 1 test or analysis at 45 degrees to the weakest mode.
3.
Seismic Parameters: As shown on drawings.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 page 1 of 6 April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation B.
1.4
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code--Steel.
EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.
Seismic Snubber Units: Furnish replacement neoprene inserts for snubbers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
GENERAL A.
2.2
Where products and manufacturers are listed, make submittals for proposed comparable products for review and approval.
VIBRATION ISOLATORS A.
B.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: 1.
Ace Mountings Co., Inc.
2.
Cooper B-Line, div. Cooper Industries
3.
California Dynamics Corp.
4.
Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
5.
Mason Industries, Inc.
6.
Vibration Isolation Co., Inc.
Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic restraint. 1.
Housing: Steel with resilient vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind loads or if weight is removed; factory drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4 inch thick, elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.
2.
Outside Spring Diameter: Minimum 80 percent of the compressed height of spring at rated load.
3.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
5.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 page 2 of 6 April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
C.
Elastomeric Hangers: Double deflection type, with molded, oil resistant rubber or neoprene isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
D.
Spring Hangers with Vertical Limit Stop: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert hanger with spring and insert in compression and with vertical limit stop.
E.
F.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
1.
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
2.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.
3.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
5.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.
6.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7.
Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower threaded rod.
Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression and with a load stop. Include rod and angle iron brackets for attaching to equipment. 1.
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
2.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.
3.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load.
4.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
5.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.
6.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil resistant rubber or neoprene.
7.
Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4 inch movement at start and stop.
Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2 inch thick, 60 durometer neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 page 3 of 6 April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation G.
2.3
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2 inch thick, 60 durometer neoprene. Factory set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction. Provide removable shear pin, reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Fabricate guides capable of motion to meet location requirements.
SEISMIC RESTRAINT DEVICES A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: 1.
Cooper B-Line, div. Cooper Industries, Inc.
2.
California Dynamics Corp.
3.
Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
4.
Mason Industries, Inc.
5.
Unistrut Corporation, div. Tyco Electrical and Metal Products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION A.
Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic control devices for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine roughing in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION A.
Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on either side of equipment.
B.
Install seismic snubbers on isolated equipment. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure.
C.
Install restraining cables at each trapeze and individual pipe hanger. At trapeze anchor locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Install cables so that they do not bend across sharp edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
D.
Install steel angles or channel, sized to prevent buckling, clamped with ductile-iron clamps to hanger rods for trapeze and individual pipe hangers. At trapeze anchor locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Requirements apply equally to hanging equipment. Do not weld angles to rods.
E.
Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 page 4 of 6 April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
3.4
3.5
Testing: Contractor shall engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality control testing: 1.
Isolator seismic restraint clearance.
2.
Isolator deflection.
3.
Snubber minimum clearances.
4.
Air Mounting System Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
5.
Air Mounting System Operational Test: Test the compressed air leveling system. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
6.
Test and adjust air mounting system controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
ADJUSTING A.
Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight.
B.
Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops to be out of contact during normal operation.
C.
Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4 inch movement during start and stop.
D.
Adjust air spring leveling mechanism.
E.
Adjust active height of spring isolators.
F.
Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
G.
Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.
H.
Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's written recommendations to resist seismic forces.
CLEANING A.
3.6
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation and seismic-control devices. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.
DEMONSTRATION A.
Engage a factory authorized service representative to train SJRRC's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air mounting systems.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 page 5 of 6 April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
AC Transit Oakland, CA
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 page 6 of 6 April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
SUMMARY A.
1.3
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation: 1.
Equipment nameplates.
2.
Equipment markers.
3.
Equipment signs.
4.
Access panel and door markers.
5.
Pipe markers.
6.
Duct markers.
7.
Stencils.
8.
Valve tags.
9.
Valve schedules.
10.
Warning tags.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.
C.
Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.
D.
Valve numbering scheme.
E.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Furnish extra copies (in addition to mounted copies) to include in maintenance manuals.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC SYSTEM 23 05 53 page 1 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.5
1.6
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME (ANSI) A13.1-2007, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices for piping.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
C.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Furnish minimum of 5% extra stock of each mechanical identification material required, including additional numbered valve tags (not less than 3) for each piping system, additional piping system identification markers, and additional plastic laminate engraving banks of assorted sizes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering mechanical identification materials which may be incorporated in the work included, but not limited to the following: 1.
Brady
2.
Marking Services Inc. (MSI)
3.
Seton
4.
Or Approved equal
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A.
Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent attachment on equipment. 1.
Data: a. b. c.
2. AC Transit Oakland, CA
Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number. Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data. Labels of tested compliances.
Location: Accessible and visible. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC SYSTEM 23 05 53 page 2 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 3.
B.
Fasteners: Utilize a contact type, adhesive and screw or rivet to permanently mount on equipment.
Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type, permanent adhesive. 1.
Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible.
2.
Data: a. b. c. d.
2.3
2.4
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Name and plan number. Equipment service. Design capacity. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, and speed.
3.
Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches for equipment.
4.
Location: Accessible and visible.
EQUIPMENT LABELS A.
Supplemental Fasteners: Over-tape with a clear weather resistant tape designed to withstand operating temperatures of equipment, ductwork and or piping.
B.
Equipment Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening.
C.
Data: Instructions for operation of equipment and for safety procedures.
D.
Engraving: Manufacturer's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match equipment identification.
E.
Thickness: 1/16 inch for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8 inches in length, and 1/8 inch for larger units.
F.
Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.
G.
Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16-inch- thick, engraved laminated plastic, with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8-inch center hole for attachment.
H.
Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.
PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A.
Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing direction of flow. 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Colors: Comply with ASME A 13.1, unless otherwise indicated. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC SYSTEM 23 05 53 page 3 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 2.
Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. a. b.
3.
B.
Supplemental Fasteners: Attach to pipe with mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate insulation vapor barrier.
Supplemental Fasteners: Over-tape with a clear weather resistant tape designed to withstand operating temperatures of piping.
DUCT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A.
B.
2.6
Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, selfadhesive back. 1.
2.5
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full-band pipe markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full-band or strip-type pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label.
Pre-tensioned Pipe Markers: Pre-coiled semi-rigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without adhesive. 1.
C.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Duct Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include direction and quantity of airflow and duct service (such as supply, return, and exhaust). Include contact-type, permanent adhesive. 1.
Supplemental Fasteners: Over-tape with a clear weather resistant tape designed to withstand operating temperatures of equipment, ductwork and / or piping.
2.
Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F
3.
Minimum Label Size: length and width vary from required label content, but not less than 1-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
4.
Minimum Letter Size: 1/2 for name of units.
Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1.
Flow direction arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.
2.
Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
STENCILS A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC SYSTEM 23 05 53 page 4 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
and door markers, equipment markers, equipment signs, and similar operational instructions.
2.7
B.
Stencil Material: Metal or fiberboard.
C.
Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black, unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.
D.
Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
VALVE TAGS A.
2.8
1.
Material: 18 gauge solid polished brass. 1-1/2 diameter and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2.
Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass beaded chain and S-hook for attachment to the valve stern.
VALVE SCHEDULES A.
2.9
Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers. Provide 5/32-inch hole for fastener.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on standard-size bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. 1.
Valve-Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting.
2.
Frame: Extruded aluminum.
3.
Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing Quality B, 2.5-mm, singlethickness glass.
4.
Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
B.
Printing shall be black on white, water-resistant, fungus-resistant paper.
C.
For each valve, list the valve number, location, size, and use or operating function.
D.
Coordinate valve numbers with valve tags so that no two valves or scheduled devices have the same number.
WARNING TAGS A.
Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags; of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing. 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC SYSTEM 23 05 53 page 5 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
2.
Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.
3.
Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT OPERATE.
4.
Color: Yellow background with black lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
APPLICATIONS, GENERAL A.
Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more than single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option.
B.
Preparation: Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A.
B.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located where not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include nameplates for the following general categories of equipment: 1.
Fuel-burning units, including furnaces and heaters.
2.
Pumps, compressors, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
3.
Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
4.
Packaged HVAC central-station units, packaged HVAC rooftop units, fan coil units, electric resistance type heating equipment, and zone-type units.
Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. Data required for markers may be included on signs, and markers may be omitted if both are indicated. 1.
Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
2.
Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units.
3.
Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the following general categories of equipment:
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC SYSTEM 23 05 53 page 6 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation a. b. c. d. e. f.
g. h. C.
Identify mechanical equipment with equipment markers in the following color codes: a. b. c.
Green: For cooling equipment and components. Yellow: For heating equipment and components. Orange: For combination cooling and heating equipment and components.
2.
Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
3.
Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units. a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
h. i.
3.3
Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets. Fire department hose valves and hose stations. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units. Fuel-burning units, including furnaces and heaters. Pumps, compressors, condensers, and similar motor-driven units. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes. Packaged HVAC central-station units, packaged HVAC rooftop units, fan coil units, electric resistance type heating equipment and zone-type units. Tanks and pressure vessels. Strainers, filters, water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.
Install equipment signs with screws or permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. Locate signs where accessible and visible. 1.
D.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Include signs for the following general categories of equipment: Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets. Fuel-burning units, including furnaces and heaters. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units. Coils and similar equipment. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes. Packaged HVAC central-station units, packaged HVAC rooftop units, fan coil units, electric resistance type heating equipment and zone-type units. Tanks and pressure vessels. Strainers, filters, water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.
Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels.
PIPING IDENTIFICATION A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flow indication arrows showing direction of flow.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC SYSTEM 23 05 53 page 7 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
B.
3.4
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
1.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Pre-tensioned pipe markers. Use size to ensure a tight fit.
2.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Self-adhesive pipe markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches wide, lapped at least 3 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.
Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior non-concealed locations as follows: 1.
Near each valve and control device.
2.
Near each branch connection. Mark flow direction at each branch.
3.
On both sides of penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and non-accessible enclosures.
4.
At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
5.
Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6.
Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in congested areas where piping is partially hidden by other pipe, ductwork or equipment.
7.
On piping above removable acoustical ceilings.
DUCT IDENTIFICATION A.
B.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Install duct markers with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes: 1.
Green: For cold-air supply ducts.
2.
Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts.
3.
Blue: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.
ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust. 1.
Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
2.
Stenciled Duct Marker Option: Stenciled markers, showing service and direction of flow, may be provided instead of laminated-plastic duct markers, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC SYSTEM 23 05 53 page 8 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 3.
Locate markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are concealed by removable ceiling system.
4.
Locate duct markers where ductwork is exposed in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior non-concealed locations as follows: a. b. c.
Near each damper. Near each branch connection. Mark flow direction at each branch. On both sides of penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed ductwork. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in congested areas where ductwork is partially hidden by other pipe, ductwork or equipment. On both sides of every change in direction.
d. e. f.
g.
3.5
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule. A.
Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following: 1.
Valve-Tag Size and Shape: a.
2.
Gas: 1-1/2 inches square.
Valve-Tag Color: a.
3.
Gas: Blue.
Letter Color: a.
3.6
Gas: White.
HAZARDOUS ITEMS A.
Identify all hazardous ductwork, equipment, etc. by appropriate labeling with writing.
B.
Label hazardous ductwork at intervals not to exceed 20 feet apart and every passing through partition wall.
C.
Provide warning signs of engraved plastic laminate or baked enamel signs at location of equipment such as fans.
D.
Provide warning signs where is hazardous exposure or danger associated with the operation or maintenance of equipment.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC SYSTEM 23 05 53 page 9 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
3.7
E.
Provide text of sufficient clarity and lettering of sufficient size to convey related data at each location. Mount permanently in a effective location.
F.
Comply with recognized industry standards for color and design.
VALVE-SCHEDULE INSTALLATION A.
3.8
Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.
ADJUSTING A.
3.10
Mount valve schedule on wall in accessible location in each major equipment room.
WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION A.
3.9
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by other work.
CLEANING A.
Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC SYSTEM 23 05 53 page 10 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
1.2
Section Includes: 1.
Testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) work for air distribution systems, heating hot water system and associated equipment.
2.
Accessories and related equipment necessary to perform testing.
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit for review the name of the agency proposed for the work, together with evidence of past experience and reference data.
B.
TAB Agenda: Submit to Engineer and SJRRC for approval, including: 1.
Proposed materials, methods, procedures, forms, diagrams, and reports for test and balance work.
2.
One complete set of applicable AABC publications to establish an approved, systematic, and uniform set of procedures.
3.
Detailed narrative procedures, system diagrams, and forms for test results: a. b. c.
1.3
Specific standard procedures required and proposed for each system of the work. Specified test forms for recording each procedure and for recording sound and vibration measurements. Systems diagrams for each air, water, and steam system. Diagrams may be single line.
C.
Coordination Plan: As described in Part 3 of this section.
D.
Test Reports: Submit certified test reports signed by the test and balance supervisor who performed testing and balancing work. In addition, have report certified by a registered professional engineer who is familiar with testing and balancing work and also with project.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
B.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Regulatory Requirements: 1.
AABC Compliance: Comply with AABC's National Standards for Total System Balance, applicable to mechanical air distribution systems and associated equipment and apparatus.
2.
Comply with American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) recommendations pertaining to measurements; instruments; and testing, adjusting, and balancing, except as otherwise specified.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Engage the services of an independent balancing and testing agency specializing in the balancing and testing of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems to perform the work. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 page 1 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
1.4
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
1.
For the agency proposed for the work, submit evidence that testing agency has the experience, qualifications, and capabilities to perform testing, adjusting, and balancing work.
2.
Submit Certificates from AABC or NEBB
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Do not proceed with testing, adjusting, and balancing work until work has been completed and is operable. Ensure that there is no latent residual work still to be completed.
B.
Do not proceed until work scheduled for testing, adjusting, and balancing is clean and free from debris, dirt, and discarded building materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A
Patching Materials: Provide same products used by original installer for patching holes in insulation, ductwork, and housings that were cut or drilled for test purposes, including creating access for test instruments, attaching jigs, and similar purposes. Engage the services of the original installer for patching.
B.
Test Instruments: Provide test instruments and equipment required for testing and balancing work, of type, precision, and capacity as recommended in AABC's National Standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INFORMATION REQUIRED A.
In addition to information recorded for standard AABC procedures, the following information is required.
B.
Fan Data (Existing AH Units and existing general exhaust fan serving 8th floor):
C. AC Transit Oakland, CA
1.
System number, location, manufacturer, model name and number, and serial number
2.
Fan wheel type and size
3.
Motor horsepower, type, and rpm
4.
Drive size, type, number of grooves, and open turns on variable frequency drives
5.
Number and size of belts, motor and fan shaft sizes, center-to-center of shafts in inches, and motor data, including nameplate data, actual amps, rated and actual motor rpm, volts, phase, hp, kW, starter heater size, and capacity
6.
Fan design airflow and service (supply, return, outdoor air, or exhaust)
7.
Fan static pressure, suction/discharge, static profile, and static control point
8.
Read and record only. Do not adjust or reset the fan and AH units.
Traverse Data: TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 page 2 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
D.
E.
F.
G. AC Transit Oakland, CA
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
1.
Traverse location, size of duct (inside dimensions), and area of duct in square feet
2.
Column for each hole traversed/lines for each reading
3.
Barometric pressure
4.
Temperature/static pressure in the duct
5.
Actual CFM corrected to SCFM
6.
Notes
Air Distribution Data: 1.
Room identification
2.
Outlet or intake balance sequence number
3.
Size of outlet or inlet
4.
AK factor
5.
Design and actual FPM and CFM
6.
Notes
Sound Test Data: 1.
Area or location
2.
Sound level in dB(A) as specified
3.
Sound level at the center band frequencies of 8 non-weighted octaves with equipment on and off for 5 rooms selected by SJRRC
4.
Plot corrected sound-level reading on noise criteria (NC) curve for sound level measurements
Terminal Box Data: 1.
Equipment identification number
2.
Nameplate data: manufacturer, model and serial number
3.
Tested cooling supply air in CFM
4.
Tested heating supply air in CFM
5.
Reheat coil test data in gpm
6.
Static pressure drop at air side and water side
7.
Notes
Fan coil Unit Data: TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 page 3 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
3.2
3.3
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
1.
Equipment identification number
2.
Nameplate data: manufacturer, model and serial number
3.
Tested cooling supply air in CFM
4.
cooling coil test data in gpm
5.
Static pressure drop at air side and water side
6.
Notes
SCHEDULING A.
Schedule TAB work to complete it before Substantial Completion. Place HVAC equipment into operation during each day until HVAC adjusting, balancing, testing, demonstrations, and instructions on systems is completed. Testing agency shall prepare and submit reports within 10 days from completion of work to allow sufficient time for corrective measures to be completed before Substantial Completion. When an individual building or portion thereof is ready for occupancy, equipment relevant to that portion of the work shall be put into service, tested, and balanced.
B.
Coordinate TAB procedures with phased project requirements so that TAB procedures on each phase of the work will be completed 28 days before completion of that phase.
C.
Test, adjust, and balance system during summer season for air conditioning systems and during winter season for heating systems. Perform testing during period of operation where outside conditions are within 5 deg F wet bulb temperature of maximum summer design condition and within 10 deg F dry bulb temperature of minimum winter design condition. When seasonal operation does not permit measuring final temperatures, take final temperature readings when seasonal operation permits.
D.
Conduct 7-day building flush-out prior to Substantial Completion. After completion of TAB work, place exhaust fans in operation, force air handling units and air conditioning units into 100 percent outdoor air economizer mode with heating and cooling locked out, and flush the building continuously for a period of 7 days.
COORDINATION PLAN A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Develop and submit a specific, coordinated plan which details how each building or building area will be balanced during the various phases of the work. Address the following at a minimum: 1.
Owner’s operations.
2.
Building safety and security policies. Before shutdown of any fire safety or security system, advise and coordinate with owner’s representatvie to ensure that all concerned parties are notified.
3.
Protection of office equipment and industrial equipment.
4.
Concerns specific to the building/facility.
5.
Downtime required for each air handling unit, including projected time to return each portion of the building to its normal occupancy temperature and humidity.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 page 4 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 6. 3.4
Shutdown and reactivation of the fire alarm system to avoid accidental alarms during TAB and related work.
FIELD EXAMINATION A.
B.
3.5
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Verify and ensure the following conditions before beginning TAB work: 1.
Water heating and water cooling systems have been cleaned, filled, and high points vented
2.
Over-voltage and current protection have been provided for motors
3.
Equipment has been labeled
4.
Curves and descriptive data on each piece of equipment to be tested and adjusted are available as required
5.
Operations and maintenance manuals have been supplied
6.
Controls manufacturer and boiler-burner representatives are available for consultation and supervision of adjustments during tests
7.
Heating and cooling coil fins are cleaned and combed and air filters of required MERV rating are clean and installed
8.
Duct systems are clean of debris and leakage is minimized, access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place, and fire and volume dampers are in place and open
9.
Automatic control systems are completed and operating
10.
Start-up and initial commissioning of HVAC equipment except fans shall be conducted by the manufacturer
Examine installed work and conditions under which testing are performed ensuring that work is complete, clean, and operable. Do not proceed with TAB work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected and acceptable to tester.
TAB PROCEDURES A.
Test, adjust, and balance environmental systems and components in accordance with procedures outlined in applicable standards. If the contract documents impose a more stringent standard, the contract documents govern.
B.
For each heating, ventilating, or air conditioning system, the following procedures shall be performed, recorded, and submitted in an approved format for review. Include manufacturer, generic type, model, and location of each piece of equipment in the report, along with readings listed in this article and other readings required by applicable standards.
C.
Air Systems: 1.
General a.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Verify that ductwork, dampers, grilles, registers, and diffusers have been installed per design and set in the full open position.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 page 5 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 2.
Zone, Branch, and Main Ducts: a.
3.
b. c. d. e. f. g.
Fan speeds: Read and record RPM. Contractor shall provide new belt pulleys when required. Current and Voltage: Record motor voltage and amperage, and compare data with the nameplate limits. Pitot-Tube Traverse: Perform a pitot-tube traverse of main supply and return ducts, and record total CFM. Outside Air: Test and adjust outside air using pitot-tube traverse. Static Pressure: Test and record system static profile of each supply fan. Current and Voltage: Test and record motor voltage and amperage, and compare data with nameplate limits. Read the total cfm of each existing main supply air ducts with all VAV terminal boxes at 100% open and adjusting to compare the cfm.
Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles: a. b.
Tolerances: Test and balance each diffuser, grille, and register to within 5 percent of design requirements. Identification: Identify the type, location, and size of each grille, diffuser, and register. This information shall be recorded on air outlet data sheets.
5.
Coils: Once airflow is set to acceptable limits, testing agency shall take wet bulb and dry bulb air temperatures on the entering and leaving side of each cooling coil. Dry-bulb temperature shall be taken on the entering and leaving side of each heating coil.
6.
Duct Leakage Testing: a.
7.
Every new section of the air distribution system (supply, return, exhaust, and relief ductwork) shall be tested at 1-1/2 times design static pressure. Ducts shall demonstrate no greater than 3 percent leakage or required by Title 24.
System Pressure Profiles: a. b. c.
3.6
Adjust ducts to within design CFM requirements by means of pitot-tube duct traverse.
Fans (read and record only for the existing AH unit and general exhaust fan serving the project area): a.
4.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
As a minimum, show pressure at each floor, main branch, and airflow measuring device. Make pitot tube traverses of trunk lines and major branch lines where required for analysis of distribution system. Record residual pressures at inlets of volume controlled terminals at ends of system.
VERIFICATION OF HVAC CONTROLS A.
Testing agency shall verify in conjunction with Contractor that control components are installed in accordance with the intent of the contract documents and are functioning according to the design intent, including electrical interlocks, damper sequences, air and water resets, fire stats, and other safety devices.
B.
Contractor shall verify that control components are calibrated and set for design operating conditions and intent.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 page 6 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 3.7
TEMPERATURE TESTING A.
3.8
3.9
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
To verify system control and operation, testing agency shall perform a series of three temperature tests taken at approximately 2-hour intervals in each separately controlled zone. The resulting temperatures shall not vary more than 2 deg F from the thermostat or control set point during the tests. Outside temperature and humidity shall also be recorded during the testing periods.
FINAL TABULATION A.
After heating, ventilating, and air conditioning components are satisfactorily tested and balanced, entire system shall be put into operation and pressures, temperatures, gpm, cfm, velocities, etc., shall be recorded and checked against design schedules. Design requirements shall be listed on reports and final tabulation shall be within a tolerance of plus or minus 5 percent of design requirements.
B.
Readings at various locations as described herein will be made every hour for 4 hours, during normal working hours for 3 days. Boilers and forced air furnaces shall be started up far enough in advance to meet design conditions during period of testing.
SOUND TESTING A.
Perform and record sound measurements as specified in this section and in Section 23 05 48, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. Take additional readings if required by Engineer.
B.
Take measurements with a calibrated Type 1 sound level meter and octave band analyzer.
C.
Sound reference levels, formulas, and coefficients shall be according to ASHRAE Handbook, HVAC Applications, Chapter 47, Sound and Vibration Control.
D.
Determine compliance with the contract documents as follows: 1.
Where sound pressure levels are specified as noise criteria or room criteria in Section 23 05 48, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment: a. b. c. d.
Reduce background noise as much as possible by shutting off unrelated audible equipment. Measure octave band sound pressure levels with specified equipment off. Measure octave band sound pressure levels with specified equipment on. Use difference in corresponding readings to determine sound pressure due to equipment. DIFF.: FACTOR:
0 10
1 7
2 4
3 3
4 2
5 1
9-10+ 0
Sound pressure level, due to equipment, equals sound pressure level with equipment "on" minus the above noted factor. e. 2.
When sound power levels are specified: a. b. c.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Plot octave bands of sound pressure level due to equipment for typical rooms, on a graph, which also shows, noise criteria (NC) curves.
Reduce background noise as much as possible by shutting off unrelated audible equipment. Measure octave band sound pressure levels with specified equipment off. Measure octave band sound pressure levels with specified equipment on.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 page 7 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation d. e.
3.
3.10
3.11
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Use difference in corresponding readings to determine sound pressure due to equipment. For indoor equipment: Determine room attenuating effect, i.e., difference between sound power level and sound pressure level. Determined sound power level will be sum of sound pressure level due to equipment, plus room attenuating effect.
Where sound pressure levels are specified in terms of dbA, measure sound levels using the "A" scale of meter. Use single value readings instead of octave band analysis.
E.
Where measured sound levels exceed specified level, Contractor shall take remedial action and necessary sound tests shall be repeated.
F.
Measure and record sound levels in decibels at each diffuser, grille, and register in occupied areas. Sound levels shall be measured approximately 5 feet above floor on a line approximately 45 degrees to center of opening, on the "A" and "C" scales of an IET Products GenRad sound level meter or similar instrument.
G.
Report shall also include ambient sound levels of rooms in which above openings are located, taken without air-handling equipment operating. A report shall also be made of any noise caused by mechanical vibration.
TEST REPORTING AND WRAP-UP A.
Prepare report of test results, including instrumentation calibration reports, in format recommended by applicable standards.
B.
Patch holes and damage to insulation, ductwork, and housings.
C.
Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings at completion of testing and balancing work. Provide markings with paint or other suitable permanent identification materials.
D.
Prepare report outlining recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical performances when system cannot be successfully balanced, including, where necessary, modifications which exceed requirements of the contract documents. Submit report to the Engineer. Perform corrective modifications approved by Engineer.
E.
Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications, and resubmit test results.
BALANCING PROCEDURES FOR AIR SYSTEMS A.
Prior to balancing, complete construction of air handling system with components installed and controls operative and calibrated. Schedule balancing for completion four calendar weeks prior to completion of building or area serviced by air system.
B.
Obtain copies of fan pressure volume power characteristics at rated speed. Prepare line drawings of systems with identifying designations for each section of the distribution systems and outlets.
C.
Measure flow and pressure in ducts by means of pitot tube and manometer or U gauge having minimum sensitivity of 0.02 inch of water.
D.
For rectangular ducts, take readings at center point of equal rectangles with minimum 16 and a maximum of 64 readings. Ensure that center distances between rectangular are
AC Transit Oakland, CA
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 page 8 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
not more than 6 inches. Take readings as far downstream of fittings as practicable up to an equivalent of seven duct diameters. E.
Measure fan and motor speed with a direct reading tachometer and Strobo Tach. Measure amperage and voltage with direct connected or clamp on instruments.
F.
Measure flow at air outlets and inlets with velometer in accordance with air outlet manufacturer's instructions.
G.
Submit duplicate copies of final test and balancing measurements, drawings, and operating data on fan curves.
H.
Test and record static pressure drop across filters and note condition of filter at the time of test.
I.
Where duct joints present leakage, reseal joints.
J.
Measure and record data for each system after balancing and adjusting to within limits specified, for submission of balancing report: 1.
Fan Data (For information only, don’t chage the setting): a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.
2.
Motor Data (For information only, don’t change the setting): a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. J. k.
3.
Manufacturer model number. Horsepower. Phase. Frequency. NEMA code letter. Rated volts. Actual volts. Rated amperes. Actual amperes. Calculated operating BHP. Locked rotor amperes.
Air Outlet Data: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Manufacturer and model number (where available). CFM, design. CFM, actual. RPM. Inlet static pressure. Discharge static pressure. Total static pressure. For purpose of balancing, calculate fan BHP by Actual Amps X Actual Volts where BHP = Nameplate Amps X Nameplate Volts X Nameplate HP If more accurate reading is necessary for resolution of performance data conflict, use calibrated wattmeter for measuring power.
Schedule showing each air outlet locations and numbers assigned to outlets for purpose of test. Air outlet manufacturer and model number where available. Size. Actual free area. Manufacturer's test factor. Measured velocity. CFM, design.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 page 9 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation h. i.
CFM, actual. CFM, percentage above or below design.
K.
Automatic Control Devices: Set and adjust automatically operated devices pertinent to adjustment of air system to deliver the required quantities of air. Perform control work in collaboration with representative of the control device manufacturer.
L.
Bi-seasonal Adjustment: Within warranty period, return to site and complete adjustment of equipment which was not thoroughly tested under maximum obtainable load conditions in the pre-acceptance period.
M. 3.12
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Patching Materials: Patch damaged units to like new or better condition including areas damaged by creating access for test instruments, attaching jigs, and similar purposes.
REPORTS A.
Prepare a report outlining recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical performance when systems cannot be successfully balanced.
B.
Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications and resubmit test results. END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 page 10 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 SECTION 23 07 13 HVAC DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
B.
1.2
Section Includes: 1.
Semi-rigid and flexible duct insulation.
2.
Insulating cements.
3.
Field applied jackets
4.
Accessories and attachments
5.
Sealing compounds.
Related Sections: 1.
Section 07 84 00, Firestopping.
2.
Section 23 07 19, HVAC Piping Insulation.
3.
Section 23 31 00, Metal Ducts.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
C.
1.
Removable insulation sections at access panels.
2.
Application of field applied jackets.
3.
Applications at linkages for control devices.
Samples: For each type of insulation and field applied jacket. Identify each sample, describing product and intended use. Submit 12 inch square sections of each sample material. 1.
Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show full range of colors available for each type of field applied finish material indicated.
D.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.
E.
Installer Certificates: Signed by Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
HVAC DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 page 1 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration.
B.
Fire Test Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this section according to ASTM E84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1.
1.4
Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
COORDINATION A.
1.6
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke developed rating of 50 or less.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
1.5
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Coordinate clearance requirements with duct installer for insulation application.
SCHEDULING A.
Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may begin on segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
GENERAL A.
2.2
Where products and manufacturers are listed, make submittals for proposed comparable Products for review and approval. All duct insulation R-value shall be based on insulation only (excluding air films, vapor retarders, or other duct components) and tested at 75 degree F mean temperature at the installed thickness, in accordance with ASTM C518 or ASTM C177.
MATERIALS A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: 1.
Owens Corning
2.
Knauf Insulation.
3.
Johns Manville Corporation.
4.
Or equal. HVAC DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 page 2 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
B.
Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Minimum one-pound density glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C553, Type II, without facing and with all service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film. R-value shall meet California Building Energy Efficiency Standard for NonResidential Building, Title 24.
C.
Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven glass fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. 1.
D.
Tape Width: 4 inches.
Bands: 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket: 1.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick.
2.
Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick.
3.
Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick.
4.
Brass: 0.010 inch thick.
5.
Nickel Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick.
E.
Wire: 0.080 inch, nickel copper alloy; 0.062 inch, soft annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062 inch, soft annealed, galvanized steel.
F.
Weld Attached Anchor Pins and Washers: Copper coated steel pin for capacitor discharge welding and galvanized speed washer. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated. 1.
G.
H.
Welded Pin Holding Capacity: 100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to attached surface.
Adhesive Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated. 1.
2.3
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of 100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface.
Self Adhesive Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.
PLENUM AND DUCT LINERS A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Plenum and duct liner must be one inch minimum thickness. Material and coatings must be fire resistive and must be approved by the State Fire Marshal. Liner must be GustinBacon, Ultra-Liner duct insulation. Owen-Corning Fiberglas type CE; Gustin-Bacon, coated insulation board No. 90-A; Owen Corning Fiberglas 1-1/2 pound density coated flexible duct liner or equal.
HVAC DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 page 3 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
A.
The lining shall be fastened in place with adhesive and with studs with washers spaced a maximum of 18 inches on center each way.
C
Applying adhesive: The adhesive shall be liberally applied over entire interior surfaces of ducts or plenum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C.
Plenum and ducts with internal liner must be sized to provide the clear inside dimensions shown after the liner is installed.
PREPARATION Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that adversely affect insulation application.
3.3
APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS A.
Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.
B.
Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
C.
Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
D.
Seal joints and seams with vapor retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive vapor retarder.
E.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
F.
Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
G.
Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
H.
Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor retarder mastic. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
J.
Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
HVAC DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 page 4 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
3.4
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
K.
Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
L.
Install vapor retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor retarders. 1.
Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor retarder mastic and pressure sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor retarder seal.
2.
Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and secure with outward clinching staples and pressure sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.
M.
Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and partitions, except fire rated walls and partitions.
N.
Fire Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke damper sleeves for fire rated wall and partition penetrations.
MINERAL FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION A.
Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers. 1.
Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2.
Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.
3.
Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a.
b.
c. d.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. Do not over compress insulation during installation.
4.
Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers.
5.
Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
6.
Create facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure
HVAC DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 page 5 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
laps to adjacent insulation segment with 1/2 inch staples, 1 inch o.c., and cover with pressure sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.
3.5
7.
Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. Secure with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
8.
Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
9.
Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface with 6 inch wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
10.
Apply vapor retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated to receive vapor retarder.
DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS A.
Portions of supply air and return air ducts conveying heated or cooled air located in one Of the following spaces shall be insulated to a minimum installed level of R-8: 1.
Outdoors; or
2.
In a space between the roof and an insulated ceiling; or
3.
In a space directly under a roof with fixed vents or openings to the outside or Un-conditioned spaces; or
4.
In an unconditioned crawlspace; or
5.
in other unconditioned spaces.
B.
Portions of supply air and return air ducts that are not in one of locations listed above, shall be insulated to a minimum installed level of R-4.2 or any higher level required by CMC Section 604.
C.
The installed thickness of duct insulation used to determine its R-value shall be determined as follows to comply with Title 24, 120.4. 1.
Duct board, duct liner and factory made rigid ducts not normally subjected to compression, the nominal insulation thickness shall be used.
2.
For duct wrap, install thickness shall be assumed to be 75% of nominal thickness.
3.
D.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
For factory made flexible air ducts, the installed thickness shall be determined by dividing the difference between the actual outside diameter and nominal inside diameter by two.
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment: HVAC DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 page 6 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
3.7
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
1.
Metal ducts with duct liner.
2.
Factory insulated flexible ducts.
3.
Factory insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections.
4.
Flexible connectors.
5.
Vibration control devices.
6.
Testing agency labels and stamps.
7.
Nameplates and data plates.
8.
Access panels and doors in air-distribution systems.
INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE A.
B.
Service: Round, supply air ducts, concealed. 1.
Material: Mineral fiber blanket.
2.
Thickness: Calculated to meet Title 24
3.
Number of Layers: One.
4.
Field Applied Jacket: Foil and paper.
5.
Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
Service: Rectangular, supply air ducts, concealed. 1.
Material: Mineral fiber blanket.
2.
Thickness: Calculated to meet Title 24
3.
Number of Layers: One.
4.
Field Applied Jacket: Foil and paper.
5.
Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
HVAC DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 page 7 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
AC Transit Oakland, CA
HVAC DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 page 8 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 SECTION 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
B.
1.2
Section Includes: 1.
Preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation.
2.
Insulating cements.
3.
Accessories and attachments.
4.
Sealing compounds.
Related Sections: 1.
Section 07 84 00, Firestopping.
2.
Section 23 05 29, Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
3.
Section 23 07 13, HVAC Duct Insulation.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
C.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
1.
Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.
2.
Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation.
3.
Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4.
Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation.
5.
Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.
6.
Application of field applied jackets.
Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket. Identify each sample, describing product and intended use. Submit samples in the following sizes: 1.
Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches long by NPS 2.
2.
Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches square. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 page 1 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 3.
1.3
Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for each type of field applied finish material indicated.
D.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.
E.
Installer Certificates: Signed by Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Regulatory Requirements: 1.
Fire Test Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this section according to ASTM E84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. a. b.
2.
b. B.
1.6
HVAC piping insulation must comply with California State Energy Commission regulations and, where applicable, must meet ASTM standards. Pipe safety insulation must comply with CPC 2010.
Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
1.5
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke developed rating of 50 or less. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke developed rating of 150 or less. Code and Standards:
a.
1.4
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 23 05 29, Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
B.
Coordinate clearance requirements with piping installer for insulation application.
SCHEDULING
AC Transit Oakland, CA
HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 page 2 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation A.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of piping that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: 1.
Owens Corning.
2.
Knauf Insulation.
3.
Johns Manville Corporation.
4.
Or approved equal
Mineral Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with the following: 1.
Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C547, Type 1, with factory applied, all purpose, vapor retarder jacket.
2.
Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C553, Type II, without facing.
3.
Fire Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and grades: a.
b.
C.
4.
Vapor Retarder Mastics: Fire and water resistant, vapor retarder mastic for indoor applications. Comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
5.
Mineral Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C195.
6.
Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C196.
7.
Mineral Fiber, Hydraulic Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C449.
Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge or expanded rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials. The product is subject to compliance with the requirements: 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to un-faced glass fiber insulation, for sealing edges of glass fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging cloth to un-faced glass fiber insulation. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass fiber insulation to metal surfaces.
K-Flex USA; Insul-Lock, Insul-Tube, and K-FLEX LS HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 page 3 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
D.
2.
Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel
3.
Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex
Field Applied Jackets: ASTM C921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. 1.
Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass fiber reinforced, flame retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil, rated for a service temperature of 175°F.
2.
PVC Jacket: High impact, ultraviolet resistant PVC; 20 mils thick; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming, rated for a service temperature of 175°F. a. b.
E.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. PVC Jacket Color: White or gray.
Accessories and Attachments: 1.
Bands: 3/4 inch wide, compatible with jacket: a.
2.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick.
Wire: 0.080 inch, nickel copper alloy; 0.062 inch, soft annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062 inch, soft annealed, galvanized steel.
F.
Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
G.
Piping Insulation Cement: Insulation cement must be Fenco, all purpose cement; Manville, JM375 or equal. For indoor application, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION A.
3.3
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
APPLICATION A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 page 4 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
B.
Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
C.
Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.
D.
Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
E.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
F.
Seal joints and seams with vapor retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder.
G.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H.
Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
I.
Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
J.
Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties.
K.
Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor retarder mastic. 1.
Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2.
For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs at least 12 inches from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
3.
Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
4.
Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger, support, and shield.
L.
Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
M.
Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.
N.
Apply insulation with integral jackets: 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Pull jacket tight and smooth.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 page 5 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
3.4
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
2.
Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3 inch wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip and spaced 4 inches o.c.
3.
Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.
4.
Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor retarder.
5.
Vapor Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.
6.
At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gauges, fill and seal voids with vapor retarder mastic.
MINERAL FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION A.
B.
C.
Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes: Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without deforming insulation materials. 1.
Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of 15 to 20 feet to form vapor retarder between pipe insulation segments.
2.
For insulation with factory applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches O. C.
3.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.
Apply insulation to flanges. 1.
Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2.
Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral fiber blanket insulation.
4.
Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlapping seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with vapor retarder mastic.
Apply insulation to fittings and elbows. 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Apply pre-molded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 page 6 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
D.
3.5
2.
When pre-molded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered sections of pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.
3.
Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers.
4.
Cover fittings with heavy PVC fitting covers. Overlap PVC covers on pipe insulation jackets at least 1 inch at each end. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vaporretarder mastic.
Apply insulation to valves and specialties. 1.
Apply pre-molded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2.
When pre-molded insulation sections are not available, apply glass fiber blanket insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation.
3.
Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4.
Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor retarder mastic.
5.
Use preformed heavy PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor retarder mastic.
6.
For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with canvas jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
FINISHES A.
3.6
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Color: Final color as selected by Engineer. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed work.
PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS A.
Apply insulation materials and thickness where indicated on drawings. 1.
Service: heating hot-water piping, per Title 24 - 2013 a. b. c. d. e. f.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Operating Temperature: 60 to 140 deg F. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber. Conductivity: 0.25 – 0.29 btu-inch/hr.sqft. °F Insulation Thickness: minimum 1-1/2 inch insulation for pipe size 1-1/2 and less; minimum 2 inch insulation for pipe size 2 inch and above. Field Applied Jacket: Foil and paper. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 page 7 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation g. 2.
e. f. g.
3.7
Finish: None.
Service: chilled-water piping, per Title 24 - 2013 a. b. c. d.
B.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Operating Temperature: 40 to 60 deg F. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber. Conductivity: 0.21 – 0.27 btu-inch/hr.sqft. °F Insulation Thickness: minimum 1/2 inch insulation for pipe size 1-1/2 and less; minimum 1 inch insulation for pipe size 2 inch and above. Field Applied Jacket: Foil and paper. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. Finish: None.
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment: 1.
Flexible connectors.
2.
Vibration control devices.
3.
Fire suppression piping.
4.
Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
5.
Below grade piping, unless otherwise indicated.
6.
Chrome plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.
7.
Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Inspection: Contractor shall engage a qualified inspection agency to perform field quality control inspections, after installing insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements: 1.
Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by Engineer.
2.
Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is less, for various pipe sizes.
3.
Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whichever is less, for various pipe sizes.
B.
Insulation applications are considered defective if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective work and replace with new materials according to requirements.
C.
Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection according to requirements.
END OF SECTION AC Transit Oakland, CA
HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 page 8 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 SECTION 23 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
Commissioning process and training requirements for heating, ventilating, air conditioning, and refrigerating systems, assemblies, and equipment.
2.
Systems Included: a. b. c. d.
1.2
1.3
Fan coil unit Hot water heating system. HVAC instrumentation and controls system. Chilled water system
DEFINITIONS A.
Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process.
B.
CxA: Commissioning Authority.
C.
HVAC&R: Heating, ventilating, air conditioning, and refrigerating.
D.
Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A.
Perform commissioning tests at the direction of the CxA.
B.
Attend construction phase controls coordination meeting.
C.
Execute all control system trend logs specified.
D.
Attend testing, adjusting, and balancing review and coordination meeting.
E.
Participate in HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and component maintenance orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA.
F.
Provide information requested by the CxA for final commissioning documentation.
G.
Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data, and provide data acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the required test period.
H.
Assist in clarifying the operation and control of commissioned equipment in areas where the specifications, control drawings or equipment documentation is not sufficient for writing detailed testing procedures.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 23 08 00 page 1 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
1.4
1.5
I.
Provide assistance to the CxA in preparing the specific functional performance test procedures. Review test procedures to ensure feasibility, safety and equipment protection and provide necessary written alarm limits to be used during the tests.
J.
Address current SJRRC punch list items before functional testing. Air and water TAB shall be completed with discrepancies and problems remedied before functional testing of the respective air- or water-related systems.
CxA RESPONSIBILITIES A.
Provide project-specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures for actual HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be furnished and installed as part of the construction contract.
B.
Direct commissioning testing.
C.
Verify that testing, adjusting, and balancing work is complete.
D.
Incorporate test data, inspection reports, and certificates in Systems Manual.
COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION A.
1.6
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Provide the following information to the CxA for inclusion in the commissioning plan: 1.
Plan for delivery and review of submittals, systems manuals, and other documents and reports.
2.
Identification of installed systems, assemblies, equipment, and components including design changes that occurred during the construction phase.
3.
Process and schedule for completing construction checklists and manufacturer's prestart and startup checklists for HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be verified and tested.
4.
Certificate of completion certifying that installation, prestart checks, and startup procedures have been completed.
5.
Certificate of readiness certifying that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, equipment, and associated controls are ready for testing.
6.
Test and inspection reports and certificates.
7.
Corrective action documents.
8.
Verification of testing, adjusting, and balancing reports.
SUBMITTALS A.
Certificates of readiness.
B.
Certificates of completion of installation, prestart, and startup activities.
C.
Control drawings submittal: 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Control drawings shall have a key to all abbreviations. COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 23 08 00 page 2 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
2.
Control drawings shall contain graphic schematic depictions of the systems and each component.
3.
Schematics shall include the system and component layout of any equipment that the control system monitors, enables, or controls, even if the equipment is primarily controlled by packaged or integral controls.
4.
Provide a full points list with at least the following included for each point: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
5.
Controlled system. Point abbreviation. Point description. Display unit. Control point or set point (Yes / No). Monitoring point (Yes / No). Intermediate point (Yes / No). Calculated point (Yes / No).
Key: a. b. c.
d.
e. f.
Point Description: DB (Dry Bulb) temperature, airflow, etc. Control or Set Point: Point that controls equipment and can have its set point changed (outside air temperature, supply air temperature, etc.). Intermediate Point: Point whose value is used to make a calculation which then controls equipment (space temperatures that are averaged to a virtual point to control reset). Monitoring Point: Point that does not control or contribute to the control of equipment, but is used for operation, maintenance, or performance verification. Calculated Point: “Virtual” point generated from calculations of other point values. Keep the CxA informed of all changes to this list during programming and setup.
D.
An updated as-built version of the control drawings and sequences of operation shall be included in the final controls O&M manual submittal.
E.
Provide a signed and dated certification to the CxA and owner representative upon completion of the checkout of each controlled device, equipment, and system prior to functional testing for each piece of equipment or system, that all system programming is complete as to all respects of the contract documents, except functional testing requirements.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 23 08 00 page 3 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
TESTING PREPARATION A.
Certify that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating according to the contract documents.
B.
Certify that HVAC&R instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according to the contract documents, and that pretest set points have been recorded.
C.
Certify that testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures have been completed and that testing, adjusting, and balancing reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved.
D.
Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g., normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions).
E.
Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on checklists.
F.
Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life-safety systems during each mode of operation.
G.
Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data as directed by the CxA.
TESTING AND BALANCING VERIFICATION A.
Prior to performance of testing and balancing work, provide copies of reports, sample forms, checklists, and certificates to the CxA.
B.
Notify the CxA at least 10 days in advance of testing and balancing work, and provide access for the CxA to witness testing and balancing work.
C.
Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to verify testing and balancing of HVAC&R systems at the direction of the CxA.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
1.
CxA will notify Contractor 10 days in advance of the date of field verification. Notice will not include data points to be verified.
2.
Use the same instruments (by model and serial number) that were used when original data were collected.
3.
CxA will sample a minimum of 20 percent of the total number of inlets and outlets included in the project.
4.
Failure of an item, other than sound, indicates a deviation of more than 10 percent. Failure of more than 10 percent of selected items shall result in COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 23 08 00 page 4 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
rejection of final testing, adjusting, and balancing report. For sound pressure readings, a deviation of 3 dB shall result in rejection of final testing. Variations in background noise must be considered. 5.
3.3
3.4
Remedy the deficiency and notify the CxA so that verification of failed portions can be performed.
GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS A.
Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to perform commissioning test at the direction of the CxA.
B.
Scope of HVAC&R testing shall include entire HVAC&R installation, from central equipment for heat generation and refrigeration through distribution systems to each conditioned space. Testing shall include measuring capacities and effectiveness of operational and control functions.
C.
Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal or emergency conditions, and verify proper response of building automation system controllers and sensors.
D.
CxA along with Contractor shall prepare detailed testing plans, procedures, and checklists for HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment.
E.
Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible.
F.
Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it is not practical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by the CxA and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return settings to normal operating conditions.
G.
CxA may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is not practical.
H.
CxA may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical.
I.
If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the HVAC&R system, document the deficiency and report it to Owner Representative. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests.
J.
If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, complete appropriate initial performance tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests.
HVAC&R SYSTEMS, SUBSYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT TESTING PROCEDURES A.
See the Functional Test Plan included as an attachment to Section 01 91 00, Commissioning.
B.
Boiler Testing and Acceptance Procedures: Testing requirements are specified in Division 23 sections. Provide submittals, test data, inspector record, and certifications to the CxA.
C.
HVAC&R Instrumentation and Control System Testing: Field testing plans and testing requirements are specified in Section 23 09 00, Instrumentation and Control for HVAC,
AC Transit Oakland, CA
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 23 08 00 page 5 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
and Section 23 09 93, Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls. Assist the CxA with preparation of functional testing plans. A point-to-point report and trend log reports are required to be submitted and reviewed by the CxA prior to functional testing. The complete instrumentation and control system shall be tested and verified to comply with the contract documents. D.
Pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic tests, and chemical treatment requirements are specified in Division 23 piping sections. Prepare a pipe system cleaning, flushing, and hydrostatic testing plan. Provide cleaning, flushing, testing, and treating plan and final reports to the CxA. Plan shall include the following: 1.
Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each section of pipe to be tested, identified by pipe zone or sector identification marker. Markers shall be keyed to drawings for each pipe sector, showing the physical location of each designated pipe test section. Drawings keyed to pipe zones or sectors shall be formatted to allow each section of piping to be physically located and identified when referred to in pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic testing, and chemical treatment plan.
2.
Description of equipment for flushing operations.
3.
Minimum flushing water velocity.
4.
Tracking checklist for managing and ensuring that all pipe sections have been cleaned, flushed, hydrostatically tested, and chemically treated.
E.
HVAC&R Distribution System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of air and hydronic distribution systems; special exhaust; and other distribution systems, including HVAC&R terminal equipment and unitary equipment.
F.
Vibration and Sound Tests: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of vibration isolation and seismic controls.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 23 08 00 page 6 of 6
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 SECTION 23 09 00
Instrumentation and Control for HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.3
Installer Qualifications: 1.
Installer shall have an established working relationship with the control system manufacturer of not less than three years.
2.
Installer shall have successfully completed control system manufacturer's classes on the control system. Installer shall present for review the certification of completed training, including the hours of instruction and course outlines upon request.
3.
Installer shall have an office within 100 miles of the project site and provide 24-hour response in the event of a customer call.
REFERENCES A.
1.4
Direct digital control system for Operation Center HVAC systems.
Work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of codes and ordinances of local, state, and federal authorities. At a minimum, the installation shall comply with: 1.
California Electrical Code (CEC)
2.
California Building Code (CBC)
3.
California Mechanical Code (CMC)
4.
Underwriters Laboratories: Products shall be UL-916-PAZX listed.
5.
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004 (BACnet)
6.
ANSI/EIA/CEA 709.1 (LonTalk)
SUBMITTALS A.
Contractor shall provide shop drawings and manufacturers’ standard specification data sheets on all hardware and software to be provided. No work may begin on any segment of the work until the Engineer and Owner have reviewed submittals for conformity with drawings and specifications. Submit 6 copies. Shop drawings shall also be provided electronically as .dwg or .dxf file formats.
B.
Quantities of items submitted will be reviewed by the Engineer and Owner. This review shall not relieve Contractor from furnishing quantities required for completion.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 09 00 Page 1 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
C.
Provide Engineer and Owner any additional information or data which is deemed necessary to determine compliance with these specifications or which is deemed valuable in documenting the system to be installed.
D.
Submit the following within 60 days of contract award: 1.
A complete bill of materials of equipment to be used indicating quantity, manufacturer and model number.
2.
A schedule of all control valves including the valve size, model number (including pattern and connections), flow, CV, pressure rating, and location.
3.
A schedule of all control dampers. This shall include the damper size, pressure drop, manufacturer and model number.
4.
Provide manufacturer's cut sheets for major system components. When manufacturer's cut sheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product, the data specifically applicable to the project shall be highlighted or clearly indicated by other means. Each submitted piece of literature and drawings shall clearly reference the specification and/or drawing that the submittal is being submitted to cover. Include: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.
E.
Project Record Documents: Upon completion of installation, submit three copies of record (as-built) documents. The documents shall be submitted for approval prior to substantial completion and shall include: 1.
Project Record Drawings: As-built versions of the approved shop drawings. One set of electronic media including CAD .DWG or .DXF drawing files shall also be provided.
2.
Testing and commissioning reports and checklists.
3.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: As-built versions of the submittal data. In addition to information required for submittals, the O & M manual(s) shall include: a. b.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Building controllers Custom application controllers Application specific controllers Operator interface computer(s) Auxiliary control devices Proposed control system riser diagram showing system configuration, device locations, addresses, and cabling Detailed termination drawings showing all required field and factory terminations, with terminal numbers clearly labeled Points list showing all system objects and proposed English language object names Sequence of operations for each system under control, specific for use of the control system being provided for this project Color prints of proposed graphics with a list of points for display
Names, addresses, and 24-hour telephone numbers of subcontractors installing equipment, and the control systems and service representative of each. Operator's manual with procedures for operating the control systems including logging on/off, alarm handling, producing point reports, trending data, overriding computer control, and changing set points and other variables.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 09 00 Page 2 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation c.
d.
e. f. g. h. i. j.
F.
1.5
1.6
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Programming manual with a description of the programming language including syntax, statement descriptions including algorithms and calculations used, point database creation and modification, program creation and modification, and use of the editor. Engineering, installation and maintenance manual(s) that explains how to design and install new points, panels, and other hardware; preventive maintenance and calibration procedures; how to debug hardware problems; and how to repair or replace hardware. A listing and documentation of all custom software created using the programming language including the point database. One set of magnetic media containing files of the software and database shall also be provided. One set of electronic media containing files of all color-graphic screens created for the project. Complete original issue documentation, installation, and maintenance information for all third party hardware provided including computer equipment and sensors. Complete original issue media for all software provided including operating systems, programming language, operator workstation software, and graphics software. Licenses and warranty documents for all equipment and systems. Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for all system components including a schedule of tasks, time between tasks, and task descriptions.
Training Materials: Provide a course outline and training material for all training classes at least six weeks prior to the first class. Owner reserves the right to modify any or all of the training course outline and training materials. Review and approval by Owner and Engineer shall be completed at least 3 weeks prior to first class.
WARRANTY A.
Labor and materials for control system specified shall be warranted free from defects for a period of twelve (12) months after final completion acceptance by Owner. Control system failures during the warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no charge or reduction in service to Owner. Contractor shall respond to requests for warranty service within 24 hours during customary business hours.
B.
At the end of final start-up/testing, if equipment and systems are operating satisfactorily as determined by Owner and Engineer, Owner will sign certificates certifying that the control system's operation has been tested and accepted in accordance with the terms of this specification. The date of Owner's acceptance shall be the start of warranty.
C.
Operator workstation software, project specific software, graphics, database, and firmware updates shall be provided to Owner at no extra charge during the warranty period. Written authorization by Owner must, however, be granted prior to the installation of such changes.
D.
The system manufacturer shall provide a web-accessible system and support on-line resource that provides Owner access to a question/answer forum, graphics library, user tips, upgrades, and manufacturer training schedules.
OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL A.
All project-developed hardware and software shall become the property of Owner, including but not limited to: 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Project graphic images
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 09 00 Page 3 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 2.
Record drawings
3.
Project database
4.
Project-specific application programming code
5.
All documentation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
GENERAL A.
2.2
2.3
Where products and manufacturers are listed, make submittals for proposed comparable products and substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00, Product Requirements, and Section 01 25 00, Substitution Procedures.
ARCHITECTURE/COMMUNICATION A.
General: This project shall be comprised of a high speed Ethernet network utilizing BACnet/IP communications between system controllers and workstations. Communications between system controllers and sub-networks of custom application controllers and/or application specific controllers shall utilize BACnet MSTP (RS485) communications.
B.
Each system controller shall perform communications to a network of Custom Application and Application Specific Controllers using BACnet/MSTP (RS485) as prescribed by the BACnet standard.
C.
Each system controller shall function as a BACnet Router to each unit controller providing a unique BACnet Device ID for all controllers within the system.
D.
The owner will provide all communication media, connectors, repeaters, network switches, and routers necessary for the high speed Ethernet network. An active Ethernet port will be provided adjacent to each system controller and operator interface (PC) for connection to this high speed Ethernet network.
E.
All values within the system (i.e. schedules, data logs, points, software variables, custom program variables) shall be readable and controllable by any system controller or BACnet workstation on the communications network via BACnet.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE STANDARDS A.
Graphic Display: The system shall display a graphic with a minimum of 20 dynamic points with current data displayed within 20 seconds of the request.
B.
Graphic Refresh: The system shall update all dynamic points with current data within 30 seconds.
C.
Object Command: The maximum time between the command of a binary object by the operator and the reaction by the device shall be 10 seconds. Analog objects shall start to adjust within 10 seconds.
D.
Object Scan: All changes of state and change of analog values shall be transmitted over the high-speed network such that any data used or displayed at a controller or workstation will be current, within the prior 60 seconds.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 09 00 Page 4 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
E.
Alarm Response Time: The maximum time from when an object goes into alarm to when it is annunciated at the workstation shall not exceed 45 seconds.
F.
Program Execution Frequency: Custom and standard applications shall be capable of running as often as once every 5 seconds. Contractor shall be responsible for selecting execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control.
G.
Performance: Programmable controllers shall be able to execute DDC PID control loops at a selectable frequency from at least once every 5 seconds. The controller shall scan and update the process value and output generated by this calculation at this same frequency.
H.
Multiple Alarm Annunciation: All workstations on the network shall receive alarms within 5 seconds of each other.
I.
Reporting Accuracy: The following table lists minimum acceptable reporting accuracies for values reported by the specified system. Reporting Accuracy Measured Variable Space Temperature Ducted Air Outside Air Water Temperature Delta-T Relative Humidity Water Flow Air Flow (terminal) Air Flow (measuring stations) Air Pressure (ducts) Air Pressure (space) Water Pressure Electrical Power Carbon Monoxide (CO) Carbon Dioxide (CO2)
Reported Accuracy ± 0.5°C (±1°F) ± 1.0°C (±2°F) ± 1.0°C (±2°F) ± 0.5°C (±1°F) ± 0.15°C(±0.25°F) ± 5% RH ± 5% of full scale ± 10% of reading *Note 1 ± 5% of reading ± 25 Pa (± 0.1 inch W.G.) ± 3 Pa (± 0.01 inch W.G.) ± 2% of full scale *Note 2 ± 5% of reading *Note 3 ± 5% of reading ± 50 PPM
Note 1: (10%-100% of scale) (cannot read accurately below 10%) Note 2: for both absolute and differential pressure Note 3: (not including utility supplied meters) 2.4
MANUFACTURERS A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Basis of Design: Tracer Summit system by Trane. Provide the indicated product, a comparable product by one of the following, or equal approved as a substitution. 1.
Trane.
2.
Alerton.
3.
Honeywell International.
4.
Johnson Controls.
5.
Siemens Building Technologies.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 09 00 Page 5 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation B.
2.5
The above list of manufacturers applies to operator workstation software, controller software, the custom application programming language, building controllers, custom application controllers, and application specific controllers. Other products specified herein (i.e., sensors, valves, dampers, and actuators) need not be manufactured by the above manufacturers.
MATERIALS A.
2.6
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Products used in this installation shall be new, currently under manufacture, and shall have been applied in similar installations for a minimum of 2 years. The installation shall not be used as a test site for any new products unless explicitly approved by Owner in writing. Spare parts shall be available for at least 5 years after completion of this contract.
APPLICATION AND CONTROL SOFTWARE A.
Furnish the following applications software for building and energy management. All software applications shall reside and run in the system controllers. Editing of applications shall occur at the operator interface. 1.
Scheduling. Provide the capability to schedule each object or group of objects in the system. Each of these schedules shall include the capability for start, stop, optimal start, optimal stop, and night economizer actions. Each schedule may consist of up to 10 events. When a group of objects are scheduled together, provide the capability to define advances and delays for each member. Each schedule shall consist of the following: a. b.
c.
d.
2.
Trend Log Application a.
b.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Weekly Schedule. Exception Schedules. Provide the ability for the operator to designate any day of the year as an exception schedule. This exception schedule shall override the standard schedule for that day. Exception schedules may be defined up to a year in advance. Once an exception schedule is executed it will be discarded and replaced by the standard schedule for that day of the week. Holiday Schedules. Provide the capability for the operator to define up to 99 special or holiday schedules. These schedules may be placed on the scheduling calendar and will be repeated each year. The operator shall be able to define the length of each holiday period. Optimal Start. The scheduling application outlined above shall support an optimal start algorithm. This shall calculate the thermal characteristics of a zone and start the equipment prior to occupancy to achieve the desired space temperature at the specified occupancy time. The algorithm shall calculate separate sets of heating and cooling rates for zones that have been unoccupied for less than and greater than 24 hours. Provide the ability to modify the start algorithm based on outdoor air temperature. Provide an early start limit in minutes to prevent the system from starting before an operator determined time limit.
Trend log data shall be sampled and stored on the system controller panel and shall capable of being achieved to a BACnet workstation for longer term storage. Trend logs shall include interval, start time and stop tome. Trend log intervals shall be configurable as frequently as 1 minute and as infrequently as 1 year. The system controller shall automatically create trend logs for defined key measurements for each controlled HVAC device and HVAC application. The
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 09 00 Page 6 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
c.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
automatic trend logs shall monitor these parameters for a minimum of 7 days at the 15 minute intervals. The automatic trend logs shall be user adjustable. Air Systems Air Handling Unit/Rooftop (VAV)
Discharge Air Temperature Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint Active Space Temperature Active Cooling Capacity Status Discharge Air Flow
Variable Air System
d.
Area Area
3.
b. c. d.
Any object in the system shall be configurable to generate an alarm when transitioning in and out of a normal or fault state. Any object in the system shall allow the alarm limits, warning limits, states, and reactions to be configured for each object in the system. An alarm/event shall be capable of routing the alarm/event to one or more alarm log. The alarm message shall include the name of the alarm location, the device that generated the alarm message itself, and route an email message to an operators.
VAV System Coordination. Provide application software to properly coordinate and control the VAV system to ensure equipment safety and minimize energy use. This application shall perform the following functions. a. b.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Active Setpoint Heat/Cool Mode Status Space Temperature Average Space Maximum Temperature Space Minimum Temperature Space Temperature Sensor
Alarm/Event Log a.
4.
Duct Static Optimization Duct Static Setpoint Space Temperature Average Ventilation Optimization Air Setpoint Operating Mode Duct Pressure Optimization Maximum
Startup and shutdown the air handler safely. Ensure the dampers are open when the air handler is running, to prevent damage to the ductwork due to high air pressure. Fan pressure optimization (ASHRAE 90.1) – Minimize energy usage by controlling system static pressure to the lowest level while maintaining zone airflow requirements.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 09 00 Page 7 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation c.
d.
2.7
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Ventilation optimization (ASHRAE 62) – properly ventilate all spaces while minimizing operating energy costs, using measured outdoor air flow. Dynamically calculate the system outdoor air requirement based on “real time” conditions in the spaces minimizing the amount of unconditioned outdoor air that must be brought into the building. Demand controlled ventilation – the active ventilation set point shall modulate between the occupied ventilation and occupied standby ventilation set point; reset the set point based on CO2 levels in the space.
5.
Point Control. User shall have the option to set the update interval, minimum on/off time, event notification, custom programming on change of events.
6.
Time Override. A standard application shall be utilized to enable/disable temperature control when a user selects on/cancel at the zone sensor, operator interface, or the local operator display. The amount of time that the override takes precedence will be selectable from the operator interface.
7.
The building controller shall utilize industry recognized open standard protocols for communication to unit controllers.
8.
Anti-short cycling. All binary output points shall be protected from short cycling.
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS A.
There shall be one or more independent, standalone microprocessor based system controllers to manage the global strategies described in application and control software section. 1.
The system controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system database, and programming requirements.
2.
The controller shall provide a USB communications port for connection to a PC signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point information and allow central monitoring and alarms.
3.
All system controllers shall have a real time clock.
4.
Data shall be shared between networked system controllers.
5.
The system controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory circuits if an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall assume a predetermined failure mode, generate an alarm notification and create a retrievable file of the state of all applicable memory locations at the time of the failure.
6.
The system controller shall be capable of automatically resetting the system back to normal operating mode.
B.
Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in an enclosure, and shall be rated for operation at -40 deg F to 122 deg F.
C.
Clock Synchronization. All system controllers shall be able to synchronize with a NTP server for automatic time synchronization. All system controllers shall be able to accept a BACnet time synchronization command for automatic time synchronization. All system controllers shall automatically adjust for daylight savings time if applicable.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 09 00 Page 8 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
2.8
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
D.
Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communications and processor. The system controller shall have a display on the main board that indicates the current operating mode of the controller. All wiring connections shall be made to field removable, modular terminal connectors.
E.
Installation. The system controller shall utilize standard DIN mounting methods for installation and replacement.
F.
Memory. The system controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information indefinitely without power to the system controller.
G.
Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shut down below 80% nominal voltage.
H.
BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) Listing. Each system controller shall be listed as a building controller (B-BC) by the BACnet Test Labs.
OPERATOR INTERFACE A.
Furnish one PC based operator interface as shown on the system drawings. Each of these operator interfaces shall be able to access all information in the system. The operator interface shall reside on the enterprise wide network, which is same high speed communications network as system controllers. The enterprise wide network willb e provided by the owner and supports the internet protocol (IP).
B.
Each PC based operator interface shall include the following: 1.
Hardware type: PC or Laptop
2.
Operating systems: Windows XP or Window 7.
3.
Minimum Hardware: a. b. c. d.
Pentium Core 2 DUO or better 4 GB RAM 100 GB hard drive space Internet browser compatible with operator interface requirements.
C.
The operator interface shall be accessible via a web browser.
D.
The operator interface shall support system access on a mobile device via a mobile app to:
AC Transit Oakland, CA
1.
Alarm log
2.
System status
3.
Equipment status
4.
Space status
5.
Standard Equipment graphics
6.
Override set points
7.
Override occupancy
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 09 00 Page 9 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
E.
F.
8.
Acknowledge alarms
9.
Comment on alarms
System Security 1.
Each operator shall be required to login to the system with a user name and password in order to view, edit, add, or delete data.
2.
User profiles shall restrict the user to only the objects, applications, and system functions as assigned by the system administrator.
3.
Each operator shall be allowed to change their user password.
4.
The system administrator shall be able to manage the security for all other users.
5.
The system shall include pre-defined “roles” that allow a system administrator to quickly assign permissions to a user.
6.
User logon/logoff attempts shall be recorded.
7.
The system shall protect itself from unauthorized use by automatically logging off following the last keystroke. The delay time shall be user definable.
8.
All system security data shall be stored in an encrypted format.
Equipment and Application pages. 1.
2.9
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
The operator interface shall include standard pages for all equipment and applications. These pages shall allow an operator to obtain information relevant to the operation of the equipment and/or applications including system graphic, alarms and historical data.
G.
System Graphics. Operator interface shall be graphically based and shall include at least one graphic per piece of equipment or occupied zone, graphics for heating hot water system, and graphics indicating zone temperature in relative to the set points.
H.
Provide scheduling and trend logs.
I.
Provide alarm and event notification.
J.
Provide reports and logs.
K.
Custom application programming. Provide the tools to create modify and debug custom application programming. The operator shall be able to create, edit and download custom programs at the same time that all other system applications are operating. The system shall be fully operable while custom routines are edited, compiled and downloaded.
L.
Custom graphic editor. Provide the tools to create, modify and debug custom graphics. The operator shall be able to create, edit and download custom graphics at the same time that all other system applications are operating. The system shall be fully operable while custom graphics are edited, compiled and downloaded.
AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Motorized dampers, unless otherwise specified, shall be as follows: INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 09 00 Page 10 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
1.
Damper frames shall be 0.06 inch thick (16 gauge) galvanized sheet metal or 1/8 inch extruded aluminum with reinforced corner bracing.
2.
Damper blades shall not exceed 8 inches in width or 48 inches in length. Blades shall be suitable for medium velocity performance (2,000 fpm). Blades shall be not less than 16 gauge.
3.
Damper shaft bearings shall be as recommended by manufacturer for application.
4.
Blade edges and top and bottom of frame shall be provided with compressible seals. Side seals shall be compressible stainless steel. Blade seals shall provide for a maximum leakage rate of 10 cfm per square foot at 2.5 inches of water column differential pressure.
5.
Leakage testing and pressure ratings shall be based on AMCA Publication 500.
6.
Individual damper sections shall not be larger than 48 inches by 60 inches. Provide a minimum of one damper actuator per section.
B.
Control dampers shall be parallel or opposed blade types as scheduled on drawings.
C.
Electric Damper/Valve Actuators:
D.
1.
Actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent damage to the actuator throughout the rotation of the actuator.
2.
Where shown, for power-failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical, spring return mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing.
3.
Rotary spring return actuators shall be capable of both clockwise or counter clockwise spring return operation. Linear actuators shall spring return to the retracted position.
4.
Proportional actuators shall accept a 0-10 VDC or 0-20 ma control signal and provide a 2-10 VDC or 4-20 ma operating range.
5.
Non-spring return actuators shall have an external manual gear release to allow manual positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered. Spring return actuators with more than 60 in-lb. torque capacity shall have a manual crank for this purpose.
6.
Actuators shall be provided with a conduit fitting and a minimum 1m electrical cable and shall be pre-wired to eliminate the necessity of opening the actuator housing to make electrical connections.
7.
Actuators shall be UL 873 listed.
8.
Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full stroke cycles at the actuator's rated torque.
Binary Temperature Devices: 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Low-voltage space thermostats shall be 24 V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type, with either adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed setpoint adjustment, 13 deg C to 30 deg C (55 deg F to 85 deg F) setpoint range, 1 deg C (2 deg F) maximum differential, and vented cover.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 09 00 Page 11 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
E.
F.
G.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
2.
Line-voltage space thermostats shall be bimetal-actuated, open-contact type or bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-switch type or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator, UL listing for electrical rating, concealed setpoint adjustment, 13 deg C to 30 deg C (55 deg F to 85 deg F) setpoint range, 1 deg C (2 deg F) maximum differential, and vented cover.
3.
Low-limit airstream thermostats shall be UL listed, vapor pressure type. Element shall be at least 20 feet long. Element shall sense temperature in each 1 foot section and shall respond to lowest sensed temperature. Low-limit thermostat shall be manual reset only.
Temperature Sensors: 1.
Temperature sensors shall be resistance temperature device (RTD) or thermistor.
2.
Duct sensors shall be rigid or averaging as shown. Averaging sensors shall be a minimum of 5 feet in length.
3.
Immersion sensors shall be provided with a separable stainless steel well. Pressure rating of well shall be consistent with the system pressure in which it is to be installed.
4.
Space sensors shall be equipped with set-point adjustment, override switch, display, and/or communication port as shown on drawings.
5.
Provide matched temperature sensors for differential temperature measurement. Differential accuracy shall be within 0.1 deg C (0.2 deg F).
6.
The space temperature, setpoint, and override confirmation shall be annunciated by a digital display for each zone sensor. The setpoint shall be selectable utilizing buttons.
Humidity Sensors: 1.
Duct and room sensors shall have a sensing range of 20 to 80 percent with accuracy of ± 5 percent relative humidity.
2.
Duct sensors shall be provided with a sampling chamber.
3.
Outdoor air humidity sensors shall have a sensing range of 20 to 95 percent relative humidity. Sensors shall be suitable for ambient conditions of -40 deg C to 75 deg C (40 deg F to 170 deg F].
4.
Humidity sensor's drift shall not exceed 1 percent of full scale per year.
Static Pressure Sensors: 1.
Sensor shall have linear output signal. Zero and span shall be field-adjustable.
2.
Sensor sensing elements shall withstand continuous operating conditions plus or minus 50 percent greater than calibrated span without damage.
3.
Water pressure sensor shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction, proof pressure of 150 psi minimum. Sensor shall be complete with 4-20 ma output, required mounting brackets, and block and bleed valves. Mount in location accessible for service.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 09 00 Page 12 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 4.
H.
I.
K.
L.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Water differential pressure sensor shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction, proof pressure of 150 psi minimum. Over-range limit (DP) and maximum static pressure shall be 3,000 psi. Transmitter shall be complete with 4-20 ma output, required mounting brackets, and five-valve manifold. Mount in a location accessible for service.
Low Limit Thermostats: 1.
Safety low limit thermostats shall be vapor pressure type with an element 20 feet minimum length. Element shall respond to the lowest temperature sensed by any 1 foot section.
2.
Low limit shall be manual reset only.
Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Sensors: 1.
J.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Carbon dioxide sensors shall measure CO2 in ppm in a range of 0 to 2000 ppm. Accuracy shall be +/- 3 percent of reading with stability within 5 percent over 5 years. Sensors shall be duct or space mounted as indicated in the sequence of operation.
Flow Switches: 1.
Flow-proving switches shall be either paddle or differential pressure type, as shown.
2.
Paddle type switches (water service only) shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting with pilot duty rating (125 VA minimum), adjustable sensitivity with NEMA 1 type enclosure unless otherwise specified.
3.
Differential pressure type switches (air or water service) shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum), NEMA 1 type enclosure, with scale range and differential suitable for intended application, or as specified.
4.
Current sensing relays may be used for flow sensing or terminal devices.
Relays: 1.
Control relays shall be UL listed plug-in type with dust cover, with contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application.
2.
Time delay relays shall be UL listed solid-state plug-in type with adjustable time delay. Delay shall be adjustable plus or minus 200 percent (minimum) from set-point shown on plans. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage shall be suitable for application. Provide NEMA 1 type enclosure when not installed in local control panel.
Transformers and Power Supplies: 1.
Control transformers shall be UL listed, Class 2 current-limiting type, or shall be furnished with over-current protection in both primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service.
2.
Unit output shall match the required output current and voltage requirements. Current output shall allow for a 50 percent safety factor. Output ripple shall be 3.0 mV maximum peak-to-peak. Regulation shall be 0.10 percent line and load combined, with 50 microsecond response time for 50 percent load changes. Unit shall have built-in over-voltage protection.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 09 00 Page 13 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
M.
3.
Unit shall operate between 0 deg C and 50 deg C (0 deg F and 120 deg F).
4.
Unit shall be UL recognized.
Current Switches: 1.
N.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Current-operated switches shall be self-powered, solid state with adjustable trip current. Switches shall be selected to match the current of the application and output requirements of the DDC system.
Local Control Panels: 1.
All indoor control cabinets shall be fully enclosed NEMA 1 type construction with hinged door and removable sub-panels or electrical sub-assemblies.
2.
Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices shall be pre-wired with color-coded stranded conductors neatly installed in plastic troughs and/or tiewrapped. Terminals for field connections shall be UL listed for 600-volt service, individually identified per control/interlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring. Control terminations for field connection shall be individually identified per control drawings.
3.
Provide on/off power switch with over-current protection for control power sources to each local panel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION A.
Thoroughly examine drawings for control device and equipment locations. Report discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions to Engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started.
B.
Inspect the site to verify that equipment is installable as shown. Report discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions to Engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started.
PROTECTION A.
Protect work and material from damage by work or workers, and be liable for damage thus caused.
B.
Be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted. Protect work against theft or damage, and carefully store material and equipment received on site that is not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign objects.
GENERAL WORKMANSHIP A.
Install equipment, piping, and wiring/conduit parallel to building lines (i.e., horizontal, vertical, and parallel to walls) wherever possible.
B.
Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 09 00 Page 14 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
3.4
3.5
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
C.
Install equipment in readily accessible location as defined by Chapter 1, Article 100, Part A of the National Electrical Code. Control panels shall be attached to structural walls unless mounted in equipment enclosure specifically designed for that purpose. Panels shall be mounted to allow for unobstructed access for service.
D.
Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds.
E.
Equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with acceptable industry specifications and standards for performance, reliability, and compatibility and be executed in strict adherence to local codes and standard practices.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Continually monitor field installation for code compliance and quality of workmanship. Visible piping and or wiring runs shall be installed parallel to building lines and properly supported.
B.
Arrange for field inspections by local and state authorities having jurisdiction over the work.
WIRING A.
Control and interlock wiring shall comply with the national and local electrical codes and Division 26 of these specifications. Where the requirements of this section differ with those in Division 26, the requirements of this section shall take precedence.
B.
Where Class 2 wires are in concealed and accessible locations, including ceiling return air plenums, approved cables not in raceway may be used provided that:
C.
Circuits meet NEC Class 2 (current-limited) requirements. (Low-voltage power circuits shall be sub-fused when required to meet Class 2 current-limit.)
D.
All cables shall be UL listed for application, i.e., cables used in ceiling plenums shall be UL listed specifically for that purpose.
E.
Do not install Class 2 wiring in conduit containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels containing high voltage may not be used for low voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the two (e.g., relays and transformers).
F.
Where class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring shall be run parallel along a surface or perpendicular to it, and bundled, using approved wire ties at no greater than 10 foot intervals. Such bundled cable shall be fastened to the structure, using specified fasteners, at 5 foot intervals or more often to achieve a neat and workmanlike result.
G.
Wire-to-device connections shall be made at a terminal blocks or terminal strip. Wire-to wire connections shall be at a terminal block, or with a crimped connector. Wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to permit access and prevent restriction to devices and terminals.
H.
Maximum allowable voltage for control wiring shall be 120V. If only higher voltages are available, provide step down transformers.
I.
Wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths where possible. Any required splices shall be made only within an approved junction box or other approved protective device.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 09 00 Page 15 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
3.6
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
J.
Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors. Maintain fire rating at all penetrations in accordance with other sections of this specification and local codes.
K.
Size of conduit and size and type of wire shall be the design responsibility of Contractor, in keeping with the manufacturer's recommendation and NEC.
L.
Control and status relays are to be located in designated enclosures only. These relays may also be located within packaged equipment control panel enclosures. These relays shall not be located within Class 1 starter enclosures.
M.
Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations for all communication and network cabling. Network or communication cabling shall be run separately from other wiring.
N.
Comply with Division 26 requirements for installation of raceway.
O.
Terminate control and/or interlock wiring and maintain updated (as-built) wiring diagrams with terminations identified at job site.
P.
Flexible metal conduits and liquid-tight, flexible metal conduits shall not exceed 3 feet in length and shall be supported at each end. Flexible metal conduit less than 1/2 inch electrical trade size shall not be used. In areas exposed to moisture, including chiller and boiler rooms, liquid-tight, flexible metal conduits shall be used.
INSTALLATION OF SENSORS A.
Install sensors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Mount sensors rigidly and adequately for the environment within which the sensor operates.
C.
Install room temperature sensors on concealed junction boxes properly supported by wall framing.
D.
Wires attached to sensors shall be air sealed in their conduits or in the wall to prevent air transmitted from other areas from affecting sensor readings.
E.
Install duct static pressure tap with tube end facing directly downstream of air flow.
F.
Sensors used in mixing plenums and hot and cold decks shall be of the averaging type. Averaging sensors shall be installed in a serpentine manner horizontally across duct. Each bend shall be supported with a capillary clip.
G.
Pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be installed in wells. Install liquid temperature sensors with heat conducting fluid in thermal wells.
H.
Wiring for space sensors shall be concealed in building walls. EMT conduit is acceptable within mechanical and service rooms.
I.
Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north wall complete with sun shield at designated location.
J.
Provide complete submittal data for duct smoke detection to controls system manufacturer and installer for coordination of duct smoke detector interface to HVAC systems. Provide a dry-contact alarm output in the same room as the HVAC equipment to be controlled.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 09 00 Page 16 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 3.7
ACTUATORS A.
3.8
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Mount and link control damper actuators per manufacturer's instructions. 1.
To compress seals when spring return actuators are used on normally closed dampers, power actuator to approximately 5 degree open position, manually close the damper, and then tighten the linkage.
2.
Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates damper smoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed positions.
3.
Valves: Actuators shall be mounted on valves with adapters approved by the actuator manufacturer. Actuators and adapters shall be mounted following manufacturer's recommendations.
WARNING LABELS A.
Affix labels on each starter and equipment automatically controlled through the direct digital control system. Warning label shall indicate the following: CAUTION This equipment is operating under automatic control and may start or stop at any time without warning. Switch disconnect to "Off" position before servicing.
B.
Affix labels to motor starters and control panels that are connected to multiple power sources utilizing separate disconnects. Labels shall indicate the following: CAUTION This equipment is fed from more than one power source with separate disconnects. Disconnect all power sources before servicing.
3.9
3.10
IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING A.
All wiring and cabling, including that within factory-fabricated panels, shall be labeled at each end within 2 inches of termination with a cable identifier and other descriptive information.
B.
Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show the instrument or item served.
C.
Identify control panels with minimum 1/2 inch letters on nameplates.
D.
Identify all other control components with permanent labels. Identifiers shall match record documents. Plug-in components shall be labeled such that removal of the component does not remove the label.
CONTROLLERS A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Provide a separate controller for each major piece of HVAC equipment. A custom application controller may control more than one system provided that all points associated with that system are assigned to the same controller. Points used for control loop reset such as outside air or space temperature are exempt from this requirement. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 09 00 Page 17 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation B.
Building controllers and custom application controllers shall be selected to provide a minimum of 15 percent spare input/output point capacity for each point type found at each location. If input points are not universal, 15 percent of each type is required. If outputs are not universal, 15 percent of each type is required. A minimum of one spare is required for each type of point used. 1.
3.11
A.
Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and trend logging. There shall be a minimum of 25 percent of available memory free for future use.
B.
Point Naming: System point names shall be modular in design, allowing easy operator interface without the use of a written point index.
C.
Software Programming:
D.
3.13
Future use of spare capacity shall require providing the field device, field wiring, points database definition, and custom software. No additional controller boards or point modules shall be required to implement use of these spare points.
PROGRAMMING
1.
3.12
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Provide programming for the system as specified and adhere to the sequence strategies provided. Other system programming necessary for the operation of the system but not specified shall also be provided by Contractor. Imbed into any custom-written control programs sufficient comment statements or inherent flow diagrams to clearly describe each section of the program. The comment statements shall reflect the language used in the sequence of operations.
Demonstration: A complete demonstration and readout of the capabilities of the monitoring and control system shall be performed. Contractor shall dedicate a minimum of 8 hours onsite with Owner personnel and Engineer for a complete functional demonstration of all system requirements. This demonstration constitutes a joint acceptance inspection, and permits acceptance of the delivered system for on-line operation.
CLEANING A.
Clean up all debris resulting from work daily. Remove cartons, containers, crates, etc. as soon as their contents have been removed. Waste shall be collected and placed in designated locations.
B.
At the completion of work in any area, clean the work and equipment, making it free from dust, dirt, debris, etc.
C.
At the completion of work, equipment shall be checked for paint damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. Any metal cabinet or enclosure that has been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas.
TRAINING A.
Provide a minimum of two classroom training sessions, four hours each, throughout the contract period for personnel designated by Owner. Computer-based audiovisual training may be substituted for up to 8 hours of hands-on training.
B.
Train Owner designated personnel to enable them to proficiently operate the system; create, modify and delete programming; add, remove, and modify physical points for the system; and perform routine diagnostic and troubleshooting procedures.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 09 00 Page 18 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation C.
3.14
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Additional training shall be available in courses designed to meet objectives as divided into three logical groupings; participants may attend one or more of these, depending on the level of knowledge required: 1.
Day-to-day operators
2.
Advanced operators
3.
System managers/administrators
D.
Provide one copy of training material (course materials and outline) per student.
E.
Instructor(s) shall be factory-trained instructors experienced in presenting this material.
F.
Classroom training shall be conducted using a network of working controllers representative of the installed hardware or at the project site.
G.
This training shall be made available in addition to the interactive audiovisual tutorial provided with the system.
ACCEPTANCE A.
The control systems will not be accepted as meeting the requirements of substantial completion until all tests described in this specification have been performed to the satisfaction of both Engineer and Owner. Tests that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control of Contractor may be exempt from the completion requirements if so indicated in writing by Owner. Such tests shall then be performed as part of the warranty service. END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 09 00 Page 19 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
AC Transit Oakland, CA
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 09 00 Page 20 of 20
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 SECTION 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
B.
Section Includes: Pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and specialties for the following: 1.
Hot-water heating piping.
2.
Chilled water piping.
3.
Air-vent piping.
Related Sections: 1.
1.2
P ERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
1.3
Section 23 05 23 General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping
Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature: 1.
Hot-Water Heating Piping: 150 psig at 200 deg F.
2.
Chilled Water Piping: 250 psig at 200 deg F.
3.
Air-Vent Piping: 200 deg F.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of the following: 1.
Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.
2.
Air control devices.
3.
Hydronic specialties.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail, at 1/4 (1:50) scale, the piping layout, fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.
C.
Welding certificates.
D.
Qualification Data: For installer.
E.
Field quality-control test reports.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 page 1 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
1.4
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
F.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For air control devices, hydronic specialties, and special-duty valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
G.
Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at project site.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: 1.
Installers of Pressure-Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by the pressureseal joint manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure-seal pipe couplings and fittings.
B.
Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel.
C.
Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.
D.
1.
Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, Code for Pressure Piping.
2.
Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current.
ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, Building Services Piping, for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 01.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A.
Type L hard copper tubing complying with ASTM B 88, with wrought copper or cast bronze solder joint pressure fittings, stop type couplings and threaded adapters. Solder must be lead-free.
B.
Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or equal approved as a substitution: a. b. c.
2.2
Anvil International, Inc. S. P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products. Victaulic Company of America.
STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as indicated under "Piping Applications" in Part 3.
B.
Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 a as indicated under "Piping Applications" in Part 3.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 page 2 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation C.
Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated under "Piping Applications" in Part 3.
D.
Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated under "Piping Applications" in Part 3.
E.
Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated under "Piping Applications" in Part 3.
F.
Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A234, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.
G.
Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
H.
2.3
1.
Material Group: 1.1.
2.
End Connections: Butt welding.
3.
Facings: Raised face.
Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in which they are installed.
JOINING MATERIALS A.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1.
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a.
B. 2.4
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A.
Description: Combination fitting of copper-alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B.
Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C.
Dielectric Unions: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or equal approved as a substitution: a. b. c. d. e.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Capitol Manufacturing Company. Central Plastics Company. Hart Industries International, Inc. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; AquaSpec Commercial Products Division. HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 page 3 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 2.
D.
Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.
Dielectric Flanges: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or equal approved as a substitution: a. b. c.
2.
E.
Factory-fabricated companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or equal approved as a substitution: a. b.
2.
Calpico, Inc. Lochinvar Corporation.
Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
Dielectric Nipples: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or equal approved as a substitution: a. b. c. d.
2.
2.5
Capitol Manufacturing Company. Central Plastics Company. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Dielectric Couplings: 1.
F.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. Victaulic Company of America.
Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
VALVES A.
Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Section 23 05 23, General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping.
B.
Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements specified in Section 23 09 00, Instrumentation and Control for HVAC.
C.
Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or equal approved as a substitution: a. b.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Armstrong Pumps, Inc. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 page 4 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation c. d. e. f.
D.
Flow Design Inc. Gerand Engineering Co. Griswold Controls. Taco.
2.
Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi.
3.
Ball: Brass or stainless steel.
4.
Plug: Resin.
5.
Seat: PTFE.
6.
End Connections: Threaded or socket.
7.
Pressure Gauge Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.
8.
Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.
9.
CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig.
10.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
Cast-Iron or Steel, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or equal approved as a substitution: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Armstrong Pumps, Inc. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. Flow Design Inc. Gerand Engineering Co. Griswold Controls. Taco. Tour & Andersson; available through Victaulic Company of America.
2.
Body: Cast-iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or venturi.
3.
Ball: Brass or stainless steel.
4.
Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.
5.
Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.
6.
Seat: PTFE.
7.
End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
8.
Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.
9.
Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.
HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 page 5 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
E.
10.
CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig.
11.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
Automatic Flow-Control Valves: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or equal approved as a substitution: a. b.
2.6
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Flow Design Inc. Griswold Controls.
2.
Body: Brass or ferrous metal.
3.
Piston and Spring Assembly: Stainless steel, tamper proof, self cleaning, and removable.
4.
Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass-alloy ball valve.
5.
Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate.
6.
Size: Same as pipe in which installed.
7.
Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure fluctuations.
8.
Minimum CWP Rating: 175 psig.
9.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 200 deg F.
AIR CONTROL DEVICES A.
B.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.
Amtrol, Inc.
2.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
3.
Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
4.
Taco.
Manual Air Vents: 1.
Body: Bronze.
2.
Internal Parts: Nonferrous.
3.
Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.
4.
Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.
5.
Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8.
HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 page 6 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
C.
2.7
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
6.
CWP Rating: 150 psig.
7.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.
Automatic Air Vents: 1.
Body: Bronze or cast iron.
2.
Internal Parts: Nonferrous.
3.
Operator: Noncorrosive metal float.
4.
Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.
5.
Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4.
6.
CWP Rating: 150 psig.
7.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES A.
Y-Pattern Strainers: 1.
Body: ASTM A126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.
2.
End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3.
Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area.
4.
CWP Rating: 125 psig.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PIPING APPLICATIONS A.
B.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following: 1.
Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange fittings; and threaded joints or same as existing pipe.
2.
Copper (Type L minimum), suitable for the working pressure involved but not less than 175 psi
Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be the following: 1.
Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.
2.
Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved, mechanical joints. HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 page 7 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation C.
D.
Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following: 1.
Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange fittings; and threaded joints or same as existing pipe.
2.
Copper (Type L minimum), suitable for the working pressure involved but not less than 200 psi
Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be the following: 1.
Copper (Type L minimum), suitable for the working pressure involved but not less than 200 psi.
2.
Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints
3.
Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved mechanical joints.
E.
Condensate drain piping: Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.
F.
Air-Vent Piping: 1.
3.2
3.3
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Inlet: Same as service.
VALVE APPLICATIONS A.
Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection to each piece of equipment.
B.
Install balancing valves at each branch connection to return main.
C.
Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.
D.
Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.
PIPING INSTALLATIONS A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
C.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
D.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
E.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 page 8 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
3.4
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
F.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
G.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
H.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
I.
Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.
J.
Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.
K.
Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
L.
Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
M.
Install branch connections to mains using mechanically formed tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.
N.
Install valves according to Section 23 05 23, General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping.
O.
Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
P.
Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.
Q.
Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2.
R.
Identify all installed piping similar to existing.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.
Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Section 23 05 29, Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment. Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports.
B.
Seismic restraints are specified in Section 23 05 48, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
C.
Install the following pipe attachments:
AC Transit Oakland, CA
1.
Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long.
2.
Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer.
HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 page 9 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
D.
E. 3.5
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
3.
Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze.
4.
Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1.
NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
2.
NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3.
NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
4.
NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
5.
NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
6.
NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
7.
NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
8.
NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 13 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
9.
NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.
10.
NPS 5: Maximum span, 16 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.
11.
NPS 6: Maximum span, 17 feet; minimum rod size, 3/4 inch.
12.
NPS 8: Maximum span, 19 feet; minimum rod size, 3/4 inch.
13.
NPS 10: Maximum span, 22 feet; minimum rod size, 7/8 inch.
14.
NPS 12: Maximum span, 23 feet; minimum rod size, 7/8 inch.
15.
NPS 14: Maximum span, 25 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch.
16.
NPS 16: Maximum span, 27 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch.
17.
NPS 18: Maximum span, 28 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch.
18.
NPS 20: Maximum span, 30 feet minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inches (30 mm).
Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 sections specifying piping systems.
B.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 page 10 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
3.6
3.7
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
D.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B828 or CDA's Copper Tube Handbook, using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B32.
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's Brazing Handbook, "Pipe and Tube" chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.
2.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" article.
H.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I.
Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings.
J.
Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure, and brazed joints.
K.
Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure. Leave insertion marks on pipe after assembly.
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A.
Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.
B.
Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms only. Manual vents at heat-transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting.
TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A.
Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections.
B.
Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C.
Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 page 11 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation D.
3.8
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections according to Section 23 05 19, Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
B.
C.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 1.
Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
2.
Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.
3.
Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens.
4.
Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.
Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: Contractor must notify the owner representative and engineer at least 3 days in advance of the dates and times tests are to be performed. 1.
Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium.
2.
While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.
3.
Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, Building Services Piping.
4.
After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
5.
Prepare written report of testing.
Perform the following before operating the system: 1.
Open manual valves fully.
2.
Inspect pumps for proper rotation.
3.
Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure.
4.
Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).
HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 page 12 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
5.
Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
6.
Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers, cooling towers, to specified values.
7.
Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.
8.
Upon completion of mechanical work and pre-test requirements, or at such time prior to contract acceptance as determined by the engineer, the contractor must operate and test the complete hydronic heating system for at least 5 consecutive 8-hour days to demonstrate satisfactory overall operation. The project completion test must consist of the following: a. b. c. d.
Ambient temperature and conditions Circulating fluid flow through each pump Air temperature in the project area. The measurements must be taken prior to 8 am each morning and after 1pm each afternoon.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 page 13 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
AC Transit Oakland, CA
HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 page 14 of 14
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 SECTION 23 31 00 METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
B.
1.2
1.
Steel ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air distribution systems in pressure classes from minus 2 inch to plus 10 inch wg.
2.
Rectangular ducts and fittings.
3.
Single wall, round, spiral seam ducts and formed fittings.
4.
Duct liner.
5.
Accessories required for a complete installation.
Related Sections: 1.
Section 08 31 00, Access Doors and Panels.
2.
Section 09 91 00, Painting.
3.
Section 23 33 00, Air Duct Accessories.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.
1.3
Section Includes:
Duct system design has been used to select size and type of air moving and distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be approved in writing by Engineer. Accompany requests for layout modification with calculations showing that proposed layout provides original design results without increasing system total pressure.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications for manufactured products and factory fabricated ductwork.
B.
Shop Drawings: CAD generated and drawn to 1/4 inch equals 1 foot (1:50) scale. Show fabrication and installation details for metal ducts.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
1.
Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.
2.
Duct layout indicating sizes and pressure classes.
3.
Elevations of top and bottom of ducts.
4.
Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.
5.
Existing ductwork and associated fire smoke dampers.
6.
Fittings.
METAL DUCTS 23 31 00 page 1 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
C.
D.
E.
1.4
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
7.
Reinforcement and spacing.
8.
Seam and joint construction.
9.
Penetrations through fire rated and other partitions.
10.
Equipment installation based on equipment being used on project.
11.
Duct accessories, including access doors and panels.
12.
Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, vibration isolation, and seismic restraints.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1.
Ceiling suspension assembly members.
2.
Other systems installed in same space as ducts including existing.
3.
Ceiling and wall mounting access doors and panels required to provide access to dampers and other operating devices.
4.
Ceiling mounting items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
Certificates and Test Reports: 1.
Welding certificates.
2.
Field quality control test reports.
Record Documents: Submit record drawings and specifications showing actual locations of ducts and duct fittings; changes in fitting location and type; additional fittings used; and manufacturers and products installed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Regulatory Requirements: 1.
NFPA Compliance: a. b.
B.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
NFPA 90A, Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. NFPA 90B, Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to 1.
AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code—Steel, for hangers and supports.
2.
AWS D1.2, Structural Welding Code—Aluminum, for aluminum supporting members.
3.
AWS D9.1, Sheet Metal Welding Code, for duct joint and seam welding.
METAL DUCTS 23 31 00 page 2 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.5
1.6
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Protect shop fabricated and factory fabricated ductwork and accessories from damage during shipping, storage, and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering duct and fittings.
B.
Store ductwork inside and protected from weather.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.
Do not install duct sealant when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers.
B.
Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealant.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
GENERAL A.
2.2
Where products and manufacturers are listed, make submittals for proposed comparable products and substitutions for review and approval.
MATERIALS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: 1.
Duct Liner: a. b. c. d.
2.
Traverse Joints: a. b.
3.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
McGill AirFlow, div. United McGill Corporation. Semco Incorporated.
Duct Joints: a. b.
B.
Ductmate Industries, Inc. Lockformer, div. Fortek, a Mestek company.
Flat Oval: a. b.
5.
Ductmate Industries, Inc. Ward Industries, subsidiary of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
Formed Flanges: a. b.
4.
CertainTeed Corporation. Johns Manville, a Berkshire Hathaway company. Knauf Insulation. Owens Corning.
Ductmate Industries, Inc. Lindab Inc.
Comply with SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. Provide sheet metal materials free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. METAL DUCTS 23 31 00 page 3 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
C.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock forming quality; complying with ASTM A653 and having G90 coating designation; provide ducts with mill phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view.
D.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts.
E.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4 inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8 inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
F.
Fibrous Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with NAIMA AH124. 1.
Materials: ASTM C1071; coat surfaces exposed to airstream to prevent erosion of glass fibers. a. b. c. d. e.
G.
H.
Joint and Seam Sealants: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open weave fabric strips and mastics. 1.
Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; glass fiber reinforced fabric.
2.
Tape Sealing System: Woven fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.
3.
Water Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.
4.
Flanged Joint Mastic: One part, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
5.
Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
Hangers and Supports: 1.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Thickness: 1/2 inch. Thermal Conductivity (k Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature. Fire Hazard Classification: Maximum flame spread index of 25 and smoke developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E84. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C916. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in duct. 1) Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50 lb tensile, dead-load test perpendicular to duct wall. 2) Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without projecting more than 1/8 inch into airstream. 3) Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire hazard classification of duct liner system.
Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder actuated fasteners, or structural steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
METAL DUCTS 23 31 00 page 4 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation a. b. 2.
Use powder actuated concrete fasteners for standard weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. Exception: Do not use powder actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod. a.
b.
c.
Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc chromate primer after installation. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters. Paint surfaces where galvanized steel straps are attached to aluminum ducts with zinc chromate primer.
3.
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.
4.
Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A36. a.
2.3
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Supports for Galvanized Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates.
RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION A.
Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction according to SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible and complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and intervals. 1.
Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure class.
2.
Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible.
B.
Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide on joints and components constructed using manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcement.
C.
Formed On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible, Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details.
D.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
1.
Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches wide and up to 2-inch wg pressure class.
2.
Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.
Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are lined.
METAL DUCTS 23 31 00 page 5 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 2.4
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS A.
Adhere single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.
B.
Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.
C.
Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
D.
Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure buttededge overlapping.
E.
Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.
F.
Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm.
G.
Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or Z profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at following locations:
H.
1.
Fan discharges.
2.
Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
3.
Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are greater than 2500 fpm or where indicated.
Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
PREPARATION A.
Verify size of equipment connections before fabricating transitions.
B.
Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
DUCT APPLICATIONS A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Static Pressure Classes: Construct ducts according to the following: 1.
Supply Ducts: 3 inch wg.
2.
Supply Ducts (Before Air Terminal Units): 3 inch wg.
3.
Supply Ducts (After Air Terminal Units): 2 inch wg.
4.
Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2 inch wg.
5.
Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2 inch wg.
METAL DUCTS 23 31 00 page 6 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 3.3
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
DUCT INSTALLATION A.
Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
C.
Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.
D.
Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of 3 screws in each coupling.
E.
Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
F.
Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.
G.
Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
H.
Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions unless specifically indicated.
I.
Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished work.
J.
Seal joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.
K.
Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
L.
Non-fire Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
M.
Fire Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and fire-stopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Section 23 33 00, Air Duct Accessories. Fire stopping materials and installation methods are specified in Section 07 84 00, Fire stopping.
N.
Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to withstand, without damage to equipment, seismic force required by applicable building codes. Refer to SMACNA's Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems or NUSIG.
O.
Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed. Follow SMACNA's Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines, Appendix G to IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction. Keep duct ends sealed at all times.
P.
Paint interiors of metal ducts, that do not have duct liner, for 24 inches upstream of registers and grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex finish coat over a compatible galvanized steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section 09 91 00, Painting.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
METAL DUCTS 23 31 00 page 7 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 3.4
SEAM AND JOINT SEALING A.
Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible for duct pressure class indicated. 1.
B. 3.5
3.7
For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg, seal transverse joints.
Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.
HANGING AND SUPPORTING A.
Refer to Section 23 05 48, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment, for piping, ductwork, and equipment seismic restraint requirements.
B.
Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.
C.
Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor.
D.
Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure (proof test) load.
E.
Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
F.
Install powder actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 1.
3.6
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Do not use powder actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
CONNECTIONS A.
Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Section 23 33 00, Air Duct Accessories.
B.
Comply with SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Perform field tests and inspections according to SMACNA's HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual and prepare test reports: 1.
Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.
2.
Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.
3.
Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Class 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classes lower than and equal to 2 inch wg (both positive and negative pressures), and Leakage Class 6 for pressure classes from 2 to 10 inch wg.
4.
Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is equal to or less than maximum allowable.
METAL DUCTS 23 31 00 page 8 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 3.8
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
CLEANING NEW SYSTEMS A.
Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and perform cleaning before air balancing.
B.
Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection. 1.
Create other openings to comply with duct standards.
2.
Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.
3.
Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning process.
C.
Vent vacuuming system to the outside. Include filtration to contain debris removed from HVAC systems, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building.
D.
Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants and deposits:
E.
F.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
1.
Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).
2.
Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.
3.
Air handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.
4.
Coils and related components.
5.
Return air ducts, dampers, and actuators except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms.
6.
Supply air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.
Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1.
Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.
2.
Use vacuum collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure.
3.
Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.
4.
Clean fibrous glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet.
5.
Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA ACR Standard, Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins.
Cleanliness Verification:
METAL DUCTS 23 31 00 page 9 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
1.
Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants.
2.
Where contaminants are discovered, reclean and reinspect ducts.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
METAL DUCTS 23 31 00 page 10 of 10
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370 SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
B.
Section Includes: 1.
Volume dampers.
2.
Turning vanes.
3.
Duct mounting access doors.
4.
Flexible ducts.
5.
Duct accessory hardware.
6.
Air distribution devices.
7.
Accessories required for a complete installation.
8.
Flexible connections.
Related Sections: 1.
1.2
Section 23 09 00, Instrumentation and Control for HVAC.
SUBMITTALS A.
B.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical data: 1.
Volume dampers.
2.
Turning vanes.
3.
Duct mounting access doors.
4.
Flexible ducts.
5.
Air distribution devices.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1.
Special fittings.
2.
Manual volume damper installations
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 page 1 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation C.
1.3
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling mounting items. Show ceiling mounting access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
B.
Regulatory Requirements: 1.
Comply with NFPA 90A, Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems,
2.
Comply with NFPA 90B, Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
Installer Qualifications: Experienced installer having minimum 10 years' documented experience.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
GENERAL A.
2.2
Where products and manufacturers are listed, make submittals for proposed comparable products and substitutions for review and approval.
MATERIALS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified, or equal approved as a comparable product: 1.
Volume Dampers: a. b. c. d. e. f.
2.
Turning Vanes: a. b.
3.
American Warming and Ventilating, div. Mestek. Cesco Products, div. Mestek. Ductmate Industries, Inc. Flexmaster USA, Inc.
Flexible Ducts: a. b. c.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Ductmate Industries, Inc. Metalaire brand, Metal Industries, Inc.
Duct Mounting Access Doors: a. b. c. d.
4.
Air Balance, Inc. American Warming and Ventilating, div. Mestek. Flexmaster USA, Inc. Metalaire brand, Metal Industries, Inc. Ruskin Company. Vent Products Company, Inc.
Flexmaster USA, Inc. Hart & Cooley, Inc. McGill AirFlow, div. United McGill Corporation. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 page 2 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 5.
Air Distribution Devices: a. c. d.
B.
C.
Titus Krueger Tuttle & Bailey
Sheet Metal: Comply with SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. 1.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock forming quality; complying with ASTM A653 and having G90 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view.
2.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A480.
3.
Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B209, alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
4.
Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221, alloy 6063, temper T6.
5.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
6.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4 inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8 inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
Volume Dampers: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class. 1.
Pressure Classes of 3 Inch wg or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
2.
Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple or single blade, parallel or opposed blade design as indicated, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. a.
b. c. d. e. 3.
Steel Frames: Hat shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts. Roll Formed Steel Blades: 0.064 inch thick, galvanized sheet steel. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. Bearings: Stainless-steel sleeve. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
Jackshaft: 1 inch diameter, galvanized steel pipe rotating within pipe bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple damper assemblies. a.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper in multiple damper assembly. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 page 3 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
D.
Damper Hardware: Zinc plated, die cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32 inch thick zinc plated steel, and 3/4 inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
E.
Turning Vanes: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes. 1.
F.
Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous glass fill.
Duct Mounting Access Doors: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. 1.
Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where indicated. Include 1 inch by 1 inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
2.
Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend over tabs and foam gaskets. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows: a. b. c.
3.
Pressure Relief Access Door: Single wall and duct mounting; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where indicated, latches, and retaining chain. a.
G.
Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend over tabs and foam gaskets.
4.
Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.
5.
Insulation: 1 inch thick, fibrous glass or polystyrene foam board.
Flexible Ducts: 1.
Noninsulated Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, 2 ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring steel wire. a. b. c.
2.
Pressure Rating: 10 inch wg positive and 1.0 inch wg negative. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.
Insulated Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, 2 ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous glass insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film. a. b. c.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
Less Than 12 Inches Square: Secure with two sash locks. Up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. Up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles.
Pressure Rating: 10 inch wg positive and 1.0 inch wg negative. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 page 4 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation H.
2.3
2.4
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless steel band with cadmium plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches to suit duct size.
DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A.
Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct insulation thickness.
B.
Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.
AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES A.
General: 1.
Unless otherwise noted, provide all air devices equipped with volume control dampers, adjustable from the air device face.
2.
For those supply air devices which are surface-mounted, provide sponge rubber seal around edges.
3.
Maximum sound level for supply diffusers and return and exhaust grilles shall not exceed NC 35.
4.
Provide adjustable pattern devices. When not applicable, provide baffles to direct air away from walls, columns, or other obstructions within radius of diffuser operation.
5.
Provide air device frames compatible with adjacent finish surfaces involved. Refer to Drawings and reflected ceiling plans. a. b. c.
d.
6.
B.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
In Modular Ceilings: Snap-in T-bar, inverted T-bar or spline type as required. For Perforated Face Devices in Hard Ceilings: curved, surface mounted. Diffusers in Rough-textured Ceiling such as acoustical plaster: provide anti-smudge frames, or refer to Architectural drawings for mounting details. Devices in plaster surfaces: provide plaster frames, or refer to Architectural drawings for mounting details.
Performance: Data shall be obtained from tests conducted in accordance with ISO Standard 5219, ISO Standard 3741, and ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 70. Sound NC ratings of air devices shall be based on a room absorption of 10 db, re 10-12 watts.
Ceiling Diffusers and Grulles 1.
Ceiling diffusers and grilles shall be aluminum or steel as scheduled, unless otherwise indicated, and furnished with frame type appropriate to installation.
2.
Ceiling diffuser and grille models, sizes and finishes shall be as shown on drawings and/or as scheduled. Unless noted otherwise, diffusers shall have baked enamel finish with color selected by Architect. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 page 5 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
2.7
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
3.
Perforated face ceiling diffusers shall have field adjustable pattern controllers accessible through removable or hinged faceplate.
4.
Unless otherwise indicated, interior of perforated face diffusers and grilees shall be finished in flat black.
5.
Square plague architectural ceiling diffusers shall have the face panel constructed from 22-gauge steel. The back pan works with the formed edges of the face panel to deliver a uniform 360 degree horizontal air pattern. Unless otherwise indicated, furnish ceiling diffusers and grilles with round neck inlets. Provide directional blow clips to direct the air blow to 2-way or 3-way as shown on the drawing.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A.
Fabricate of neoprene coated flameproof fabric tightly crimped into metal edging strip and attach to ducting and equipment by screws or bolts at b inches intervals. Flexible duct connections shall be provide with a sufficient material width to prevent interference with free operation of fan vibration isolation systems.
B.
Provide flexible connections at all supply and return ducts connecting to all rooftop air conditioning units (AC-1, AC-2 & AC-3) and makeup air unit (MAU-1).
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION A.
Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards, for fibrous glass ducts.
B.
Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized steel accessories in galvanized steel and fibrous glass ducts, stainless steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C.
Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
D.
Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct widths from branch takeoff.
E.
Access Doors: Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units:
AC Transit Oakland, CA
1.
On both sides of duct coils.
2.
Downstream from volume dampers, turning vanes, and equipment.
3.
Adjacent to fire dampers, providing access to reset or reinstall fusible links.
4.
To interior of ducts for cleaning; before and after each change in direction, at maximum 50-foot spacing. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 page 6 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 5.
On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available.
6.
Install the following sizes for duct mounting, rectangular access doors: a. b. c. d. e. f.
7.
One Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. Two Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.
Install the following sizes for duct mounting, pressure relief access doors: a. b. c. d.
3.2
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
One Hand or Inspection Access: 7 inches in diameter. Two Hand Access: 10 inches in diameter. Head and Hand Access: 13 inches in diameter. Head and Shoulders Access: 19 inches in diameter.
F.
Install fire smoke dampers in accordance with manufacturer’s printed installation instructions including provisions for any supplementary framing and blocking of metal or wood studs in drywall partitions. Coordinate requirements for this work with other disciplines.
G.
Install duct mounted smoke detectors, supplied under Division 26, in ducts upstream of associated smoke damper and fire smoke dampers per manufacturer’s printed installation.
H.
Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws.
I.
Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
ADJUSTING A.
Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
B.
Final positioning of manual volume dampers is specified in Section 23 05 93, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 page 7 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
AC Transit Oakland, CA
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 page 8 of 8
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
SECTION 23 82 19 FAN COIL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY A.
B.
1.2
1.
Section 23 05 13, Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment
2.
Section 23 05 48, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Equipment
3.
Section 23 05 93, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC
4.
Section 26 00 00, Electrical Work
Section includes ducted fan coil units and accessories.
SUBMITTALS A.
1.3
Related Sections:
Details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1.
Fan data includes capacity, static pressure, drive and motor
2.
Cooling Coil data includes fin series, dimension, rows, capacity, pressure drop at water side and air side
3.
Unit casing includes frame and panel construction and materials, insulation data, and access clearances.
4.
Connections: size, type and location.
B.
Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Manufacturer’s operating and maintenance instructions.
D.
Seismic restraint details and locations
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
AMCA 99 – Standards Handbook
B.
AMCA 230: Field Performance Measurement of Fan Systems
AC Transit Oakland, CA
FAN COIL UNITS 23 82 19 page 1 of 4
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
1.4
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
C.
AMCA 300: Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fan
D.
AHRI 410: Standard for Forced-Circulation Air Cooling and Air Heating Coils
E.
AHRI 440: Standard for Performance Rating of Room Fan Coils
F.
NFPA 90A: Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems
G.
ASHRAE 52 – Method of Testing General Ventilation Air Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size
H.
SMACNA: HVAC Duct Construction Standard
I.
ASTM A525: Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate layout and installation of fan coil units and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates or is supported by ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system components and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
MANUFACTURERS A.
Trane Inc.
B.
Carrier Corporation
C.
Or equal
GENERAL A.
Provide blow-through direct drive or belt drive hideaway for ducted application or exposed finished cabinet as required in documents.
B.
Unit shall be complete, prepackaged, pre-piped and pre-wired including fan, coil and filter section.
CABINET A.
Continuous 18 gage galvanized steel base casing and inlet plenum, 1” filter frame for back return air. Baked enamel finish.
B.
Provide acoustical cabinet where fan coils are located over office space.
C.
Provide stainless steel cabinet with complete marine installations where indicated on drawings.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
FAN COIL UNITS 23 82 19 page 2 of 4
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
FANS AND MOTORS A.
DWDI, forward curved, centrifugal
B.
Statistically and dynamically balanced.
C.
Permanent split capacitor type with resilient mount, sleeve bearing with oilers, inherent thermal overload protection with automatic reset.
D.
All motors are brushless DC/electronically commutated motors (ECM) factoryprogrammed and run-tested in assembled units. The motor controller is mounted in control box with a built-in integrated user interface and LED tachometer.
E.
Motors can be operated at three speeds or with a field-supplied variable speed controller.
COILS A.
Extended surface plate aluminum fins, staggered 3/8 inch O.D. seamless copper tubes. Aluminum fins and mechanically bonded to the copper tubes. Coil stubouts are 5/8” O.D. copper tubing.
B.
Factory proof-tested coils at 300 psig and leak tested at 100 psig.
FILTERS A.
Filters are located behind an integral access door on horizontal type units.
B.
Filters are 1” MERV 8.
MODULATING CONTROL VALVES A.
Two way and three way modulating valves are rated for a maximum pressure differential across the valves of 50 psig.
B.
Modulating control valves have a maximum working pressure of 300 pisg. The maximum entering water temperature of the valve is 200 °F.
DRAIN PAN A.
Continuous galvanized steel, closed cell insulation, mastic seal, and pitch to drain connection.
B.
Secondary drain pan with overflow pipe.
AC Transit Oakland, CA
FAN COIL UNITS 23 82 19 page 3 of 4
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements, instructions, shop drawings, and contract requirements.
B.
Anchor to structure with seismic restraints and provide seismic calculations in accordance with Section 23 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
C.
Coordinate fan coil electrical installation with Division 26.
D.
Coordinate fan coil controls with Section 23 09 23 Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC.
E.
Provide water pipe connections to pre-piped coils in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
TRAINING A.
Provide training to Owner’s personnel to adjust, operate and maintain fan coil units.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland, CA
FAN COIL UNITS 23 82 19 page 4 of 4
April 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
SECTION 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY A.
B.
1.02
Building wire and connectors.
2.
Electricity metering components.
3.
Sleeves for electrical penetrations.
4.
Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
5.
Accessories required for a complete installation.
Requirements of this section apply to all sections in Division 26 and other sections that include electrical work.
Product Types: 1.
EMT: Electrical metal tubing, ANSI C80.3.
2.
FMC: Flexible metallic conduit.
3.
IMC: Intermediate metallic conduit, ANSI C80.
4.
LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
5.
RMC: Rigid metallic conduit.
6.
RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit, NEMA PC-2.
SUBMITTALS A.
1.04
1.
DEFINITIONS A.
1.03
Section Includes:
Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts and single line diagram of electrical component assemblies.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Regulatory Requirements: 1.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 page 1 of 4
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
2. 1.05
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Comply with NFPA 70.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings for electrical supports, raceways, and cable with general construction work.
B.
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment that requires positioning before closing in the building.
C.
Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by other trades.
D.
Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items concealed by finished surfaces.
E.
Where electrical identification devices are applied to field finished surfaces, coordinate installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface.
PART 2 – NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01
3.02
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A.
Comply with NECA 1.
B.
Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.
C.
Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom.
D.
Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.
F.
Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
APPLICATIONS A.
Raceways: 1.
Outdoor Installations: a.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
Exposed: IMC, RMC.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 page 2 of 4
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
2.
3.03
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
b.
Concealed: IMC, RMC.
c.
Underground, Single Run: Concrete encased RNC without reinforcement.
d.
Underground, Grouped: Concrete encased RNC without reinforcement.
e.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC.
f.
Boxes and Enclosures: indicated.
NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4, unless otherwise
Indoor Installations: a.
Exposed: EMT except in wet or damp locations, use IMC.
b.
Concealed in Walls or Ceilings: EMT.
c.
In Concrete Slab: RNC, RMC.
d.
Below Slab on Grade or in Crawlspace: Corrosion protected IMC,
e.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment: FMC; except in wet or damp locations: LFMC.
f.
Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
RNC.
RACEWAY AND CABLE INSTALLATION A.
Conceal raceways and cables, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors.
B.
Keep legs of raceway bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel.
C.
Use RMC elbows where RNC turns out of slab.
D.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use woven polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200 lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wires.
E.
Install interior telephone and signal system raceways, 2 inch trade size and smaller, in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90 degree bends or equivalent. Add pull boxes where necessary to accomplish this.
F.
Connect motors and equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement with a maximum of 72-inches flexible conduit. Install LFMC in wet or damp locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.
G.
Set floor boxes level and trim after installation to fit flush to finished floor surface.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 page 3 of 4
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
3.04
3.05
WIRING METHODS FOR POWER, LIGHTING, AND CONTROL CIRCUITS A.
Use wiring methods specified below to the extent permitted by applicable codes as interpreted by authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Exposed Feeders: Insulated single conductors in raceway.
C.
Concealed Feeders in Ceilings, Walls, Gypsum Board Partitions: Insulated single conductors in raceway.
D.
Concealed Feeders in Concrete, Below Floors on Grade: Insulated single conductors in raceway.
E.
Exposed Branch Circuits: Insulated single conductors in raceway.
F.
Concealed Branch Circuits in Ceilings, Walls and Gypsum Board Partitions: Insulated single conductors in raceway.
G.
Concealed Branch Circuits in Concrete, below Floors on Grade: conductors in raceway.
H.
Underground Feeders and Branch Circuits: Insulated single conductors in raceway.
I.
Remote Control Signaling and Power-Limited Circuits, Classes 1, 2, and 3: conductors in raceway unless otherwise indicated.
Insulated
Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
FIRESTOPPING A.
3.07
Insulated single
WIRING INSTALLATION A.
3.06
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Apply firestopping to cable and raceway sleeves and other penetrations of fire rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original undisturbed fire resistance ratings of assemblies. Refer to Section 07 84 00, Firestopping.
CUTTING AND PATCHING A.
Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
B.
Repair, refinish, and touch up disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland,CA
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 page 4 of 4
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
SECTION 26 05 19 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY A.
1.02
1.
Building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.
2.
Accessories required for a complete installation.
SUBMITTALS A.
1.03
Section Includes:
Field quality control test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Regulatory Requirements: 1.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
2.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01
MATERIALS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified, or equal approved as a substitution: 1.
2.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
Conductors and Cables: a.
Alcan Products Corporation, Alcan Cable div.
b.
American Insulated Wire Corp., a Leviton Company.
c.
General Cable Technologies Corp.
d.
Southwire Company.
Connectors and Splices: a.
AFC Cable Systems, Inc., div. Tyco Electrical and Metal Products.
b.
AMP brand, Tyco Electronics.
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 page 1 of 4 March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
B.
C.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
c.
Anderson Electrical Products, Inc., subsidiary Hubbell Incorporated.
d.
O-Z/Gedney brand, EGS Electrical Group.
e.
3M Company, Electrical Products Division.
Conductor Material: Copper complying with NEMA WC 70; solid or stranded conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller, stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. 1.
Conductor Insulation Types: Type THHN-THWN complying with NEMA WC 70.
2.
Multiconductor Cable: Type SO with ground wire.
Connectors and Splices: Factory fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01
3.02
CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS A.
Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
B.
Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
C.
Feeders Concealed in Concrete, Below Slabs on Grade: conductors in raceway.
D.
Exposed Branch Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
E.
Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
F.
Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete and Below Slabs on Grade: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
G.
Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord.
H.
Underground Feeders and Branch Circuits: Type THWN in raceways.
Type THHN-THWN, single
INSTALLATION A.
Conceal conduits in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Use manufacturer approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C.
Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 page 2 of 4 March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
3.03
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
D.
Install exposed conduits parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.
E.
Support conduits in accordance with requirements.
F.
Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
G.
Wiring at Outlets: Install conductors at each outlet with at least 12 inches of slack.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Testing: Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS (Acceptance Testing Specifications), Section 7.3.1. Certify compliance with test parameters.
B.
Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record: 1.
Test procedures used.
2.
Test results that comply with requirements.
3.
Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland,CA
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 page 3 of 4 March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
AC Transit Oakland,CA
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 page 4 of 4 March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
SECTION 26 05 24 Wiring Devices PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
Single and duplex receptacles, ground fault circuit interrupters, and integral surge suppression units.
2.
Single and double pole snap switches and dimmer switches.
3.
Device wall plates.
4.
Floor service outlets, poke through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet assemblies.
5.
Accessories required for a complete installation.
1.02
NOT USED
1.03
NOT USED
1.04
SUBMITTALS
1.05
A.
Product Data: Technical data for each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.
C.
Samples: For each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.
D.
Field quality control test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
Regulatory Requirements: 1.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
2.
Comply with NFPA 70.
WIRING DEVICES 26 05 24 page 1 of 4
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01
GENERAL A.
2.02
Where products and manufacturers are listed, make submittals for proposed comparable products and substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00, Product Requirements, and Section 01 25 00, Substitution Procedures.
MATERIALS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or equal approved as a substitution: 1.
2.
B.
Wiring Devices: a.
Bryant Electric, div. Hubbell Inc.
b.
Cooper Wiring Devices.
c.
Hubbell Wiring Device-Kellems, div. Hubbell Incorporated.
d.
Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
e.
Pass & Seymour/Legrand.
Multioutlet Assemblies: a.
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
b.
Wiremold / Legrand.
Receptacles: 1.
Straight Blade Type Receptacles: DSCC W-C-596G, and UL 498.
Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA/ANSI WD 6,
2.
Straight Blade and Locking Receptacles: Heavy-Duty grade.
3.
Straight Blade Receptacles: Hospital grade.
4.
GFCI Receptacles: Straight blade, nonfeed through type, Hospital grade, with integral NEMA/ANSI WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle; complying with UL 498 and UL 943. Design units for installation in a 2-3/4 inch deep outlet box without an adapter.
5.
C.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
Receptacles fed from UPS panel shall be colored distinctively from normal receptacles and shall be marked “UPS” via hot stamping or another permanent method of marking. Switches:
1.
Single and Double Pole Switches: Comply with DSCC W-S-896F and UL 20.
2.
Snap Switches: Heavy Duty grade, quiet type.
WIRING DEVICES 26 05 24 page 2 of 4
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
3.
D.
2.03
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Dimmer Switches: Modular, full wave, solid state units with integral, quiet on/off switches and audible frequency and EMI/RFI filters. a.
Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching to suit connections.
b.
Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: Modular, 120 V, 60 Hz with continuously adjustable rotary knob, toggle switch, or slider; single pole with soft tap or other quiet switch; EMI/RFI filter to eliminate interference; and 5-inch wire connecting leads.
c.
Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.
Wall Plates: Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 1.
Plate Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2.
Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high impact thermoplastic 0.04 inch.
3.
Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
4.
Material for Wet Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in wet locations.
FINISHES A.
Color: 1.
Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70.
As selected by Engineer
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01
INSTALLATION A.
Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines.
B.
Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging.
C.
Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers.
D.
Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.
E.
Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting.
F.
Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
WIRING DEVICES 26 05 24 page 3 of 4
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
3.02
IDENTIFICATION A.
Comply with Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems. 1.
3.03
3.04
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.
CONNECTIONS A.
Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B.
Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19, Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
B.
Perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1.
After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements.
2.
Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland,CA
WIRING DEVICES 26 05 24 page 4 of 4
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY A.
1.02
1.03
Section Includes: 1.
Grounding of electrical systems and equipment.
2.
Accessories required for a complete installation.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: Technical data for ground rods and grounding conductors.
B.
Reports: Field quality control test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
B.
Regulatory Requirements: 1.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled under UL 467 as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
2.
Comply with NFPA 70.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01
GENERAL A.
2.02
Where products and manufacturers are listed, make submittals for proposed comparable products and substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00, Product Requirements, and Section 01 25 00, Substitution Procedures.
COMPONENTS A.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product:
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 page 1 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
B.
C.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
1.
A. B. Chance, subsidiary of Hubbell Power Systems.
2.
Dofasco Tubular Products.
3.
Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co.
4.
Ideal Industries, Inc.
5.
ILSCO.
6.
Kearney brand, Cooper Power Systems.
7.
Raco brand, Hubbell Power Systems.
8.
Robbins Lightning, Inc.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Grounding Conductors 1.
For insulated conductors, comply with Section 26 05 19, Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
2.
Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green colored insulation.
3.
Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.
4.
Underground Conductors: Bare, stranded, unless otherwise indicated.
5.
Bare, Solid Copper Conductors: ASTM B3.
6.
Assembly of Bare, Stranded-Copper Conductors: ASTM B8.
7.
Copper Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor.
8.
Copper Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
9.
Tinned Copper Bonding Jumper: Tinned copper tape, braided copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
10.
Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulated spacer.
11.
Connectors: Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items. Use compression type where exposed and exothermic-welded type, in kit form, selected per manufacturer's written instructions where concealed or buried in earth
Grounding Electrodes: Ground rods, copper clad steel; size: 3/4 inch in diameter by 120 inches long.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 page 2 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01
INSTALLATION A.
Use copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.
B.
In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.
C.
Exothermic Welded Connections: underground connections.
D.
Underground Grounding Conductors: Use copper conductor, No. 4/0 AWG minimum. Bury at least 24 inches below grade or bury directly below duct bank when installed as part of the duct bank.
E.
Equipment Grounding Conductors: Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated.
F.
Use for connections to structural steel and for
1.
Install insulated equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and branch circuits.
2.
Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables.
Ground Rods: Drive ground rods until tops are 12 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated. 1.
Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use exothermic welds, except as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging copper coating.
G.
Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
H.
Connections: Make connections so that galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so that metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
1.
Use electroplated or hot tin coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer to order of galvanic series.
2.
Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
3.
Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
4.
Exothermic Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 page 3 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
3.02
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
5.
Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure type connectors.
6.
Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated.
7.
Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.
8.
Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.
9.
Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable.
I.
Duct Banks: Install a No. 4/0 bare copper grounding conductor below each duct bank in direct contact with the earth.
J.
Pad Mounted Equipment: Install four ground rods and counterpoise circling pad. Ground pad mounted equipment and noncurrent carrying metal items by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Use copper conductor not less than No. 4/0 AWG for counterpoise and for taps to equipment ground pad. Bury counterpoise not less than 18 inches below grade and 6 inches from the foundation.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
Testing: Owner will engage independent agency to perform field quality control testing: 1.
After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2.
Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground resistance level is indicated and at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after the last trace of precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests, by the fall of potential method according to IEEE 81.
3.
Provide drawings locating each ground rod, ground rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 page 4 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. maximum values are as follows: a.
Equipment: 5 ohms.
b.
Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms.
Nominal
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland,CA
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 page 5 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
AC Transit Oakland,CA
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 page 6 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Section Includes: 1.
Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
2.
Construction requirements for concrete bases.
DEFINITIONS A.
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
C.
RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B.
Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.
C.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.
D.
Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For the following: 1.
1.5
Steel slotted support systems.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1 (D1.1M), Structural Welding Code—Steel.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 page 1 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.6
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
GENERAL A.
2.2
Where products and manufacturers are listed, make submittals for proposed comparable products and substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00, Product Requirements, and Section 01 25 00, Substitution Procedures.
SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A.
Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of the following manufacturers, or equal approved as a comparable product: a.
Allied Tube & Conduit, div. Tyco Electrical and Metal Products.
b.
Cooper B-Line, Inc., div. Cooper Industries.
c.
Erico International Corporation.
d.
GS Metals Corp.
e.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
f.
Unistrut, div. Tyco Electrical and Metal Products.
g.
Wesanco, Inc.
2.
Metallic Coatings: MFMA-4.
Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to
3.
Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B.
Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway to be supported.
C.
Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A36, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
D.
Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:
AC Transit Oakland,CA
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 page 2 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation 1.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a.
2.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: 1)
Hilti, Inc.
2)
ITW Ramset/Red Head, div. Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
3)
MKT Fastening.
4)
Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a.
2.3
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: 1)
Cooper B-Line, Inc., div. Cooper Industries.
2)
Hilti, Inc.
3)
ITW Ramset/Red Head, div. Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
4)
MKT Fastening.
3.
Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
4.
Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.
5.
Through Bolts: ASTM A325.
6.
Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
Structural type, hex head, and high strength.
Comply with
FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A.
Description: Shop welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
APPLICATION A.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems unless requirements in this section are stricter. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 page 3 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation B.
3.2
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.
B.
Strength of Support Assemblies: Select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.
C.
Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1.
To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2.
To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3.
To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.
4.
To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5.
Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
6.
To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1, with lock washers and nuts, or beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.
7.
To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.
INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A.
3.4
Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
D.
3.3
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
CONCRETE BASES A.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 page 4 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
B.
Use 3000 psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03.
C.
Anchor equipment to concrete base. 1.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
2.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
3.
Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Touchup: Clean and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.
E.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780. END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland,CA
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 page 5 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
AC Transit Oakland,CA
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 page 6 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
1.02
1.03
1.04
Raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.
DEFINITIONS A.
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B.
FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
C.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
D.
LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
E.
RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of components for raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
C.
Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. 1.
Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.
2.
Detail assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
3.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
4.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 page 1 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
1.05 A.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01
GENERAL A.
2.02
Where products and manufacturers are listed, make submittals for proposed comparable products and substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00, Product Requirements, and Section 01 25 00, Subsitution Procedures.
METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: 1.
AFC Cable Systems, Inc., div. Tyco Electrical and Metal Products.
2.
Anaconda Sealtite brand, Anamet Electrical Inc.
3.
Electri-Flex Co.
4.
Allied Tube and Conduit, div. Tyco Electrical and Metal Products.
5.
O-Z/Gedney, div. EGS Electrical Group.
6.
Wheatland Tube Co., div. Carlyle Group.
B.
Rigid Steel Conduit: NEMA/ANSI C80.1.
C.
IMC: NEMA/ANSI C80.6.
D.
EMT and Fittings: NEMA/ANSI C80.3. 1.
2.03
Fittings: Compression type.
E.
FMC: Zinc-coated steel.
F.
LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
G.
Fittings: NEMA/ANSI FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials.
NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: 1.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
Anaconda Sealtite brand, Anamet Electrical Inc.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 page 2 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
2.04
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
2.
Arnco Corp.
3.
Cantex Inc.
4.
CertainTeed Corp,; Pipe & Plastics Group.
5.
Condux International.
6.
Elecsys Corporation.
7.
Electri-Flex Co.
8.
Carlon brand, Lamson & Sessions.
9.
RACO brand, Hubbell Inc.
10.
AFC Cable Systems, div. Tyco Electrical and Metal Products.
11.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
B.
ENT: NEMA TC 13.
C.
RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC.
D.
ENT and RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: 1.
Cooper Crouse-Hinds, div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.
2.
Appleton Electric, brand of EGS Electrical Group, joint venture of Emerson and SPX Corporation.
3.
Erickson Electrical Equipment Co.
4.
Hoffman Enclosures, div. CHS Controls AB.
5.
Killark brand, Hubbell Inc.
6.
O-Z/Gedney, div. EGS Electrical Group.
7.
RACO brand, Hubbell Inc.
8.
Robroy Industries.
9.
Adalet Enclosure Systems, div. Scott Fetzer Co.
10.
Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.
11.
Thomas & Betts Corporation. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 page 3 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
12.
Wiremold / Legrand.
13.
Daniel Woodhead brand, Woodhead Industries, div. Molex Inc.
B.
Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA/ANSI OS 1.
C.
Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA/ANSI FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
D.
Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA/ANSI OS 2.
E.
Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular.
F.
Floor Boxes: Nonmetallic, nonadjustable, round.
G.
Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA/ANSI OS 1.
H.
Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: cover.
I.
Hinged-Cover Enclosures: latch.
J.
2.05
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
NEMA/ANSI FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed
NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush
1.
Metal Enclosures: enamel.
Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard
2.
Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.
Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
FACTORY FINISHES A.
Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard gray paint applied to factory-assembled surface raceways, enclosures, and cabinets before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01
RACEWAY APPLICATION A.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
Outdoors: 1.
Exposed: Rigid steel or IMC.
2.
Concealed: Rigid steel or IMC.
3.
Underground, Single Run: Concrete encased RNC without reinforcement.
4.
Underground, Grouped: Concrete encased RNC without reinforcement. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 page 4 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
B.
5.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
6.
Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
Indoors: 1.
Exposed: Rigid steel below 8 feet AFF ; EMT more than 8 feet AFF
2.
Concealed: EMT
3.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.
4.
Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.
5.
Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except as follows: a.
Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic.
C.
Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size .
D.
Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1.
3.02
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Intermediate Steel Conduit: otherwise indicated.
Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless
INSTALLATION A.
Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
B.
Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
C.
Support raceways as specified in Section 26 05 29, Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
D.
Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.
E.
Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so that curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
F.
Make bends and offsets so that ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. 1.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance, considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 page 5 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
H.
I.
Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1/3 of slab thickness where practical and leave at least 2 inches of concrete cover. 1.
Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement.
2.
Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete.
3.
Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.
4.
Change from nonmetallic tubing to rigid steel conduit before turning up.
Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow surface contours as much as possible. 1.
J.
Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports.
Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints wrench tight. 1.
K.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.
Terminations: 1.
Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside and one outside box.
2.
Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so that end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so that coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so that no threads are exposed.
L.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.
M.
Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to above requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements.
N.
Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used 6 inches above the floor. Install screwdriver-operated, threaded plugs flush with floor for future equipment connections.
O.
Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or
AC Transit Oakland,CA
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 page 6 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections. P. 3.03
PROTECTION A.
3.04
Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
2.
Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.
CLEANING A.
After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished raceways and boxes, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland,CA
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 page 7 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
AC Transit Oakland,CA
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 page 8 of 8
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
SECTION 26 24 16 Panelboards PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY A.
1.02
Section Includes: 1.
Distribution and branch circuit panelboards.
2.
Accessories required for a complete installation.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical data for each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each panelboard: 1.
2.
1.03
Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following data: a.
Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
b.
Bus configuration, and current, and voltage ratings.
c.
Short circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
d.
Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.
D.
Field quality control test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
Regulatory Requirements 1.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
2.
Comply with NEMA PB 1.
3.
Comply with NFPA 70. PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 page 1 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01
MATERIALS A.
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product: 1.
ABB Group.
2.
Cutler-Hammer brand, Eaton Corporation.
3.
General Electric Company.
4.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
5.
Square D brand, Schneider Electric.
Components: 1.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
Enclosures: Flush and surface mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1, suitable for environmental conditions at installed location. a.
Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
b.
Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
2.
Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush mounted fronts, overlap box.
3.
Finish: Enamel finish over corrosion resistant treatment or primer coat.
4.
Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted in metal frame, inside panelboard door.
5.
Bus: Hard drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
6.
Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch circuit equipment ground conductors; bonded to box.
7.
Panelboard Short Circuit Rating: As indicated on Drawings.
8.
Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short circuit current available at terminals, as indicated on drawings. All devices shall be fully rated for the available fault current, no series ratings will be allowed.
9.
Spaces for Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.
10.
Skirt for Surface Mounted Panelboards: Same thickness and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.
11.
Feed through Lugs: device.
Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main
PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 page 2 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
C.
D.
E.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards: 1.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.
2.
Doors: Front mounted with concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
Distribution Panelboards: 1.
Doors: Front mounted, and secured with vault type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
2.
Provide branch overcurrent protective of one of the following: a.
For Circuit Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt on circuit breakers.
b.
For Circuit Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt on circuit breakers.
Overcurrent Protective Devices: 1.
Molded Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents without use of fuses. a.
Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time current element for low level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
b.
GFCI Circuit Breakers: sensitivity.
c.
Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.
Single and two pole configurations with 5-mA trip
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01
INSTALLATION A.
Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. otherwise indicated.
B.
Mounting Heights: Top of trim 74 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish.
D.
Install filler plates in unused protective device spaces.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 page 3 of 6
Install flush unless
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
3.02
3.03
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
E.
Provision for Future Circuits at Flush Panelboards: Stub four 1 inch empty conduits into crawl space or above drop ceiling.
F.
Wiring in Panelboard Gutters: Arrange conductors into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.
IDENTIFICATION A.
Identify field installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified.
B.
Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion resistant screws.
C.
Circuit Directory: Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
B.
C.
AC Transit Oakland,CA
Testing and Inspection: After installing panelboards and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. 1.
Procedures: Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection indicated in NETA ATS, Section 7.6 for molded case circuit breakers.
2.
Test insulation resistance of panelboard bus with a megohmmeter, and ground continuity of cabinet and ground bus. Reject buses with insulation resistance less than 2 megohms.
3.
Correct defective and malfunctioning units on site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Balancing Loads: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes as follows: 1.
Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.
2.
Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility and at time directed.
3.
After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record load readings before and after changes and submit test records.
4.
Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.
Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove panel fronts so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 page 4 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
1.
D.
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare certified report identifying panelboards checked and describing scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. END OF SECTION
AC Transit Oakland,CA
PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 page 5 of 6
March 2016
Operation Control Center Relocation
Invitation for Bid # 2016-1370
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
AC Transit Oakland,CA
PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 page 6 of 6
March 2016
